JP2020199358A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine, even when a power supply of the game machine is turned off, capable of notifying a specific device of opening of a door body.SOLUTION: When an inner frame 12 is closed, an inner-frame terminal plate output circuit 300a can ground one end of a capacitor CD7 by a switch SW3-3. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, an electric charge accumulated in the capacitor CD7 when the inner frame 12 is opened, is instantaneously discharged via the switch SW3-3 so as to be nulled. In this way, until the inner frame 12 is opened again, the electric charge accumulated in the capacitor CD7 is constantly nulled, so that, even when the inner frame 12 is continuously opened a plurality of times in a short time, an integration circuit 281 is normally operated, so that, regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12, a fall period of a voltage to be applied to TRG terminal of a timer IC1 can be set to a fixed time (approximately 2 ms).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 34

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine, a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (for example, a slot machine), a rotating cylinder type gaming machine using a gaming ball, and the like.

In pachinko machines, when a ball driven into the game area enters the symbol operating port, a lottery is performed at the timing of the entry. Further, in a slot machine or a rotating game machine using a game ball, when the start lever is operated, a lottery is performed at the timing of the operation. As a result of the lottery, for example, when a big hit occurs, a large number of prize balls and coins can be paid out. Since the control for determining the lottery and the jackpot is performed by the main control device, the main control device is likely to be the target of fraudulent activity.

As a specific fraudulent act, for example, the main control device is replaced with a fraudulent one in which a jackpot occurs frequently, or a fraudulent board (for example, a "hanging board") is connected to the main control device to make a jackpot. There are things that illegally generate. Further, in the case of a pachinko machine, there is also a fraudulent act of illegally bending a nail driven on the surface of the game board to make it easier for the ball to enter the winning opening or the symbol operating opening.
In the case of pachinko machines, the main control device is mounted on the back of the game board. On the other hand, a glass frame is provided on the front surface of the game board, and the glass frame can be opened and closed individually with respect to the inner frame body on which the game board is mounted. Therefore, when a fraudster commits a fraudulent act against the game board or the main control device, the inner frame or the glass frame must be opened, but when the inner frame or the glass frame is opened, the inner frame or the glass frame must be opened. Since the opening is detected by the sensor and notified to the hall computer that manages the amusement park, it is possible to easily grasp which pachinko machine the fraudulent act was committed against.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-198332

However, if an intruder invades, for example, at midnight after the amusement park is closed and the intruder opens the inner frame or the glass frame and commits an illegal act, the power of the pachinko machine is turned off at that time. Since the pachinko machine is stopped, there is a problem that the opening of the inner frame or the glass frame cannot be detected and the opening cannot be notified to the hall computer.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and when the door body is opened while the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the opening can be grasped. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be used.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided in a space formed by a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and the door body and the main body to control the game. It is provided with a control means for performing the operation, and when the door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the door body with respect to the main body and the door opening detecting means detect the opening of the door body, the initial state is set. For example, based on the period adjusting means for outputting a signal having a predetermined output period regardless of the opening period of the door body by the operation from the initial state to the specified time, and the signal output by the period adjusting means. The door opening detecting means includes an output means for outputting the detection result by the door opening detecting means to a specific device, and a power supply means for supplying power to the output means and the period adjusting means to operate the door opening detecting means. The power supply means includes an initialization means for initializing the period adjustment means when the closing of the door body is detected, and the power supply means includes the output means and the period adjustment means when the power of the game machine is turned off. It is equipped with a means of operating during off to operate by supplying power to the door.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the door opening detecting means stops the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means when the closing of the door body is detected. It has a stopping means.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the period adjusting means is configured by using a storage means for storing electric charges, and the power supply means from an initial state to a specified time. The voltage generated by the electric charge stored in the storage means by the electric power supplied to the power storage means is output as a signal having the predetermined output period.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the initialization means stores electricity constituting the period adjusting means when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. It is provided with a discharging means for initializing the storage means by discharging the electric charge stored in the means.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein the stopping means is the power supply means when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. It is equipped with a release means for disconnecting the electrical connection between the door and the period adjustment means.

The gaming machine according to claim 6 is the gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the initialization means stores electricity constituting the period adjusting means when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. A discharge releasing means for releasing a short circuit between the means and the ground by the discharging means is provided, and the stopping means includes the power supply means and the period adjusting means when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. A power supply restarting means for stopping the disconnection of the electrical connection by the releasing means and restarting the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means is provided, and the door opening detecting means opens the door body. When detected, the power supply resuming means includes the power supply means and the period adjusting means after the short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the ground by the discharging means is released by the discharging releasing means. When the disconnection of the electrical connection by the release means is stopped, the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means is restarted, and the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detection means, the discharge is performed. After the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means is released by the releasing means, the means short-circuits the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means to the ground and charges the charge stored in the storage means. It discharges.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means operates from the initial state to the specified time regardless of the opening time of the door body. Outputs a signal that has a predetermined output period. Then, the output means outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the signal output from the period adjusting means. Here, the output period of the signal output by the period adjusting means is determined by the operation of the period adjusting means from the initial state to the specified time. In order to have the period adjusting means output a signal having a predetermined output period regardless of the opening time of the door body, the initialization means is a period adjusting means when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. To the initial state. Therefore, the period adjusting means can always operate from the initial state when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. Therefore, each time the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is normally and stably operated from the initial state to the specified time, so that the output period predetermined for the period adjusting means is obtained. There is an effect that the signal can be output normally and stably, and the detection result can be output normally and stably from the output means to the specific device.

Further, according to the game machine according to claim 1, the door open detection means is used even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped in addition to the state where the power of the game machine is turned on. When the opening of the door body is detected by the door body, power is supplied to the output means and the period adjusting means by the operating means during off. Therefore, even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, a signal having a predetermined output period by the period adjusting means is obtained. Is output, and the output means outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the output signal. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, there is an effect that the game machine with the door body opened can be identified by a specific device. is there.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the stopping means is transferred to the period adjusting means. Stop the power supply by the power supply means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be put into the initial state by the initialization means while the operation of the period adjusting means is stopped by the stopping means. Therefore, there is an effect that the period adjusting means can be normally and stably set to the initial state.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, electric power from the power supply means is supplied to the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means from the initial state to the specified time. Then, the electric charge is stored in the electricity storage means. The period adjusting means outputs the voltage generated by the electric charge stored in the storage means as a signal having a predetermined output period. In this way, by configuring the period adjusting means with the power storage means, it is possible to output a signal having a predetermined output period with a simple configuration without making the period adjusting means a complicated circuit. There is.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 3, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the discharging means constitutes a period adjusting means. Discharges the electric charge stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the electric charge stored in the power storage means is discharged by the discharging means to zero when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. can do. As a result, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means configured by the power storage means can always operate from the initial state. Therefore, each time the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is normally and stably operated from the initial state to the specified time, so that the output period predetermined for the period adjusting means is obtained. There is an effect that the signal can be output normally and stably, and the detection result can be output normally and stably from the output means to the specific device. As a method of discharging the power storage means, short-circuiting the power storage means to the ground is exemplified.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 2 to 4, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the power supply means is used. The electrical connection with the period adjusting means is released by the releasing means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be brought to the initial state by the initializing means or the discharging means while the power supply to the period adjusting means is stopped by the releasing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the period adjusting means can be normally and stably set to the initial state.
According to the gaming machine according to claim 6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 5, when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the power supply restarting means first of all, the period. After the discharge releasing means releases the short circuit between the power storage means and the grant constituting the adjusting means, the power supply from the power supply means to the period adjusting means is restarted. On the other hand, when the door opening detecting means detects that the door body is closed, the discharging means first causes the disconnecting means to disconnect the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means, and then constitutes the period adjusting means. The power storage means is short-circuited to the ground to discharge the electric charge stored in the power storage means. Therefore, the power supply means and the ground are not short-circuited in both the case where the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body and the case where the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. .. Therefore, there is an effect that damage to the power supply means or the like due to a short circuit between the power supply means and the ground can be reliably prevented.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in a state where the inner frame, the front frame and the lower plate unit are open. It is a figure which showed the structure of a switch. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of a frame opening detection circuit and an external output terminal board. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state of the inner frame, the state of the front frame, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer, and the output of the external output terminal plate. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU201 in the main control device 110. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation process executed in the main process. It is a flowchart which showed the variation start processing executed in the variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed in the timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the frame opening detection circuit of 2nd Embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state of the inner frame 12, the state of the front frame 14, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit of the second embodiment, and the output of the external output terminal plate. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the frame opening detection circuit of 3rd Embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state of the inner frame, the state of the front frame, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer of the third embodiment, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer of the third embodiment, and the output of the external output terminal plate. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of the 4th embodiment in a state where the inner frame, the front frame and the lower plate unit are open. It is sectional drawing of the switch SW3 used in the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the frame opening detection circuit for an inner frame, and the external output terminal board for an inner frame. The state of the power supply of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the state of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer, the output of the external output terminal plate for the inner frame, and the inner frame. It is a timing chart which showed the relation of the output of an input / output port output circuit. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the door opening notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the external interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device of 4th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the switch SW3A used for the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the frame opening detection circuit for an inner frame and the external output terminal board for an inner frame used in the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. The state of the power supply of the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment, the state of the inner frame, the state of the switch SW3-3, the state of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer, It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between the OUT terminal voltage of a timer, the output of an external output terminal board for an inner frame, and the output of an input / output port output circuit for an inner frame.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changing the effect content at the time of reach effect.

In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided. Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the changing variable resistor, whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, is arranged on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time saving, or the normal state by the lighting state, indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the fluctuating state by the lighting state, and the stop symbol corresponds to the probabilistic jackpot. Whether it is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a non-standard symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. ..

Note that the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Further, during the probability change in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the ball is easily entered into the first entry port 64. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time, it is a state of a game in which the jackpot probability remains the same, only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased). In addition, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 and the number of times for the electric accessory to be opened at one time are changed. It may be a thing.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) that variablely displays the third symbol triggered by winning a prize in the first ball opening 64. And a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter, abbreviated as “LED”) that fluctuates and displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball of the second entry port 67. ..

The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, and for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. 86 is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A decorative display is made according to the above. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 before the stop symbol (one of the probabilistic jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, and the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of times the ball has been entered is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 85. Four holding lamps 85 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps 85, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of hold of the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set as a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not be used to display the lighting.

The second symbol display device 82 has a display unit 83 of the second symbol and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the display unit 83 serves as a display symbol (second symbol). When the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are alternately lit to perform variable display, and the variable display is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first 1 The ball entry port 64 is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the hold lamp 84. The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. It may be done by using a part of 81. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of times of holding the second ball opening 67 is not limited to four, as in the case of the first ball opening 64, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example,). It may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of holds is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the hold lamp 84 may not be used to display the lighting.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the internal configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are open.

The pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell thereof, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11. In the amusement park, the outer peripheral surface of the outer frame 11 is fixed to an installation location called an island of the amusement park. Since the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are configured to be openable to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11, the pachinko machine 10 cannot be touched from the front side or the inside. The inspection and adjustment are performed by opening the inner frame 12 and the like to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11.

Metal upper hinges (not shown) and lower hinges (not shown) are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view to support the inner frame 12. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with the side on which the upper hinge and the lower hinge are provided as an opening / closing shaft.

The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of an inner frame base 55 made of ABS resin formed in a rectangular shape, and a substantially circular central window 55a is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base 55. A mounting portion for the game board 13 is provided on the back surface side of the inner frame base 55, and the game board 13 is detachably mounted.

The lower side of the central window 55a of the inner frame base 55 is formed by being recessed in a concave shape with the front side open, and a flat mounting surface 52b is formed on the back side thereof. A launching unit 140 for launching a ball to the front surface of the game board 13, a passage forming member 54 for forming a passage for discharging the ball to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the like are attached to the mounting surface 52b.

Switches SW1 (SW1a, SW1b) for detecting the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 are provided between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and the front surface is provided between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. Switches SW2 (SW2a, SW2b) for detecting the opening and closing of the frame 14 are provided. The switch SW1 is composed of a female switch SW1a arranged on a surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12, and a male switch SW1b arranged on a surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11. To. Further, the switch SW2 is composed of a female switch SW2a arranged on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the front frame 14 and a male switch SW2b arranged on the surface of the front frame 14 facing the inner frame 12. It is composed.

Here, the structures of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 have the same structure, the structure of the switch SW1 will be described, and the description of the switch SW2 will be omitted.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the structure of the switch SW1. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a state (blocking state) of the switch SW1 in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed. Further, FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a state (conduction state) of the switch SW1 in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the female switch SW1a arranged on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 contains a pair of terminal pairs SW1c made of metal which is a conductive member. ing. In the state where the inner frame 12 is closed, the female switch SW1a arranged on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 has a male switch SW1a arranged on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11. The mold switch SW1b is inserted, and the contact between the terminals and the SW1c is hindered. Therefore, in the state where the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW1 is in a state where the continuity is cut off.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the inner frame 12 is open, the female switch SW1a arranged on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 is outside the inner frame 12. The male switch SW1b arranged on the surface facing the frame 11 is pulled out. Since the terminal pair SW1c built in the female switch SW1a has a structure in which an urging force is generated in the direction opposite to each other, the terminal pair SW1c are in contact with each other when the male switch SW1b is pulled out from the female switch SW1a. To do. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is open, the switch SW1 is in a conductive state.

As described above, the switch SW1 is in a cutoff state when the inner frame 12 is closed, and is in a conductive state when the inner frame 12 is open. However, the structure of the switch SW1 is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 5, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW1 is shut off, while when the inner frame 12 is open, the switch SW1 is in a cutoff state. Any structure may be used as long as the switch SW1 is in a conductive state. This also applies to the structure of the switch SW2.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (work) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like are stored. Area) and. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 12) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (see FIG. 11) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a specific prize. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the port 65a to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the opening and closing plate of the port 65a.

Further, the main control device 110 is provided with a frame opening detection circuit 260 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 by conducting the switch SW1 and detects the opening of the front frame 14 by conducting the switch SW2. There is. The frame opening detection circuit 260 is connected to a switch SW1 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12, a switch SW2 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14, and an external output terminal board 261 configured to be connectable to the hall computer 262. Has been done. In addition, in the connection between the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 and the frame opening detection circuit 260, and the connection between the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261, an input / output unit (input / output port 205) that inputs / outputs signals is used. Are connected via different I / O ports, not shown). When the switch SW1 conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, or when the switch SW2 conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14, the frame opening detection circuit 260 transmits the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output. The pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, it is possible to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14.

The frame opening detection circuit 260 is configured to be unconnected to the MPU 201 and the input / output port 205 (input / output port of the MPU 201) of the main control device 110. Therefore, the frame opening detection circuit 260 may be configured to be mounted on a device (circuit board) other than the main control device 110. For example, it may be mounted on a device (circuit board) on which an arithmetic unit such as an MPU or a CPU is not mounted, or a dedicated board for the frame opening detection circuit 260 may be provided and mounted there. Better yet, like the main control device 110, the payout control device 111, and the launch control device 112, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is housed in the board box, and the box base and the box cover provided on the board box are sealed. It is connected so that it cannot be opened by (not shown) (connection by caulking structure). Then, a sealing sticker (not shown) may be attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box cover and the box base.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.), and a display control device 114. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 to be performed. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and a bus line 239, 240. have. The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the MPU 231. The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data for effect such as a symbol (background symbol or third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing the effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 234.

The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231 and the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the display data 81. It is to be displayed on.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the payout control device 111 clears the backup data. The payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

Next, the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261. In FIG. 7, the frame opening detection circuit 260 will be described first, and then the external output terminal plate 261 will be described.

The frame opening detection circuit 260 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 includes a DC power supply DC1 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts, a diode D1, capacitors CD1 to CD5, resistors R1 to R4, and the like. It mainly has a timer IC1 (LMC555 manufactured by National Semiconductor) which is a C-MOS timer, and a transistor TR1 provided with an internal resistance R5 and an internal resistance R6.

In order to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 by conducting the switch SW1 and to detect the opening of the front frame 14 by conducting the switch SW2, the above-mentioned parts of the frame opening detection circuit 260 are shown in FIG. Connected according to the block diagram. Since the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are connected in parallel to the frame opening detection circuit 260, if either switch is conductive, the frame opening detection circuit 260 will be connected to the inner frame 12 or the front frame. The opening of 14 can be detected.

The DC power supply DC1 is a power supply that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261. The electric power (power source) to the DC power source DC1 is supplied from the power source unit 251 provided in the power source device 115 through a power source path (not shown). The DC power supply DC1 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode D1. One end of a 0.1F (Farad) capacitor CD1 is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode D1. The other end of the capacitor CD1 is grounded. Further, one end of the capacitor CD1 is connected to one end of the switch SW1, one end of the switch SW2, and the VDD terminal and the RES terminal of the timer IC1.

The capacitor CD1 is charged to supply a DC voltage to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. It is a component that exerts the function of a battery.

This is because the capacitor CD1 is supplied with power to the pachinko machine 10, and when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the capacitance of the capacitor CD1 is 0.1 F (farad) and the capacitor CD1. The charge obtained by the product of the applied DC voltage (about 11.3 volt obtained by subtracting the voltage drop of about 0.7 volt at the diode D1 from the 12 volt supplied from the DC power supply DC1) is stored.

On the other hand, the capacitor CD1 is stored in the capacitor CD1 when, for example, the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. A DC voltage (about 11.3 volts) based on the generated electric charge is supplied to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261.

Therefore, the frame opening detection circuit 260 naturally operates when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Further, for example, a game hall business Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off at the end of the time and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, it operates by the DC voltage supplied by the capacitor CD1. The opening of the frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. In this embodiment, the capacitor CD1 is used as a component for supplying the DC voltage to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261 when the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the capacitor CD1 may be used as a secondary battery (rechargeable battery) having a larger storage capacity or a primary battery that does not need to be charged.

Further, since the cathode terminal of the diode D1 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 and the diode D1 functions to prevent the backflow of current, direct current is applied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261. Even when a voltage (about 11.3 volts) is supplied, the DC voltage is not applied to the DC power supply DC1 and the DC power supply DC1 is not damaged.

The timer IC1 is a C-MOS timer, and detects the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 by connecting the resistors R1 to R2 of 100 kΩ and the capacitors CD3 to CD5 of 0.1 μF, and detects the opening of the inner frame 12 or the external output terminal. It functions as a circuit that energizes the photocoupler PR1 of the plate 261 for about 10 ms.

The operating voltage range of the timer IC1 is the MPU 201 mounted on the main control device 110, the MPU 211 mounted on the payout control device 111, the MPU 221 mounted on the voice lamp control device 113, and the MPU 231 mounted on the display control device 114. It is set wider than each operating voltage range. Specifically, the operating voltage range of the timer IC1 is from about 1.5 volts to about 12.0 volts, while the operating voltage range of the MPU 2011, 211, 221, 231 is from about 4.5 volts. It is about 5.5 volts (note that each operating voltage of this embodiment is about 5.0 volts). Therefore, the timer IC1 can operate at a voltage lower than each operating voltage of the MPU 2011, 211, 221, 231. Therefore, even if the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 is reduced and the voltage supplied by the capacitor CD1 is reduced to less than about 4.5 volts, the timer IC1 can operate sufficiently. Further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the timer IC1 is DC-controlled by the capacitor CD1. It is used both when the voltage is supplied and when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Therefore, as a matter of course, the timer IC 1 can operate at a DC voltage of 12 volts or less supplied to the frame opening detection circuit 260 when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Further, since the timer IC1 is a timer composed of a C-MOS semiconductor, it can suppress power consumption during operation and can operate for a long time.

The VDD terminal of the timer IC1 is a terminal for inputting the DC voltage supplied to the timer IC1 and is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1. Further, the VDD terminal of the timer IC1 is connected to one end of the 0.1 μF capacitor CD4, and the other end of the capacitor CD4 is connected to the GND terminal of the grounded timer IC1. The capacitor CD4 reduces the noise generated in the VDD terminal of the timer IC1 when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are conducted or cut off (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened or closed). ..

The RES terminal of the timer IC1 is a terminal for operating a reset function that forcibly puts the voltage output from the OUT terminal into an output stop state (zero volt) when a pulse signal is input to the RES terminal. However, since this reset function is not used in the frame open detection circuit 260, the RES terminal of the timer IC1 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 so that the reset function does not operate. Since the VDD terminal of the timer IC1 and the RES terminal of the timer IC1 are connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 as described above, a DC voltage of about 11.3 volts is applied to the VDD terminal and the RES terminal of the timer IC1. It is applied.

The TRG terminal of the timer IC1 reduces the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed). Set to 10.6 volt, while either switch SW1 or switch SW2, or both switch SW1 and switch SW2 are in a conductive state (either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14). Or, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state), it is a terminal for setting the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from about 10.6 volt to zero volt after about 10 ms. .. The TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, one end of the capacitor CD5, the other end of the switch SW1, the other end of the switch SW2, one end of the resistor R1, and one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. The other end of the resistor R2 and the other end of the capacitor CD5 are grounded.

The resistor R2 connected to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is a timer when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state (see FIG. 5B). This is a resistor for applying a DC voltage (about 11.3 volts) to the TRG terminal of the IC1. Further, this capacitor CD5 is a capacitor for reducing noise generated in the resistor R2 when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are conducted or cut off (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened or closed). Is.

With the above connection, when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the cutoff state (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the closed state), no voltage is supplied to the resistor R2 and the capacitor CD5, so that the resistor R2 and the capacitor CD5 are supplied with voltage. The applied voltage (the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1) is zero volt. At this time, the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts.

On the other hand, when either one of the switch SW1 or the switch SW2, or both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in a conductive state (either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 or both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in a conductive state). Since the voltage is supplied to the resistor R2 and the capacitor CD5 (when in the open state), the voltage applied to the resistor R2 and the capacitor CD5 (the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1) is applied to one end of the capacitor CD1. It is about 11.3 volts, which is the same as the applied voltage. At this time, the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts for about 10 ms after either switch SW1 or switch SW2, or both switch SW1 and switch SW2 are in a conductive state. After that, it becomes zero voltage.

In this way, the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC 1 can be set to either about 10.6 volts or zero volts by the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1. The switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted (the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened), and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to the resistor R2) is about 11.3 volts from zero volt. When the voltage changes to, as described above, the voltage of about 10.6 volts output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volts with a delay of about 10 ms from the rise of the voltage. Then, as will be described in detail later, the time difference between the rise of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to the resistor R2) and the fall of the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 ( About 10 ms), a current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 for about 10 ms, and the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is energized only for about 10 ms.

The OUT terminal of the timer IC1 has a voltage of about 10.6 volts when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off (the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed) and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 becomes zero volt. On the other hand, when the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted (the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened) and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 rises to about 11.3 volts, the rise is started. It is a terminal that sets the output voltage of about 10.6 volts to zero volts with a delay of about 10 ms. This OUT terminal is connected to one end of a 10 kΩ resistor R3. The other end of the resistor R3 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD2 and one end of the resistor R4 having 10 kΩ, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 and the other end of the resistor R4 are grounded.

The resistor R3 and the resistor R4 are voltage dividing resistors for dividing the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1. Therefore, the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is divided into the resistor R3 and the resistor R4 according to the ratio of the resistance value of the resistor R3 and the resistance value of the resistor R4. Since both the resistor R3 and the resistor R4 are 10 kΩ, the voltage of about 10.6 volt output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is divided into a maximum value of about 5.3 volt by the resistor R3 and the resistor R4, respectively. Be pressured.

The 10 μF capacitor CD2 connected in parallel with the resistor R4 is a capacitor for stabilizing the voltage applied to the resistor R4. One end of the capacitor CD2 is connected to one end of the resistor R4, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 is connected to the other end of the resistor R4 and is grounded. By stabilizing the voltage applied to the resistor R4 by the capacitor CD2, the bias voltage applied between the base terminal b of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 is stabilized, and the transistor TR1 The operation can be stabilized.

The transistor TR1 is a switching element that switches between the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 to either conduction or interruption based on the voltage applied to the resistor R4. The transistor TR1 is provided with an internal resistance R5 of 10 kΩ. One end of the resistance R4 is connected to one end of the internal resistance R5, and the base terminal b is connected to the other end of the internal resistance R5. Further, the transistor TR1 is provided with an internal resistance R6 of 10 kΩ. The other end of the internal resistance R5 is connected to one end of the internal resistance R6, and the emitter terminal e is connected to the other end of the internal resistance R6.

Therefore, when a voltage of about 10.6 volts is output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC 1 (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened). (If it is within about 10 ms), the voltage is divided by the resistor R3 and the resistor R4, and the voltage applied to the resistor R4 (about 5.3 volts) becomes one end of the internal resistance R5 of the transistor TR1. It is applied between the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e. As a result, the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are made conductive. At this time, if the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state), until the voltage of about 10.6 volt output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched to zero volt. That is, a current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 for about 10 ms after the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. If a current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 can be energized for about 10 ms, and a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output to the hall computer 262. However, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off, the connection between one end of the capacitor CD1 and the resistor R7 provided on the external output terminal plate 261 is cut off. Therefore, no current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. Therefore, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is not energized, and the pulse signal is not output to the hall computer 262.

On the other hand, when the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is zero volt (when about 10 ms has elapsed since the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 was opened), no voltage is applied to the resistor R4, so that the internal resistance R5 of the transistor TR1 No voltage is applied between one end of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1. As a result, the connection between the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 is cut off. Therefore, even if the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state), no current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. Therefore, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is not energized, and the pulse signal is not output to the hall computer 262.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 can be energized for about 10 ms. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

The TH terminal of the timer IC1 is a terminal for measuring the voltage applied to the TH terminal, and is connected to the other end of the resistor R1, one end of the capacitor CD3, and the DCH terminal of the timer IC1. The DCH terminal of the timer IC1 has a voltage (about 7.5 volts) that is two-thirds of the DC voltage (about 11.3 volts) in which the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 is input to the VDD terminal of the timer IC1. It is a terminal that switches the impedance of the DCH terminal from the infinite state to the zero state when it becomes. When the impedance of the DCH terminal becomes zero (ground state), the voltage cannot be applied to the capacitor CD3. On the other hand, when the impedance of the DCH terminal becomes infinite, a voltage can be applied to the capacitor CD3.

The inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 of the resistor R1 and the capacitor CD3 connected to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 and the DCH terminal of the timer IC1 are opened based on the time constant which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R1 and the capacitor CD3. When this is done, it is a component for determining the period until the voltage of about 10.6 volt output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC 1 is switched to zero volt to be about 10 ms. One end of the resistor R1 is connected to the other end of the switch SW1, the other end of the switch SW2, and one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. Further, the other end of the resistor R1 is connected to the TH terminal of the timer IC1, the DCH terminal of the timer IC1, and one end of the capacitor CD3. The other end of the capacitor CD3 is grounded.

Here, the resistor R1 and the capacitor CD3 will be described together with the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, the TH terminal of the timer IC1, the DCH terminal of the timer IC1, and the OUT terminal of the timer IC1.

When the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off), no voltage is supplied to the resistor R1, so that the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 is zero volt (about 7.5 volt). The impedance of the DCH terminal of the timer IC1 is set to infinite. Therefore, a voltage can be applied to the capacitor CD3, and the capacitor CD3 is in a rechargeable state (a state in which electric charges can be stored). However, when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off, the connection between one end of the capacitor CD1 and the resistor R1 is cut off, so that no voltage is applied to the capacitor CD3 and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD3 is zero volt. It becomes. In this way, the capacitor CD3 is in a rechargeable state, but is not charged. At this time, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, and the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are conductive. However, since the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the cutoff state, no current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. Therefore, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is not energized, and the pulse signal is not output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

Next, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state (see FIG. 5B) and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (to the resistor R7). The applied voltage) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt. At this time, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, and the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are conducting. Therefore, the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 is started, and the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is energized. As a result, the signal is started to be output to the hall computer 262.

Further, at the same time that the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to the resistor R7) is switched from zero volt to about 11.3 volt, the voltage is applied to the capacitor CD3 and the capacitor CD3 is charged. To be started. At this time, the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 starts to rise.

The voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is 2/2 of the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 (voltage applied to the capacitor CD3) and the voltage input to the VDD terminal of the timer IC1 (about 11.3 volts). Keep about 10.6 volts until it equals the voltage of 3, ie about 7.5 volts. When the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 (voltage applied to the capacitor CD2) rises and becomes equal to about 7.5 volts, the impedance of the DCH terminal of the timer IC1 changes from infinite to zero (ground). Switch to the state where it was done). Then, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD3 becomes a zero volt state, and the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD3 is discharged. As a result, the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 is switched from about 7.5 volts to zero volts. By switching the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched from about 10.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the conduction between the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 is cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 is stopped. As a result, the energization of the external output terminal plate 261 to the photocoupler PR1 is stopped, and the output of the signal to the hall computer 262 is stopped.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (see FIG. 5B), the output is output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1. The period until the voltage of about 10.6 volt is switched to zero volt, that is, the period until the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 (voltage applied to the capacitor CD3) changes from zero volt to about 7.5 volt. , It is determined to be about 10 ms based on the time constant which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R1 and the capacitance of the capacitor CD3. Then, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the supply of current to one end of the resistor R7 of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is started. Then, about 10 ms after the start of supplying the current to one end of the resistor R7, the voltage of about 10.6 volt output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched to zero volt, and the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 The continuity with e is cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 is stopped. As a result, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 for about 10 ms, and the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is supplied for about 10 ms. It can be energized only during the period. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

When the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 change from the open state to the closed state (the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state to the cutoff state), that is, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (applied to the resistor R7). When the voltage) is switched from about 11.3 volt to zero volt, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched from zero volt to about 10.6 volt. In this state, as described above, the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are conducting, but since the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the cutoff state, one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 Is not supplied with current. Therefore, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is not energized, and the pulse signal is not output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

As described above, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state, one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 is applied based on the time constant which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R1 and the capacitor CD3. A current is supplied for about 10 ms, and the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 can be energized for about 10 ms. As a result, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

Returning to the description of FIG. The CNT terminal of the timer IC1 is a terminal that adjusts the output period of the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 according to the signal input to the CNT terminal. However, since the frame open detection circuit 260 does not adjust the output period of the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 (the output period of the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is fixed at 10 ms), the timer IC1 The CNT terminal is not connected to any of the components of the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261 and is open.

As described above, in the frame open detection circuit 260, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (see FIG. 5B), the external output terminal plate 261 Start supplying current to one end of the resistor R7. On the other hand, the frame open detection circuit 260 cuts off the connection between the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 from the conductive state when about 10 ms has passed since the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 was opened. It switches to the state and stops the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. As a result, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is energized for about 10 ms, and a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

In the door opening detection circuit 260, an LMC555 is used for the timer IC1 to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14, and realize a circuit in which the photocoupler PR1 is energized for about 10 ms. It is not limited. That is, by using another integrated circuit or the like for the timer IC 1, a circuit that generates one pulse signal for one opening of the inner frame 12 or one opening of the front frame 14 is realized. The photocoupler PR1 may be energized for a predetermined period based on the pulse signal.

Next, the external output terminal board 261 connected to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and also connected to the hall computer 262 will be described. The external output terminal plate 261 has a function of outputting a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms to the hall computer 262, and is mainly composed of a 1 kΩ resistor R7 and a photocoupler PR1.

The resistor R7 is a resistor that limits the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1, and one end of the resistor R7 is connected to one end of the resistor R1 of the frame opening detection circuit 260, the other end of the switch SW1, and the other end of the switch SW2. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 (the anode terminal of the light emitting diode). The photocoupler PR1 is a current switch composed of a light emitting diode and a light receiving element (phototransistor) that receives light emitted by the light emitting diode. As described above, in the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1, the anode terminal is connected to one end of the resistor R7, and the cathode terminal is connected to the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 260. Further, the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 is connected to the hall computer 262.

Therefore, the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are electrically connected for about 10 ms after the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state (the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state). Then, a current is supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 via the resistor R7, and the light emitting diode emits light for about 10 ms. Then, the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the emitted light and changes the received light of about 10 ms into a pulse signal (electric signal) having a pulse width of about 10 ms. The pulse signal is output to the hall computer 262. The hall computer 262 can store the pulse signal output from the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1. Therefore, it is possible to store the hall computer 262 that the inner frame 12 has been opened or the front frame 14 has been opened.

On the other hand, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off), no voltage is supplied to one end of the resistor R7, so that the light emitting diode which is the primary side of the photocoupler PR1. No current is supplied to the switch. Therefore, the pulse signal is not output from the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 to the hall computer 262.

Here, the advantage of using the photocoupler PR1 for the external output terminal plate 261 that outputs a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 will be described. The photocoupler PR1 has a configuration (light emission) that converts the current supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side into light, receives the light on the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side, and outputs a pulse signal (electric signal). A configuration in which a signal is transmitted from a diode to a light receiving element in one direction). Therefore, an electric signal such as a pulse signal cannot be transmitted from the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side to the light emitting diode on the primary side. As a result, even if the frame opening detection circuit 260 is connected to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 and the hall computer 262 is connected to the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, the hall computer 262 It is not possible to transmit an electric signal such as a pulse signal from the above to a main control device 110 or the like provided with a frame opening detection circuit 260 or a frame opening detection circuit 260. Therefore, by using the photocoupler PR1, it is possible to prevent the transmission of electric signals such as an illegal pulse signal from the hall computer 262 to the frame opening detection circuit 260, the main control device 110, etc., and from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer. There is an advantage that a pulse signal can be transmitted to 262.

Further, in the photocoupler PR1, the light emitting diode on the primary side and the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side are electrically insulated. Therefore, for example, even if the current supplied to the light emitting diode of the photocoupler PR1 contains electrical noise, the electrical noise is not transmitted to the phototransistor on the secondary side. Therefore, by using the photocoupler PR1, the external output terminal plate 261 has an advantage that an accurate pulse signal can be output to the hall computer 262.

As described above, since the frame opening detection circuit 260 is provided with the 0.1F capacitor CD1, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is supplied with power to the pachinko machine 10 and has a DC power supply of DC1 to 12 volts. It operates naturally when a DC voltage is supplied, and further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even if this is not done, the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. Then, when the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 is detected by the frame opening detection circuit 260, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. The pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours.

Here, in general, the amusement park has a crime prevention contract with a private security company, and if there is an intruder into the amusement park, a security guard of the security company immediately rushes to the amusement park. However, since the fraudulent activity is carried out in a short time, when the guards rush in, in most cases, the intruder has already escaped from the playground, and it is not possible to determine which pachinko machine 10 the fraudulent activity was committed to. There was a problem. The pachinko machine 10 that has been cheated must be returned to a normal state, but if it is not known which pachinko machine 10 has been cheated, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 of all the pachinko machines 10 are used. It had to be opened and inspected one by one, and performing this work in the amusement park where a large number of pachinko machines 10 were installed was a considerable amount of hard work.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 is detected by the frame opening detection circuit 260, the pulse width from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is reduced. A pulse signal of 10 ms is output. Then, the output pulse signal is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in which the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, by storing the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 and the output time of the output pulse signal, the opening time of the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine 10 or The opening time of the front frame 14 can be detected.

For example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the DC voltage is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261. When the total supply period of the current from the CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 due to the opening of the frame 12 or the front frame 14 is lengthened, or the number of times the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is detected is increased, the capacitor is used. The capacity of the CD1 may be increased (for example, the capacity of the capacitor CD1 is 1F), or the capacitor CD1 may be changed to a secondary battery having a large storage capacity.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the TRG terminal voltage (external output terminal plate) of the timer IC1 changes according to the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12) and the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14). The relationship between the voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the 261), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1, and the output of the external output terminal plate 261 (the input of the hall computer 262) will be described. FIG. 8 shows the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12), the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14), and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261). ), The timing chart showing the relationship between the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 and the output (input of the hall computer 262) of the external output terminal plate 261.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the switch SW1 is in a conductive state (inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t1, the TRG terminal voltage (external output terminal plate) of the timer IC1 is shown in FIG. 8C. The voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of 261) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt at t1. At this time, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 continues to output a voltage of about 10.6 volts from the OUT terminal until about 10 ms elapses from t1 o'clock. As a result, the current supply to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 7) is started (at t1). Then, as shown in FIG. 8E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t1. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, when about 10 ms elapses from t1 o'clock, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 10.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state 10 ms after t1 o'clock. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t2, the TRG terminal voltage (external output) of the timer IC1 is shown in FIG. 8C. The voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the terminal plate 261) switches from about 11.3 volts to zero volts, and the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 switches from zero volts to about 10.6 volts (at t2). As a result, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be detected again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), when the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (front frame 14 is in an open state) at t3, the TRG terminal voltage (external) of the timer IC1 is shown in FIG. 8 (c). The voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the output terminal plate 261) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt at t3. At this time, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 continues to output a voltage of about 10.6 volts from the OUT terminal until about 10 ms elapses from t3. As a result, the current supply to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 7) is started (at t3). Then, as shown in FIG. 8E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t3. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, when about 10 ms has elapsed from t3, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 10.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 8 (d). Then, the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state 10 ms after t3 o'clock. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the switch SW2 is in the cutoff state (the front frame 14 is in the closed state), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 (external output terminal plate 261) is shown in FIG. 8C. The voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7) switches from about 11.3 volts to zero volts, and the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 switches from zero volts to about 10.6 volts (at t4). As a result, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be detected again.

Finally, a case where the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 8A, the switch SW1 is in a conductive state (inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t5, and further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (front surface) at t6. When the frame 14 is in the open state), as shown in FIG. 8C, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261) is about zero volt at t5. Switch to 11.3 volts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 continues to output a voltage of about 10.6 volts from the OUT terminal until about 10 ms elapses from t5 o'clock. As a result, the current supply to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 7) is started (at t5). Then, as shown in FIG. 8E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t5. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, about 10 ms after t5, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 10.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state 10 ms after t5 o'clock. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the switch SW1 is in the shutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t7, and as shown in FIG. 8B, the switch SW2 is in the shutoff state at t8. (When the front frame 14 is closed), as shown in FIG. 8C, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261) is about 11.3 volts. At the same time, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 switches from zero volt to about 10.6 volt (at 8 o'clock). As a result, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be detected again.

In this way, even when the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state), the timer IC1 keeps the continuity period of the switch SW1. (The length of the opening period of the inner frame 12) and the length of the conduction period of the switch SW2 (the length of the opening period of the front frame 14), either the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state. When about 10 ms has elapsed from the time when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state, the voltage of the OUT terminal is switched from about 10.6 volt to zero volt. As a result, the supply period of the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 becomes about 10 ms.

Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261. That is, when a DC voltage of about 11.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261, the supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is set as the inner frame. It can be limited to about 10 ms per opening of 12 or the front frame 14. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be suppressed to a small value.

Here, since the capacitor CD1 has a capacitance of 0.1 F and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD1 is about 11.3 volts, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 is the capacitance of the capacitor CD1 and the applied voltage of the capacitor CD1. From the product of, it becomes about 1.13C (coulomb). The electric charge of about 1.13C stored in the capacitor CD1 corresponds to about 500 times of current supply when the current supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is about 10 ms. To do. Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened (switch SW1). Even when the front frame 14 is opened (conducting) or the front frame 14 is opened (conducting the switch SW2) many times, the frame opening detection circuit 260 still opens the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (continuing the switch SW1). The continuity of the switch SW2) can be reliably detected up to about 500 times each time, and a pulse signal can be output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262. At this time, when the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened about 500 times, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 decreases, and the current value supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 decreases, but the hole By increasing the detection sensitivity of the pulse signal of the computer 262 (by lowering the threshold value for the amplitude of the pulse signal), the hall computer 262 can store the pulse signal.

In the present embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is electrically connected, a pulse signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. It is not limited to this. That is, when the connection of each component of the main frame opening detection circuit 260 is changed, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, and the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed, the photocoupler PR1 is connected. A current may be supplied for about 10 ms to output a pulse signal from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

However, in the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the present embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is electrically connected, a pulse signal is transmitted from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. Is configured to output, so that the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be quickly detected. Therefore, it is possible to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 before the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the main control device 110 or the game board 13 is cheated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent abnormal operation due to fraudulent acts that occur when power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

The pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in which the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, by storing the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 and the output time of the output pulse signal, the opening time of the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine 10 or The opening time of the front frame 14 can be detected.

Further, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, so that the frame open detection circuit 260 The collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e (see FIG. 7) of the transistor TR1 are in a conductive state. However, at this time, the only current flowing through the transistor TR1 is the base current. Both the resistor R3 and the resistor R5 that determine the current value of the base current have a resistance value of 10 kΩ, which is sufficiently larger than the resistance value (1 kΩ) of the resistor R7 that limits the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1. Therefore, the current value of the base current can be kept at about 100 μA (note that the current value supplied to the photocoupler PR1 when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are conducting is about 11.3 mA). Therefore, the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 due to the conduction state of the transistor TR1 can be stopped very slightly.

Further, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, so that the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 Current is consumed through resistors R3 and R4 connected in series between and ground. However, both the resistor R3 and the resistor R4 have a resistance value of 10 kΩ, which is sufficiently larger than the resistance value (1 kΩ) of the resistor R7 that limits the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the current value flowing from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 to the ground via the resistors R3 and R4 can be kept at about 530 μA. Therefore, the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 by the resistors R3 and R4 can be stopped very slightly.

When the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off), the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 due to the base current of the transistor TR1 and the resistance R3 and If it is desired to further suppress the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 by the resistor R4, the resistance values of the resistors R3, R4 and R5 may be further increased to more than 10 kΩ.

Further, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off, the charge stored in the capacitor CD1 due to the base current of the transistor TR1 is consumed and the capacitor CD1 by the resistors R3 and R4. If you want to reduce the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor to zero, you can use the following configuration. The male switch SW1b and the male switch SW2b are further provided on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, respectively, and the male switch SW1b and the male switch SW2b arranged on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are provided with two male switches SW1b and two male switches SW2b, respectively. Correspondingly, the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are further provided with the female switch SW1a and the female switch SW2a, respectively, and the female switch SW1a and the female switch SW2a arranged on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are respectively 2 Make them one by one. As a result, one new combination of the male switch SW1b and the female switch SW1a is added to the switch SW1. Similar to the switch SW1, a new combination of the male switch SW2b and the female switch SW2a is added to the switch SW2. Then, the connection between the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 in the frame opening detection circuit 260 and one end of the resistor R3 is disconnected, and the female switch SW1a newly added to the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 after the connection is disconnected is built in. Connect one end of a pair of terminals to SW1c. Then, the other end of the pair of terminals vs. SW1c built in the newly added female switch SW1a is connected to one end of the resistor R3 after the connection is disconnected. Similarly, one end of a pair of terminals paired SW2c built in the newly added female switch SW2a is connected to the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 after the connection is disconnected. Then, the other end of the pair of terminals / SW2c built in the newly added female switch SW2a is connected to one end of the resistor R3 after the connection is disconnected. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, which is the resistor R3. It is not applied to the resistors R4 and R5, and the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 by the base current of the transistor TR1 and the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 by the resistors R3 and R4 can be reduced to zero. it can. On the contrary, when one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 or both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open (one of the switch SW1 or the switch SW2, or both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2). (When is conducting), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is divided and applied to the resistor R3, resistor R4, resistor R5, resistor R6 and the capacitor CD2 to supply current to the photocoupler PR1. It can be done normally through the resistor R7.

The location where the connection with the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is cut off and the terminal pair SW1c and the terminal pair SW2c are connected is not limited to the above. For example, the other end of the resistor R3 and one end of the resistor R4, the resistor R5, and the capacitor CD2 are cut off, and the other end of the resistor R3 after the connection is disconnected, a pair built in the female switch SW1a newly added. Connect one end of SW1c to the terminal of. Then, the other end of the pair of terminals / SW1c built in the newly added female switch SW1a is connected to one end of the resistor R4, the resistor R5, and the capacitor CD2 after the connection is disconnected. Similarly, one end of a pair of terminals pair SW2c built in the newly added female switch SW2a is connected to the other end of the resistor R3 after the connection is disconnected. Then, the other end of the pair of terminals / SW2c built in the newly added female switch SW2a may be connected to one end of the resistor R4, the resistor R5, and the capacitor CD2 after the connection is disconnected. That is, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed by the newly added male switch SW1b and female switch SW1a and the newly added male switch SW2b and female switch SW2a. (When the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off), while cutting off the continuity between the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 and the ground, one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, or the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 When both are open (one of switch SW1 or switch SW2, or both switch SW1 and switch SW2 are conducting), resistor R3, resistor R4, resistor R5, resistor R6 and The OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC 1 may be divided and applied to the capacitor CD2.

Further, when it is desired to separately store in the hall computer 262 which of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, the following configuration may be used. First, the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261 used in the present embodiment are newly provided one by one, the switch SW2 connected in parallel to the switch SW1 is disconnected, and the disconnected switch SW2 is newly provided. It may be connected to the provided frame opening detection circuit 260. Specifically, one end of the disconnected switch SW2 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, the VDD terminal of the timer IC1, one end of the capacitor CD4, and the RES terminal of the timer IC1 and disconnected. The other end of the switch SW2 may be connected to one end of the capacitor CD5 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, one end of the resistor R1, and one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal board 261. In this way, a frame opening detection circuit 260 and an external output terminal plate 261 are newly provided, and only the switch SW2 is connected to the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, and a switch is connected to the existing frame opening detection circuit 260. By connecting only SW1, when there is continuity of switch SW1 (opening of inner frame 12), the pulse signal output from the existing external output terminal board 261 and conduction of switch SW2 (opening of front frame 14) ), The pulse signal output from the newly provided external output terminal board 261 can be output to the hall computer 262 separately. Here, the hall computer 262 has an input terminal for a pulse signal output from the existing external output terminal plate 261 (for detecting continuity of the switch SW1 (for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12)) and a newly provided external output terminal. Separate from the input terminal of the pulse signal output from the plate 261 (for detecting the continuity of the switch SW2 (for detecting the opening of the front frame 14)). With this configuration, the continuity of the switch SW1 (opening of the inner frame 12) and the continuity of the switch SW2 (opening of the front frame 14) can be distinguished and stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, depending on the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, there was continuity of the switch SW1 (opening of the inner frame 12), conduction of the switch SW2 (opening of the front frame 14), or both. Can be detected accurately.

Further, when power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, which of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened is separately stored in the hall computer 262, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are combined. If you want the pachinko machine 10 to notify you when either one is open, the following configuration may be used. First, the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261 used in the present embodiment are newly provided one by one, the switch SW2 connected in parallel to the switch SW1 is disconnected, and the disconnected switch SW2 is newly provided. It is connected to the provided frame opening detection circuit 260. Next, the male switches SW1b and SW2b and the female switches SW1a and SW2a are newly provided on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, respectively. Then, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 becomes conductive by using the newly provided male switches SW1b and SW2b and the female switches SW1a and SW2a, a signal is sent to the MPU 201. It may be configured to be input.

Specifically, one end of the disconnected switch SW2 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, the VDD terminal of the timer IC1, one end of the capacitor CD4, and the RES terminal of the timer IC1 and disconnected. The other end of the switch SW2 may be connected to one end of the capacitor CD5 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, one end of the resistor R1, and one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal board 261. In this way, a frame opening detection circuit 260 and an external output terminal plate 261 are newly provided, and only the switch SW2 is connected to the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, and a switch is connected to the existing frame opening detection circuit 260. By connecting only SW1, when there is continuity of switch SW1 (opening of inner frame 12), the pulse signal output from the existing external output terminal board 261 and conduction of switch SW2 (opening of front frame 14) ), The pulse signal output from the newly provided external output terminal board 261 can be output to the hall computer 262 separately.

Next, the male switch SW1b and the male switch SW2b are further provided on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, respectively, and the male switch SW1b and the male switch SW2b arranged on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are provided with two male switches SW1b and two male switches SW2b, respectively. To do. Correspondingly, the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are further provided with the female switch SW1a and the female switch SW2a, respectively, and the female switch SW1a and the female switch SW2a arranged on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are respectively 2 Make them one by one. As a result, one new combination of the male switch SW1b and the female switch SW1a is added to the switch SW1. Further, as with the switch SW1, a new combination of the male switch SW2b and the female switch SW2a is added to the switch SW2 as well as the switch SW1. Then, one end of the pair of terminals pair SW1c built in the newly added female switch SW1a is connected to the DC power supply DC1 of the existing frame opening detection circuit 260, and built in the newly added female switch SW1a. The other end of the pair of terminals and SW1c is connected to the input / output port 205 of the MPU 201 via a voltage dividing circuit composed of a resistor. Similarly, one end of the pair of terminals vs. SW2c built into the newly added female switch SW2a is connected to the DC power supply DC1 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, and the newly added female type is used. The other end of the pair of terminals vs. SW2c built in the switch SW2a is connected to the input / output port 205 of the MPU 201 via a voltage divider circuit composed of a resistor, and to a port different from the other end of the terminal pair SW1c. Further, in the MPU 201, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conductive, and a voltage of 5 volts (supplied from the DC power supply DC1 by a voltage dividing circuit) for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 The 12-volt voltage is stepped down to 5 volts) or the 5-volt voltage that detects the opening of the inner frame 14 (the voltage divider circuit steps down the 12-volt voltage supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to 5 volts. ) Is input to the input / output port 205, a command indicating that the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is detected is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. At this time, the commands transmitted from the MPU 201 are a command when the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected (hereinafter, referred to as an "inner frame command") and a command when the front frame 14 is opened (hereinafter, "" It is separated from the "front frame command"). Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received each of these commands notifies different modes depending on whether the inner frame command is received or the front frame command is received. For example, the voice output device 226 emits a different warning sound, or the lamp display device 227 is lit differently. Further, the display control device 114 that has received each of these commands displays different modes depending on whether the inner frame command is received or the front frame command is received. For example, when the display control device 114 receives the inner frame command, the third symbol display device 81 displays "the inner frame is open", or when the display control device 114 receives the front frame command. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display "the front frame is open".

In this way, one new combination of the male switch SW1b and the female switch SW1a is added to the switch SW1, and the switch SW2 is also newly combined with the male switch SW2b and the female switch SW2a in the same manner as the switch SW1. When the switch SW1 is electrically connected (when the inner frame 12 is opened), the MPU 201 issues an inner frame command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by using them. Configure to send. Further, when the switch SW2 is electrically connected (when the front frame 14 is opened), the MPU 201 is configured to transmit a front frame command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are used to perform notification in different modes depending on whether the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened. Can be done. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is used to accurately determine whether the switch SW1 is conducting (the inner frame 12 is opened), the switch SW2 is conducting (the front frame 14 is opened), or both are present. Can be detected.

Further, a frame opening detection circuit 260 and an external output terminal plate 261 are newly provided, and only the switch SW2 is connected to the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, and the switch SW1 is connected to the existing frame opening detection circuit 260. When there is continuity of the switch SW1 (opening of the inner frame 12) by connecting only the pulse signal output from the existing external output terminal plate 261 and the continuity of the switch SW2 (opening of the front frame 14). If there is, the pulse signal output from the newly provided external output terminal board 261 can be output to the hall computer 262 separately. Therefore, depending on the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, there was continuity of the switch SW1 (opening of the inner frame 12), conduction of the switch SW2 (opening of the front frame 14), or both. Can be detected accurately.

In the present embodiment, the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 is output to the hall computer 262, which is installed at a different location from the pachinko machine 10, but the present invention is not limited to this. A dedicated storage device having the function of the hall computer 262 may be provided for each pachinko machine 10, and the dedicated storage device may be arranged on the back side of each pachinko machine 10 provided with the main control device 110 or the like. In this case, better, a dedicated storage device such as the main control device 110, the payout control device 111, and the launch control device 112 is housed in the board box, and the box base and the box cover provided in the board box. And are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connection by caulking structure). Then, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box cover and the box base.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9" and one type of petal-shaped sub-symbol formed smaller than the main symbol. Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0,2,4,6,8) are protected almost completely on the front of the wooden box, and attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets are added. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is completed. It is configured to do. When shifting to the high-probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with odd numbers added (corresponding to the "high-probability symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") are aligned. Here, the high-probability state refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) refers to a time when the probability is not changed, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. Therefore, a total of 20 third symbols, 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols, are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity. The variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in 3 rows × 3 rows. Five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set in the main display area Dm. Then, in each game, the variable display is stopped in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and at the time of the stop, a combination of jackpot symbols is placed on any of the effective lines (in the present embodiment, If the same main symbol combination) is used, the jackpot movie will be displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are usually covered with a double-door opaque door that is electrically opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown), and sometimes the solenoid is excited to bring the door to the front side. It is a display area that can be visually recognized by the player when it is opened. The notice area Ds2 in the center is a display area that can always be visually recognized without being covered by the door.

As shown in FIG. 9B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are obscured so that the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If one or both of the left and right doors are opened in the middle of the variable display, a moving image is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and the player is in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. It is suggested. In the central notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the present embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice production will be performed by appearing. In principle, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds, but the third symbol, characters, and the like are displayed larger across the respective display areas Dm and Ds. Display effects can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter. C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for the fluctuation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is the execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 12), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. It is appropriately stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area consisting of one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has access to the first entry port 64. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored according to the winning timing of the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 738, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed. It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12). The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. Stored in the area. The number of random numbers that will be big hits is set for two types, low probability and high probability. The number of random numbers that will be big hits at low probability is 2, and the value is "373,727". The number of random numbers that are big hits at high probability is 14, and the values are "59,109,163,211,263,317,367,421,479,523,631,683,733".

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a big hit, and in the present embodiment, one is added in order within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value ( That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. Stored in the area. The value of the random number that becomes the high probability state after the big hit is "1, 2, 3", and the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the big hit is "0, 4", and two types of hit types are determined. To. Therefore, the display modes corresponding to the stop symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37 are a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, a high-probability state and a low-probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to the loss. One of the three display modes in total is selected.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the pattern of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. A "front-back off reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 8) that stops, and a "reach other than front-back off" (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) in which the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. , Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 39 to 238) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. Stored in.

Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random values for which the stop pattern is selected. This depends on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, in which area of the holding ball storage area each random value is stored (that is, the number of holdings), and the like. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop pattern.

For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values of 10 to 238 corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. "Completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 0 to 5, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 6 to 9, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and back" or "reach other than the front and rear". Further, if each random value is not stored in the reserved ball storage area in the low probability state, the disorder corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is used to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64. A table with a narrow numerical range of 51 to 238 is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach other than front-back deviation" is widened to 9 to 50, and "reach other than front-back deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, so that the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 can be easily performed continuously.

Of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one fluctuation type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, reaches the maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0. The other variable type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 240, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter", and CS2 is also referred to as "second variation type counter".

The first variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (middle symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type and the fine symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1 or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

The value of the variation type counter CS3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a "third variable type counter". The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs a decorative effect according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and slides a fluctuating symbol in addition to the fluctuation of the symbol. , A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of a reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the advance notice effect is selected by the variable type counter CS3. Specifically, an effect pattern is selected in which the time required for the advance notice effect is added to the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time is subtracted in order to shorten the variable display time, or the fluctuation time is not added or subtracted. .. As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers for which the effect pattern is selected, and is the current state of the pachinko machine 10 a high probability state? The selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different depending on whether it is in a low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored.

As described above, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 determine the fluctuation time of the symbol variation, and the fluctuation type counter CS3 determines the time to be added or subtracted from the fluctuation time. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol is stopped is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reaches the maximum value (that is, 250), and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Acquired when detected. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 17. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at a 2 ms cycle in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first explained, and then the start-up process is performed. The main process will be described.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. The value is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (the present embodiment). Then, when they reach 738, 4, 238, 250), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

After that, the start winning process (see FIG. 16) accompanying the winning of the first ball opening 64 is executed (S504), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is completed. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch of the ball is turned on on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is the process of determining / off. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

When this start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S601). When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), whether or not the number N of balls on hold for operation of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). (S602). If there is a prize in the first entry slot 64 and the number of operation-reserved balls N <4 (S602: Yes), the number of operation-reserved balls N is added by 1 (S603), and further updated in step S503. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the first free holding area of the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S604). On the other hand, if there is no winning in the first ball opening 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning in the first ball opening 64, the number of pending balls N <4 (S602: No). , S603 and S604 are skipped, the start winning process is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S651) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout launch control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a start-up process when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are put into an operable state. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104), and if it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process shifts to S110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if it is not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S110 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S110 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S213 in FIG. 12, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, interrupts are permitted and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the main process executed after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process of a 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). Specifically, the presence / absence of the prize detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 is determined, and if there is the prize detection information, the prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop symbol command, the stop command, the effect time addition command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, each value of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the first 3 The symbol display device 81 executes a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like (S204). The details of the variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the variation processing is completed, the large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of a big hit state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 The variable display of the second symbol is carried out on the display unit 83 of. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process is shifted to S201, and each process after S201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the thirth within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. To do. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Next, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of S207, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 17 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S213), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S207 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S201 to S206, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S201 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the variation processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N is larger than 0 (S303). If the number of balls on hold for operation N is 0 (S303: No), this process ends as it is. If the number of operation-holding balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the number of operation-holding balls N is subtracted by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the hold ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold ball storage area to the execution area side in order, and the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area. After the data shift processing, the fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S307). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3, and the fluctuation time is determined. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. A display mode is set in which the red LED is turned on as well as turned off.

The variation processing is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). In the setting of the stop symbol, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit, the symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit is determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the symbol is in a low probability state. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when the high probability state is reached after the big hit, the green LED is turned on when the low probability state is reached, and the blue LED is turned on when the probability is off. .. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S309, the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped in order to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. The command is set (S310). Upon receiving this stop command, the voice lamp control device 113 gives a stop instruction to the display control device 114. The fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 stops when the fluctuation time elapses, and when the stop command is received, the fluctuation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S306) executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 13). In the fluctuation start processing (S306), first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, "373,727" out of the numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1 is the winning value at the time of normal low probability, and "59,109,163,21,263,317,367" at the time of high probability. 421,479,523,631,683,733 ”is the winning value.

When it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S402). ). In the process of S402, whether to shift to the high probability state or the low probability state after the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first type counter C2, in the case of "0,4", the state shifts to the low probability state, and in the case of "1,2,3", the state shifts to the high probability state. ..

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S403). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. To. At this time, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and the rough symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are performed based on the values of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time is determined, and the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (middle symbol Z2 in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. decide.

The relationship between the numerical value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time and the relationship between the numerical value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set by using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and is set only by the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set with both values of both variable type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variable type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

If it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area. It is set whether the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a front-rear reach, a reach other than the front-rear reach, or a complete loss. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is set according to whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state, and the number of pending operations N. The tables are set differently.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the disengaged symbol. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S403, the values of the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are confirmed based on the values of the first variable type counter CS1. The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as, etc. is determined, and the fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (middle symbol Z2 in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 (in other words). For example, the number of variable symbols) is determined.

When the processing of S403 or the processing of S405 is completed, the effect time to be added or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, addition / subtraction of the effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display is performed. The fluctuation time of the device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the addition / subtraction of the effect time is determined by setting the variation display time to 2 when the variation display time is not changed and when the variation display time is added by 1 second according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3. When adding seconds, four types of addition values are determined, one is when the fluctuation display time is subtracted by 1 second.

When the variable display time is added or subtracted, the third symbol display device 81 has a notice effect in which the expected value of the jackpot is high (for example, a slip effect in which the variable time of the variable symbol is made longer than usual and accompanied by slippage. An effect of displaying the notice character, an effect of making the fluctuation time of the fluctuation symbol of 1 shorter than usual and immediately stopping, etc.) is performed. Further, when the value of the random number counter C1 per first is a big hit, the probability that the addition value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by checking the advance notice effect. Can be done.

Next, the fluctuation pattern command is set according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S403 or S405 (S407), and the stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404. (S408). Then, the effect time addition command is set according to the effect time addition value determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the variation process.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (see FIG. 5B), the frame open detection is detected. The circuit 260 supplies a current to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 until about 10 ms elapses (for about 10 ms) after the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. Then, a current is supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 provided on the external output terminal plate 261 via the resistor R7, and the light emitting diode emits light for about 10 ms. Then, when the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the light of the light emitting diode, the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the light of about 10 ms in pulse width. Converts a pulse signal (electrical signal) of about 10 ms and outputs the pulse signal to the hall computer 262. The output pulse signal is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by using the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261, it is possible to store the hall computer 262 that the inner frame 12 has been opened or the front frame 14 has been opened. The hall computer 262 has been operated for 24 hours. Therefore, in the frame opening detection circuit 260, the pulse signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 and the time when the pulse signal is output, that is, the opening time of the inner frame 12 and the opening time of the front frame 14 is also the hall computer. It can be stored in 262.

Further, since the frame opening detection circuit 260 is provided with a 0.1F capacitor CD1, the frame opening detection circuit 260 supplies power to the pachinko machine 10 and has a DC voltage of 12 volts from the DC power supply DC1. When is supplied, it operates naturally, and further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even if there is no such case, the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. Therefore, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. can do.

Next, the pachinko machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is obtained by changing the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to a frame opening detection circuit 270 having a different configuration. The frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment simplifies the circuit configuration with respect to the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment. Specifically, the frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment removes the timer IC1, the resistors R1 to R3, and the capacitors CD3 to CD5 from the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment, and the capacitors CD1 have different capacities. The circuit configuration is simplified by changing to the capacitor CD6 and changing the connection of each component.

According to the frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment, a high signal whose output period fluctuates according to the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be output to the hall computer 262, so that the inner frame 12 can be output. Alternatively, in addition to being able to detect the opening of the front frame 14, it is also possible to detect the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14.

FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment. In FIG. 7, the same parts as the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same numbers, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

The capacitor CD6 is obtained by changing the capacitance of the capacitor CD1 used in the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment from 0.1F (farad) to 1F (farad). The capacitor CD6 is a component that functions as a rechargeable battery like the capacitor CD1 of the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment. One end of the capacitor CD6 is connected to the cathode of the diode D1, and the other end of the capacitor CD6 is grounded. There is.

Similar to the capacitor CD1 (see FIG. 7) described above, this capacitor CD6 is supplied with power to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, and when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. It is obtained by the product of the capacitance 1F of the capacitor CD6 and the DC voltage applied to the capacitor CD6 (about 11.3 volts obtained by subtracting the voltage drop 0.7 volt at the diode D1 from the 12 volt supplied from the DC power supply DC1). Stores charge.

On the other hand, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the capacitor CD6 is used. , A DC voltage (about 11.3 volts) based on the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD6 is supplied to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal plate 261.

Specifically, since the capacitor CD6 has a capacitance of 1F (farad) and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD6 is about 11.3 volts, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD6 is the capacitance of the capacitor CD6 and the capacitor CD6. From the product of the applied voltages, it becomes about 11.3 C (Coulomb). The electric charge of about 11.3C stored in the capacitor CD6 is about 10 minutes in the output period of the high signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. Therefore, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the outside. The frame opening detection circuit 270 can detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 until the total output period of the high signal output from the output terminal plate 261 is about 10 minutes. Further, the frame opening detection circuit 270 can also detect the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. When the total output period of opening the inner frame 12 or opening the front frame 14 is close to about 10 minutes, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD6 decreases, and the current value supplied from the capacitor CD6 to the photocoupler PR1 decreases. However, by increasing the detection sensitivity of the high signal of the hall computer 262 (by lowering the threshold value for the amplitude of the high signal), the hall computer 262 can store the high signal.

In this way, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, it naturally operates, and further, for example, the business hours of the amusement park. Is completed, the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is cut off, and even when the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the frame opening detection circuit 270 has 1F ( Since the capacitor CD6 of Farad) is provided, the frame opening detection circuit 270 can detect the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14. A cathode terminal of a diode D1 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD6, and since this diode D1 functions to prevent backflow of current, direct current is applied from the capacitor CD6 to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal plate 261. Even when a voltage (about 11.3 volts) is supplied, the DC voltage is not applied to the DC power supply DC1 and the DC power supply DC1 is not damaged. In this embodiment, the capacitor CD6 is used as a component for supplying the DC voltage to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal board 261 when the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the capacitor CD6 may be a secondary battery (rechargeable battery) having a larger storage capacity or a primary battery that does not need to be charged.

One end of the capacitor CD6 is connected to one end of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, and is also connected to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. One end of the resistor R9 is connected to the other ends of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2. One end of the capacitor CD2, one end of the resistor R4, and one end of the internal resistance R5 of the transistor TR1 are connected to the other end of the resistor R9.

By this connection, one of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 (one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14), or both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state). Since a DC voltage is supplied to the resistor R4 during a certain period, the terminals between the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 become conductive. Then, during this period, a current is supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 via the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. As a result, one of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 (one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14), or both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state). ) During the period, a high signal is output from the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 to the hall computer 262. Therefore, according to the frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment, since the frame opening detection circuit 270 is provided with the capacitor CD6 on the 1st floor (Farad), the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment can be supplied. Even when the DC power supply DC1 is cut off and a DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied, a high signal whose output period fluctuates according to the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is transmitted to the external output terminal board 261. Can be output to the hall computer 262. Therefore, in addition to being able to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, it is also possible to detect the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. The hall computer 262 has been operated for 24 hours. Therefore, in the frame opening detection circuit 270, the high signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 and the time when the high signal is output, that is, the opening time of the inner frame 12 and the opening time of the front frame 14 is also the hall computer. It can be stored in 262.

Further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal board 261. That is, when a DC voltage of about 11.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD6 to the frame open detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal plate 261, the supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD6 to the photocoupler PR1 is set as the inner frame. It can be kept in the period when the 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be suppressed to a small value.

For example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off and the DC voltage is supplied from the capacitor CD6 to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal plate 261, the inner frame When the total supply period of current from the capacitor CD6 to the photocoupler PR1 due to the opening of the 12 or the front frame 14 is lengthened, or the number of times the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is detected is increased, the capacitor CD6 (For example, the capacity of the capacitor CD6 is 10F), or the capacitor CD6 may be changed to a secondary battery having a large storage capacity.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270 that changes according to the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12) and the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14) (FIG. 19). 18) and the output of the external output terminal board 261 (input of the hall computer 262) will be described. FIG. 19 shows the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12), the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14), the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270, and the output of the external output terminal plate 261 (the hall computer 262). It is a timing chart showing the relationship of input). It should be noted that each time from t1 o'clock to t8 o'clock shown in FIG. 19 is the same as each time from t1 o'clock to t8 o'clock shown in the timing chart of the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. is there.

As shown in FIG. 19 (a), when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t1, the frame open detection circuit 270 is followed as shown in FIG. 19 (c). The voltage of A (see FIG. 18) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt (at t1). Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the low state to the high state (t1). Time). As a result, the output of a high signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t2, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270 is as shown in FIG. 19C. Switch from about 11.3 volts to zero volts (at t2). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state (at t2).

The switching of the output of the external output terminal board 261 becomes a high signal, and the high signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262 from t1 o'clock to t2 o'clock. That is, a high signal having a pulse width of the output period from t1 to t2 is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t3, the frame is opened as shown in FIG. 19 (c) following this. The voltage of A in the detection circuit 270 (see FIG. 18) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt (at t3). Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the low state to the high state (t3). Time). As a result, the output of a high signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t4, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270 is as shown in FIG. 19C. Switch from about 11.3 volts to zero volts (at t4). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state (at t4).

The switching of the output of the external output terminal board 261 becomes a high signal, and the high signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262 from t3 o'clock to t4 o'clock. That is, a high signal having a pulse width of the output period from t3 to t4 is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

Finally, a case where the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the switch SW1 is in a conductive state (inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t5, and further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (front surface) at t6. When the frame 14 is in the open state), as shown in FIG. 19C, the voltage of A of the frame open detection circuit 270 (see FIG. 18) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt at t5. Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 19 (d), as shown in FIG. 19 (d), the output of the external output terminal board 261 switches from the low state to the high state (at 5 o'clock). As a result, the output of a high signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t7, and as shown in FIG. 19B, the switch SW2 is in the shutoff state at t8. When (the front frame 14 is in the closed state), as shown in FIG. 19C, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270 switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt at t8. Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state (at 8 o'clock).

The switching of the output of the external output terminal board 261 becomes a high signal, and the high signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262 from t5 o'clock to t8 o'clock. That is, a high signal having a pulse width of the output period from t5 to t8 is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

In this way, when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state), in the frame open detection circuit 270, either the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (inner frame). External from the time when either 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state until both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the cutoff state (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the closed state). A high signal can be output from the output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262. Therefore, in addition to being able to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have been opened since either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 was opened. It is possible to detect the opening period until the is closed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, since the frame opening detection circuit 270 is provided with the capacitor CD6 on the 1st floor (farad), the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is cut off. Even when a DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the frame opening detection circuit 270 provides a high signal whose output period fluctuates according to the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. It can be output to the hall computer 262. Then, it is possible to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 by storing the high signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 and the output period of the output high signal. In addition to being able to, the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can also be detected. Further, the high signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened can be identified by the high signal stored in the hall computer 262. Furthermore, by storing the high signal output from the external output terminal board 261 and the output time of the output high signal in the hall computer 262, the opening time or the front surface of the specified pachinko machine inner frame 12 is stored. The opening time of the frame 14 can also be detected.

Next, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. The pachinko machine of the third embodiment is obtained by changing the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to a frame opening detection circuit 280 having a different configuration. The frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment simplifies the circuit configuration with respect to the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment. Specifically, the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment removes the resistor R2, the capacitor CD4 and CD5 from the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment, and removes the resistor R1, the capacitor CD3, the resistor R7, and the switch SW1. And, each connection of the switch SW2 is changed, the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator, and the integrator circuit 281 composed of the resistor 10 and the capacitor CD7 is connected to the front stage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 to configure the circuit. Is a simplification of. Then, the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment outputs the mode of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 and the OUT terminal of the timer IC 1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment. This is a modification of the voltage mode.

According to the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment, the integrator circuit 281 keeps the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 constant regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. By setting the period (about 2 ms), the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is set to be larger than the period (about 10 ms) in which the voltage of about 9.6 volts is output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1. Can be adjusted short. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is limited to about 10 ms for each opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. be able to. Therefore, the frame opening detection circuit 280 can simplify the circuit configuration as compared with the frame opening detection circuit 260, and the period during which a voltage of about 9.6 volts is output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is limited to about 10 ms. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be further suppressed to be smaller than that of the frame opening detection circuit 260.

FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment. In FIG. 7, the same parts as the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same numbers, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

When the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, one end of the capacitor CD1 that supplies the DC voltage to the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal board 261 It is connected to one end of the 100 kΩ resistor R10, and is also connected to the VDD terminal of the timer IC1, one end of the 100 KΩ resistor R1a, the RES terminal of the timer IC 1, and one end of the 1 KΩ resistor R7a.

The other end of the resistor R1a is connected to one end of the 0.1 μF capacitor CD3a, and is also connected to the DCH terminal of the timer IC1 and the TH terminal of the timer IC1. The other end of the capacitor CD3a is grounded. By connecting the capacitor CD3a and the resistor R1a, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 of the timer IC1 is opened, so that the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is applied. When the voltage drops to zero volt, it functions as a monostable multivibrator that raises the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt for about 10 ms. The period for raising the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt is about 10 ms, which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R1a (100 kΩ) and the capacitance value of the capacitor CD3a (0.1 μF). It is determined by a certain time constant.

The resistor R10 is a resistor that stabilizes the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1, and is a resistor that constitutes the integrating circuit 281 with the capacitor CD7. The other end of the resistor R10 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode D2, the cathode terminal of the diode D2 is connected to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, and the Zener voltage limiting voltage (Zener voltage) is about 10.5 volts. It is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode D3, one end of each of the switches SW1 and the switch SW2 connected in parallel. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is about 11.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1. The voltage drop at the resistor R10 is about 0.3 volt, and the voltage drop at the diode D2 is about 0.7 volt, which is subtracted from the voltage of about 10.3 volt.

The 0.02 μF capacitor CD7 is a capacitor that constitutes an integrating circuit 281 with a resistor R10 and controls the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. The other ends of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are connected to one end of the capacitor CD7, and the other end of the capacitor CD7 is grounded. The integrating circuit 281 composed of the capacitor CD7 and the resistor R10 is applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 when the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 becomes conductive due to the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 being opened. It is a circuit that lowers the voltage of about 10.3 volt to zero volt and returns the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to about 10.3 volt again about 2 ms after the lowering.

Specifically, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted according to the opening, a voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 is applied to the capacitor CD7. The application is started, and the charging of the capacitor CD7 is started. At the start of charging, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 momentarily becomes zero volt, so that the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 momentarily becomes zero volt. Then, as the capacitor CD7 is charged, the capacitor CD7 raises the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, and finally controls the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 to about 10.3 volts. It is.

The period until the capacitor CD7 is fully charged, that is, the voltage of about 10.3 volts applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt, and the voltage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops from that drop. The period of about 2 ms until the voltage returns to about 10.3 volt is determined by the time constant which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R10 (100 kΩ) and the capacitance value of the capacitor CD7 (0.02 μF).

In this way, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops, and the period (about 2 ms) from the fall until the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns to about 10.3 volts is the integrator circuit 281. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is adjusted to a period shorter than the period (about 10 ms) in which the voltage rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. By changing the resistance value of the resistor R10 and the capacitance value of the capacitor CD7, the voltage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to about 10.3 volts after the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops. The period until the timer IC1 returns to the value can be freely changed within about 10 ms, which is the period until the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt.

Here, the monostable multi-vibrator does not normally output a signal from the output terminal unless the input period of the signal input to the input terminal is shorter than the output period of the signal output from the output terminal (from the output terminal). The signal continues to be output). Therefore, when the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator without using the integrating circuit 281, the timer IC1 is longer than the period in which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. The period until the TRG terminal voltage of the above returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again, that is, the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 (conduction period of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2) must be short. However, since it is completely unpredictable how long the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 will be, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have a longer voltage than the period when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. In order to keep the opening period of the front frame 14 always short, it is necessary to set the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt to a period with sufficient margin. For example, if the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is predicted to be from several tens of seconds to several minutes, the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt is sufficiently sufficient. Must be set from a few minutes to a few tens of minutes. Then, during this set period, the DC voltage is continuously supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal plate 261, so that the capacitor CD1 is significantly consumed. Therefore, in order to make the timer IC1 function as a monostable multivibrator without using the integrating circuit 281 and further suppress the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1, a special circuit configuration is required. there were.

However, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened by providing the integrating circuit 281 in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, the timer IC1 is irrespective of the opening period (the conduction period of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2). Adjust the period from when the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to about 10.3 volts until it returns to about 10.3 volts shorter than the period when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volts to about 9.6 volts. can do. In this way, the integrator circuit 281 makes the timer IC1 normal by setting the fall period of the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. By operating the timer IC1, the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt can be limited to about 10 ms.

Then, when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt for about 10 ms, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 conduct for about 10 ms, and pass through the resistor R7a. A current is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 for about 10 ms. As a result, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 for each opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. In this way, even if the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator, the integration circuit 281 is provided in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 to suppress the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 and is special. The output period of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms without adopting a simple circuit configuration.

The TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode D3 having a limiting voltage (Zener voltage) of about 10.5 volts, and the ground is connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode D3. In this Zener diode D3, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 and the voltage supplied from the capacitor CD1 are superimposed. This is an element that prevents an overvoltage (for example, a voltage of 12.3 volts) having a magnitude that destroys the timer IC1 from being applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Specifically, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted, and the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is returned to the inner frame 12 or the front frame within a relatively short period of time. When the next opening of 14 is performed and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted, the electric charge is discharged from the other end side to the one end side of the switch SW1 or the switch SW2. The voltage of about 10.3 volts discharged from the capacitor CD7 and the voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 are superimposed, and an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC1 is applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Can be applied. However, since the Zener diode D3 having a limiting voltage (Zener voltage) of about 10.5 volts is connected between the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 and the ground, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is increased. The maximum value is about 10.5 volts, and an overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1 is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. As described above, by using the Zener diode D3 having a simple structure and being inexpensive, it is possible to prevent an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC1 from being applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 and prevent damage to the timer IC1. it can.

As described above, since the limiting depressurization (Zener voltage) of the Zener diode D3 is about 10.5 volts, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off. In that case, the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 does not flow to the ground via the Zener diode D3, and the charge of the capacitor CD1 is not consumed. Further, the cathode terminal of the diode D2 is connected to one end of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, and since this diode D2 exerts a current backflow prevention function, the voltage of about 10.3 volts discharged from the capacitor CD7. However, it is applied to the VDD terminals of the capacitor CD1 and the timer IC1 so that they are not damaged.

As described above, in the timer IC1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted, and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt. Then, for about 10 ms from this fall, it functions as a monostable multivibrator that raises the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. Then, by providing the integrating circuit 281 in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the timer IC 1 can be opened regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. Adjust the period from when the voltage applied to the TRG terminal drops to about 10.3 volts until it returns to about 10.3 volts, which is shorter than the period when the voltage at the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volts to about 9.6 volts. Can be done. In this way, the integrator circuit 281 sets the fall period of the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the open period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, thereby forming a monostable multivibrator. The functioning timer IC1 can be operated normally, and the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt can be limited to about 10 ms. As a result, the period during which the current is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 can be limited to about 10 ms, and the output period of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms. it can.

Further, since the frame opening detection circuit 280 is provided with a 0.1F capacitor CD1, the frame opening detection circuit 280 supplies power to the pachinko machine, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is applied from the DC power supply DC1. If it is supplied, it naturally operates, and further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even so, the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. Then, when the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 is detected by the frame opening detection circuit 280, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is transmitted from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 for each detection. Can be output. The pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, by storing the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 and the output time of the output pulse signal, the opening time or the front surface of the specified pachinko machine inner frame 12 is stored. The opening time of the frame 14 can be detected.

In the door opening detection circuit 280, an LMC555 is used for the timer IC1 to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14, and realize a circuit in which the photocoupler PR1 is energized for about 10 ms. It is not limited. That is, by using another integrated circuit or the like for the timer IC 1, a circuit that generates one pulse signal for one opening of the inner frame 12 or one opening of the front frame 14 is realized. The photocoupler PR1 may be energized for a predetermined period based on the pulse signal.

Further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off and the DC voltage is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal plate 261, the inner frame When the total supply period of the current from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 due to the opening of the 12 or the front frame 14 is lengthened, or the number of times the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is detected is increased, the capacitor CD1 (For example, the capacity of the capacitor CD1 is 1F), or the capacitor CD1 may be changed to a secondary battery having a large storage capacity.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 that changes according to the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12) and the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14), and the timer IC1 The relationship between the OUT terminal voltage and the output of the external output terminal board 261 (input of the hall computer 262) will be described. FIG. 21 shows the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12), the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1, and the output of the external output terminal plate 261 (the state of the external output terminal plate 261). It is a timing chart which showed the relationship (input of a hall computer 262). It should be noted that each time from t1 o'clock to t8 o'clock shown in FIG. 21 is the same as each time from t1 o'clock to t8 o'clock shown in the timing chart of the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. is there.

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the switch SW1 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t1, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 21C, the timer IC1 The TRG terminal voltage drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (at t1). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 21D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at t1). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are conducted, and the current supply is started to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 20). (At t1). Then, as shown in FIG. 21E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t1. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), when about 2 ms elapses from t1, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t1 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, when about 10 ms elapses from t1 o'clock, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 21 (d). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state after about 10 ms has elapsed from t1 o'clock, as shown in FIG. 21 (e). As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t2, the frame opening detection circuit 280 again detects the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. It is set to the possible state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the switch SW2 becomes conductive (the front frame 14 is in the open state) at t3, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 21 (c), charging is started. The TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (at t3). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 21D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at t3). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are conducted, and the current supply is started to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 20). (T3 o'clock). Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t3. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

The electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 between t1 and t2 is instantaneously completed to be discharged via the Zener diode D3 at t3. The discharge period of the capacitor CD7 is a period much smaller than about 2 ms, when the voltage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 changes from about 10.3 volts to zero volts and becomes about 10.3 volts again, so that the TRG of the timer IC1 It does not significantly affect the voltage applied to the terminals. Further, in addition to this discharge, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 from t1 to t2 is also discharged by the self-discharge of the capacitor CD7.

Further, at t3, a voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 and a voltage of about 10.3 volts associated with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 are superimposed on the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. An overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1 can be applied. However, since the Zener diode D3 having a limiting voltage (Zener voltage) of about 10.5 volts is connected to the front stage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, the maximum value of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is An overvoltage of about 10.5 volts, which is large enough to destroy the timer IC1, is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21C, when about 2 ms elapses from t3, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t3 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, when about 10 ms elapses from t3, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 21 (d). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 21 (e) when about 10 ms elapses from t3 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the switch SW2 is shut off (the front frame 14 is closed) at t4, the frame opening detection circuit 280 again detects the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. It is set to the possible state.

Finally, a case where the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the switch SW1 is in a conductive state (inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t5, and further, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (front surface) at t6. When the frame 14 is in the open state), charging of the capacitor CD7 is started at t5, and as shown in FIG. 21 (c), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (t5). Time). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 21D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at t5). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are conducted, and the current supply is started to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 20). (T5 o'clock). Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t5. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

The electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 between t3 and t4 is instantaneously completed to be discharged via the Zener diode D3 at t5, which significantly affects the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. is not. Further, in addition to this discharge, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 from t3 to t4 is also discharged by the self-discharge of the capacitor CD7.

Further, at t5, a voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 and a voltage of about 10.3 volts associated with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 are superimposed on the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. An overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1 can be applied. However, since the maximum value of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 by the Zener diode D3 is about 10.5 volts, an overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1 is applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. There is no.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21C, when about 2 ms elapses from t5, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t5 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t5, as shown in FIG. 21D, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 21 (e) when about 10 ms elapses from t5 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the switch SW1 is in the shut-off state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t7, and the switch SW2 is in the shut-off state at t8 as shown in FIG. 21 (b). When (the front frame 14 is in the closed state), the frame opening detection circuit 280 is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be detected again.

In this way, even if the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state), the timer IC1 keeps the continuity period of the switch SW1. Regardless of the (opening period of the inner frame 12) and the conduction period of the switch SW2 (opening period of the front frame 14), either the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14). Is in the open state), and when about 10 ms elapses after the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched from about 9.6 volts to zero volts. As a result, the supply period of the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 becomes about 10 ms.

Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC power supply DC1 to the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied to the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal board 261. When a DC voltage of about 10.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame open detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal plate 261, the supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is set to the inner frame 12 Alternatively, it can be limited to about 10 ms per opening of the front frame 14. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be suppressed to a small value.

Here, since the capacitor CD1 has a capacitance of 0.1 F and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD1 is about 11.3 volts, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 is the capacitance of the capacitor CD1 and the applied voltage of the capacitor CD1. From the product of, it becomes about 1.13C (coulomb). The electric charge of about 1.13C stored in the capacitor CD1 corresponds to about 500 times of current supply when the current supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is about 10 ms. To do. Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened (the continuity of the switch SW1). ) Or the front frame 14 is opened (conduction of the switch SW2) many times, the frame opening detection circuit 280 opens the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (conduction of the switch SW1 or the switch). (Conduction of SW2) can be reliably detected up to about 500 times each time, and a pulse signal can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. At this time, when the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened about 500 times, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 decreases, and the current value supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 decreases, but the hole By increasing the detection sensitivity of the pulse signal of the computer 262 (by lowering the threshold value for the amplitude of the pulse signal), the hall computer 262 can store the pulse signal.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state, the integrator circuit 281 causes the inner frame. Regardless of the opening period of 12 or the front frame 14, the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 is set to a fixed period (about 2 ms). Then, the timer IC1 functioning as a monostable multivibrator operates normally, and the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is reduced from zero volt until about 10 ms elapses after the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt. Start up to 9.6 volts. As a result, a current is supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 provided on the external output terminal plate 261 via the resistor R7a, and the light emitting diode emits light for about 10 ms. Then, when the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the light of the light emitting diode, the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the light of about 10 ms in pulse width. Converts a pulse signal (electrical signal) of about 10 ms and outputs the pulse signal to the hall computer 262. The output pulse signal is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by using the frame opening detection circuit 280 provided with the integrating circuit 281 and the external output terminal plate 261, it is possible to make the hall computer 262 memorize that the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened. it can. The hall computer 262 has been operated for 24 hours. Therefore, in the frame opening detection circuit 280, the pulse signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 and the time when the pulse signal is output, that is, the opening time of the inner frame 12 and the opening time of the front frame 14 is also the hall computer. It can be stored in 262.

Further, since the frame opening detection circuit 280 is provided with a 0.1F capacitor CD1, the frame opening detection circuit 280 supplies power to the pachinko machine, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is applied from the DC power supply DC1. If it is supplied, it naturally operates, and further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even so, the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. Therefore, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. be able to.

In the present embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is electrically connected, a pulse signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. It is not limited to this. That is, when the connection of each component of the main frame opening detection circuit 280 is changed, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, and the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed, the photocoupler PR1 is connected. A current may be supplied for about 10 ms to output a pulse signal from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

However, in the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the present embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is electrically connected, a pulse signal is transmitted from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. Is configured to output, so that the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be quickly detected. Therefore, it is possible to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 before the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the main control device 110 or the game board 13 is cheated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent abnormal operation due to fraudulent activity that occurs when power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

Next, the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 32. In the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is used. When it is released, the pachinko machine 500 is used to separately notify which one is released, and which one is released is separately output to the hall computer 262. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even if the control of the main control device 110 is stopped, when any of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, which one is opened is separately output to the hall computer 262.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame is opened. The pachinko machine 500 can be used to separately notify whether the front frame 14 has been opened, the front frame 14 has been opened, or both have been opened. Further, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the case where the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the case where the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. However, when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, pulse signals can be output separately to the hall computer 262. Therefore, from the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, it is possible to identify whether the inner frame 12 has been opened, the front frame 14 has been opened, or both have been opened.

The internal configuration of the pachinko machine 500 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 500 in a state where the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are open. In the explanation of FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has switches SW1 (SW1a, SW1b) and switches SW2 (SW2a, SW2b) provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described in FIG. ) Is changed to switch SW3 and switch SW4. Therefore, in FIG. 4, the same parts as the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 are assigned the same numbers, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

A switch SW3 for detecting the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 is provided between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and the opening and closing of the front frame 14 and the opening of the front frame 14 are provided between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. A switch SW4 for detecting closure is provided. With the switch SW3 and the switch SW4, the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 and the opening and closing of the front frame 14 can be detected separately.

Next, the structures of the switch SW3 and the switch SW4 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the switch SW3 and the switch SW4 have the same structure, the structure of the switch SW3 will be described, and the description of the switch SW4 will be omitted.

FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the switch SW3. FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view showing a state (blocking state) of the switch SW3 in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed. Further, FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view showing a state (conduction state) of the switch SW3 in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 23A, the switch SW3 arranged on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 has a movable shaft SW3a that comes into contact with the inner frame 12 in a closed state, and a movable shaft thereof. It is composed of conductor plates SW3-1a and SW3-2a made of metal which is a conductive member arranged on SW3a, and metal arranged at opposite positions of the conductor plates SW3-1a and SW3-2a. The pair of terminal plates SW3-1b and SW3-2b, the support plates SW3-1c and SW3-2c for arranging the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b and SW3-2b in the housing SW3b, and the conductor plate SW3, respectively. A pair that is arranged on a surface opposite to the surface facing the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b on -2a and generates an urging force with respect to the conductor plate SW3-2a in the direction toward the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b. Spring SW3c is provided. The conductor plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b constitute the switch SW3-1, and the conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b constitute the switch SW3-2. Therefore, the switch SW3 has two built-in switches, a switch SW3-1 and a switch SW3-2.

As shown in FIG. 23A, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the movable shaft SW3a comes into contact with the inner frame 12, and the movable shaft SW3a is pushed into the housing SW3b. Therefore, the contact between the conductor plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b is hindered, and the contact between the conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b is hindered. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the continuity of both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 is cut off.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23B, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the contact of the movable shaft SW3a with the inner frame 12 is released, so that the conductor is urged by the urging force of the pair of springs SW3c. The plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b come into contact with each other, and the conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b come into contact with each other. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened, both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state.

As described above, both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 built in the housing SW3b are in a cutoff state when the inner frame 12 is closed, while are in a conductive state when the inner frame 12 is open. It becomes. That is, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 have a structure in which the conduction state and the cutoff state operate in conjunction with each other. However, the structure of the switch SW3 is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 23, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are shut off, while the inner frame 12 is closed. The structure may be such that the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state when is open. This also applies to the structure of the switch SW4.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 500. In the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the frame opening detection circuit 260 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in FIG. 6 is used for an inner frame having a modified circuit configuration. The frame opening detection circuit 290 is changed, and the electrical connection of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 is changed. Then, in the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the external output terminal plate 261 described above in FIG. 6 is changed to an external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame. In addition to this, the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a new front frame frame opening detection circuit 292 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described in FIG. is there. The pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is provided with an external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame in response to the front frame opening detection circuit 292 newly provided in the main control device 110. Is. Therefore, in FIG. 6, the same parts as the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 are assigned the same numbers, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

The main control device 110 is provided with an inner frame opening detection circuit 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 by conducting the switches SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2). The inner frame opening detection circuit 290 includes an input / output port 205 which is an input / output port of the MPU 201, a switch SW3 which detects the opening of the inner frame 12, and an outer frame external output configured to be connectable to the hall computer 262. It is connected to the terminal plate 291. An input / output unit that inputs / outputs signals to the switch SW3 and the inner frame openness detection circuit 290 and the connection between the inner frame openness detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal board 291 ( The connection is made via an input / output port different from the input / output port 205 (not shown).

The inner frame open detection circuit 290 supplies the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2) when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. ) Conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, and outputs a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts to the input / output port 205. When this signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 turns on the inner frame opening flag 203a described later, and issues an inner frame opening command indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 via the input / output port 205. Output to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the inner frame opening command turns on the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a described later, outputs the inner frame opening command to the display control device 114, and outputs the inner frame opening command to the voice output device 226 and The lamp display device 227 is used to notify the opening of the inner frame 12. Further, the display control device 114 that has received the inner frame opening command output from the voice lamp control device 113 turns on the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c, which will be described later, and sends a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81. In addition to this, when the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2) conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 290 holes from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262.

On the other hand, the frame opening detection circuit 290 for the inner frame is used, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. When the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2) conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, the signal is not output to the input port 205, and the hole is inserted from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262. The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, the opening of the inner frame 12 can be detected by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262.

Further, the main control device 110 is provided with a front frame opening detection circuit 292 that detects the opening of the front frame 14 by conducting the switches SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2). The front frame opening detection circuit 292 includes an input / output port 205 which is an input / output port of the MPU 201, a switch SW4 which detects the opening of the front frame 14, and an external output for the front frame configured to be connectable to the hall computer 262. It is connected to the terminal plate 293. An input / output unit (input / output) that inputs / outputs signals to the connection between the switch SW4 and the front frame open detection circuit 292 and the connection between the front frame open detection circuit 292 and the front frame external output terminal board 293. The connection is made via an input / output port different from port 205 (not shown).

The front frame opening detection circuit 292 has the same function as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 described above. That is, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) conducts and the front frame 14 When it detects that the switch is open, it outputs a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts to the input / output port 205. When this signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 turns on the front frame opening flag 203b, which will be described later, and issues a front frame opening command indicating the opening of the front frame 14 via the input / output port 205. Output to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the front frame opening command turns on the front frame opening command reception flag 223b, which will be described later, outputs the front frame opening command to the display control device 114, and outputs the front frame opening command to the voice output device 226 and The lamp display device 227 is used to notify the opening of the front frame 14. Further, the display control device 114 that has received the front frame opening command output from the voice lamp control device 113 turns on the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d, and sends a message indicating the opening of the front frame 14 to the third symbol. It is displayed on the display device 81. In addition to this, the front frame opening detection circuit 292 holes from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 when the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262.

On the other hand, the front frame open detection circuit 292 is used, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. When the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14, the signal is not output to the input port 205, and the hole is inserted from the front frame external output terminal plate 293. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262. The pulse signal output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262.

Here, the front frame opening detection circuit 292 and the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 are each connected to different input ports of the input / output ports 205. Therefore, the signal output from the front frame opening detection circuit 292 and the signal output from the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 are individually input to the input / output port 205. Therefore, in the MPU 201 mounted on the main control device 110, the signal input to the input / output port 205 is output from the front frame opening detection circuit 292 or the inner frame opening detection circuit 290. It is possible to determine whether the signal is a signal.

Further, the front frame external output terminal plate 293 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 are respectively connected to different input terminals of the hall computer 262. Therefore, the pulse signal output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 and the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 are individually input to the hall computer 262. As a result, the pulse signal output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 and the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 can be individually stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by analyzing the pulse signals individually stored in the hall computer 262, it is possible to detect whether the inner frame 12 has been opened or the front frame 14 has been opened.

As described above, the main control device 110 includes an inner frame opening detection circuit 290 that operates when the inner frame 12 is opened, and a front frame opening detection circuit 292 that operates when the front frame 14 is opened. It is provided separately in. Therefore, when either one or both of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, which one is opened can be determined by the notification performed by the pachinko machine 500, and the hall computer. It can also be discriminated by the pulse signal stored in 262.

The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with an inner frame opening flag 203a and a front frame opening flag 203b. The inner frame opening flag 203a is a flag indicating an open state or a closed state of the inner frame 12. As described above, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3) is opened. When -2) becomes conductive, a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 to the input / output port 205. When this 5-volt signal is detected by the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on. When the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on, the MPU 201 transmits an inner frame opening command informing the voice lamp control device 113 that the inner frame 12 has been opened.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is closed and the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2) is closed. ) Is interrupted, the signal output of the DC voltage 5 volt from the inner frame open detection circuit 290 to the input / output port 205 is stopped (the output from the inner frame open detection circuit 290 to the input / output port 205 is zero volt. Will be). When the stop of the signal output is detected by the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off. When the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off, the MPU 201 transmits an inner frame closing command informing the voice lamp control device 113 that the inner frame 12 has been closed. In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on, while when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off.

The front frame opening flag 203b is a flag indicating an open state or a closed state of the front frame 14. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) is turned on. When the conduction occurs, a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the front frame open detection circuit 292 to the input / output port 205. When this 5-volt signal is detected by the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on. When the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on, the MPU 201 transmits a front frame opening command informing the voice lamp control device 113 that the front frame 14 has been opened.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the front frame 14 is closed and the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) is closed. ) Is interrupted, the signal output of the DC voltage 5 volt from the front frame open detection circuit 292 to the input / output port 205 is stopped (the output from the front frame open detection circuit 292 to the input / output port 205 is zero volt. Will be). When the stop of the signal output is detected by the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off. When the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off, the MPU 201 transmits a front frame closing command informing the voice lamp control device 113 that the front frame 14 has been closed. In this way, when the front frame 14 is opened, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on, while when the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an inner frame opening command receiving flag 223a and a front frame opening command receiving flag 223b. The inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is a flag indicating whether the command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is an inner frame opening command or an inner frame closing command. As described above, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on. , The inner frame opening command is transmitted by the MPU 201 to the voice lamp control device 113. When this inner frame open command is detected by the MPU 221 via the input / output port 225, the inner frame open command reception flag 223a is turned on. When the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 transmits an inner frame opening command indicating that the inner frame 12 has been released to the display control device 114. Further, the MPU 221 notifies the opening of the inner frame 12 by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227.

On the other hand, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off and the sound is heard. An inner frame closing command is transmitted by the MPU 201 to the lamp control device 113. When this inner frame closing command is detected by the MPU 221 via the input / output port 225, the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned off. When the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned off, the MPU 221 transmits an inner frame closing command informing the display control device 114 that the inner frame 12 has been closed. Further, the MPU 221 stops the notification performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the inner frame open command is detected by the MPU 221, the inner frame open command reception flag 223a is turned on, while the inner frame 12 is closed and the inner frame close command is sent to the MPU 221. When it is detected, the inner frame open command reception flag 223a is turned off.

Further, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is a flag indicating whether the command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is a front frame opening command or a front frame closing command. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the front frame 14 is opened, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on to control the voice lamp. A front frame opening command is transmitted by the MPU 201 to the device 113. When this front frame open command is detected by the MPU 221 via the input / output port 225, the front frame open command reception flag 223b is turned on. When the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned on, the MPU 221 transmits a front frame opening command indicating that the front frame 14 has been opened to the display control device 114. Further, the MPU 221 uses the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to notify the opening of the front frame 14.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off and the sound is heard. A front frame closing command is transmitted by the MPU 201 to the lamp control device 113. When this front frame closing command is detected by the MPU 221 via the input / output port 225, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned off. When the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned off, the MPU 221 transmits a front frame closing command informing the display control device 114 that the front frame 14 has been closed. Further, the MPU 221 stops the notification performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In this way, when the front frame 14 is opened and the front frame open command is detected by the MPU 221, the front frame open command reception flag 223b is turned on, while the front frame 14 is closed and the front frame close command is sent to the MPU 221. When detected, the front frame open command reception flag 223b is turned off.

The RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with an effect permission flag 233a, a fluctuation start flag 233b, a display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c, and a display front frame opening command reception flag 233d. The effect permission flag 233a is a flag for permitting the start of display of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is transmitted via the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives (when the effect permission command is detected in the MPU 231 via the input port 237), it is turned on. In addition, once the effect permission flag 233a is turned on, the turned-on state is continued.

The fluctuation start flag 233b is a flag for permitting the start of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81, and the display control device 114 sends the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. It is turned on when it is received via the input port 237 (when the MPU 231 detects the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 via the input port 237). The fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off when the fluctuation display is started on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off because, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned on, the fluctuation display is started on the third symbol display device 81. This is because if the fluctuation start flag 233b is not turned off, the fluctuation start processing (process of S1010 in FIG. 31) described later is repeatedly executed, and the normal processing is not executed.

Next, the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c will be described. The display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is a flag indicating whether the command received by the display control device 114 is an inner frame opening command or an inner frame closing command. As described above, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the main control device 110 changes to the voice lamp control device. An inner frame opening command for notifying that the inner frame 12 has been opened is transmitted to the display control device 114 via 113. When this inner frame opening command is detected by the MPU 231 via the input port 237, the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is turned on. When the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is turned on, the MPU 231 displays a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the inner frame 12 is closed, the main control device 110 sets the voice lamp control device 113. An inner frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 to inform that the inner frame 12 has been closed. When this inner frame closing command is detected by the MPU 231 via the input port 237, the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is turned off. When the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is turned off, the MPU 231 deletes the message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Finally, the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d will be described. The display front frame opening command reception flag 233d is a flag indicating whether the command received by the display control device 114 is a front frame opening command or a front frame closing command. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the front frame 14 is opened, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113. , A front frame opening command for notifying that the front frame 14 has been opened is transmitted to the display control device 114. When this front frame open command is detected by the MPU 231 via the input port 237, the display front frame open command reception flag 233d is turned on. When the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d is turned on, the MPU 231 displays a message indicating the opening of the front frame 14 on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the front frame 14 is closed, the main control device 110 sets the voice lamp control device 113. A front frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 to inform that the front frame 14 has been closed. When this front frame closing command is detected by the MPU 231 via the input port 237, the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d is turned off. When the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d is turned off, the MPU 231 erases the message indicating the opening of the front frame 14 displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 used in the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. In the frame opening detection circuit 290 for the inner frame, the switch SW2 connected in parallel to the switch SW1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment described above in FIG. 20 is removed, and the switch SW1 is changed to the switch SW3-1. It is composed of a modified inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a and an inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b having a switch SW3-2 that operates in conjunction with the switch SW3-1. The inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a has the same configuration as the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment described above in FIG. 20, except that the switch SW2 is removed and the switch SW1 is changed to the switch SW3-1. Is. Further, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame has the same configuration as the external output terminal plate 261 of the third embodiment described in FIG. 20. Therefore, for the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal board 291, the same parts as the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal board 261 described above in FIG. 20 are assigned the same numbers. The explanation is omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

Further, the front frame opening detection circuit 292 includes a front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a (not shown) and a front frame input / output port output circuit 292b, similarly to the configuration of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290. It is composed of (not shown). The terminal plate output circuit 292a for the front frame differs from the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame only when the switch to be connected is changed from the switch SW3-1 to the switch SW4-1. It has the same configuration as the frame terminal board output circuit 290a. That is, the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a has the same function as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290, except that the switch to be connected is different from the inner frame opening detection circuit 290. Similarly, the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b differs from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b only in that the connected switch is changed from switch SW3-2 to switch SW4-2. Others have the same configuration as the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. That is, the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b has the same function as the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, except that the switch to be connected is different from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Further, the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame has the same configuration as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, that is, has the same configuration as the external output terminal plate 261 of the third embodiment described in FIG. is there. Therefore, the description of the front frame open detection circuit 292 (front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a and front frame input / output port output circuit 292b) and the front frame external output terminal plate 293 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the switch SW3-2 used in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, one end of the switch SW3-2 (one end of the terminal plate 3-2b) is the anode of the DC power supply DC1 and the diode D1. While connected to the terminal, the other end of the switch SW3-2 (the other end of the terminal plate 3-2b) is connected to one end of the resistor R11 having a resistance value of 140 kΩ.

The other end of the resistor R11 is connected to one end of the resistor R12 having a resistance value of 100 kΩ and the input / output port 205, and the other end of the resistor R12 is grounded. The resistor R11 and the resistor R12 form a voltage dividing circuit that divides the DC voltage of 12 volts supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Therefore, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive, the DC power supply DC1 sends power. The supplied 12 volt DC voltage is divided by the resistor R11 and the resistor R12. At this time, the DC voltage applied to the resistor R12 becomes about 5 volts. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive, a 5-volt signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened and provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. When the switch SW3-1 is conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a performs the same operation as that described in the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment of FIG. 20, and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. Outputs a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms to the hall computer 262.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is closed and provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. When the switch SW3-2 is shut off, no DC voltage is applied to the resistors R11 and R12. Therefore, when the switch SW3 is cut off and the switch SW3-2 is cut off, no signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (input / output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b). The DC voltage input to port 205 will be zero volt). When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is closed and provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. When the switch SW3-1 is shut off, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a performs the same operation as that described in the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment of FIG. 20, and the inner frame 12 is detected again. It is set to the possible state.

For example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, so that the switch SW3-2 is conducted. Even so, no signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (the DC voltage input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt).

However, power is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a from the capacitor CD1 as described in the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment of FIG. 20. Therefore, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the inner frame 12 is opened and provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. When the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a outputs a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262.

As described above, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is used. When the provided switch SW3-2 becomes conductive, a 5-volt signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205. When a 5-volt signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 notifies the opening of the inner frame 12 by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the pachinko machine 500 displays a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is holed from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262.

On the other hand, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, so that the inner frame 12 is opened. Even if the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is conductive, no signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (inner frame input / output). The DC voltage input from the port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt). However, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the power is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a from the capacitor CD1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is connected to the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the hall computer 262.

The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, the hall computer 262 outputs the pulse signal from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, and the output time of the output pulse signal is stored to open the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine. The time can be detected.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened while the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is being performed, the function of outputting the pulse signal to the hall computer 262 and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 are cut off. When the inner frame 12 is opened while the inner frame 12 is being operated, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 can be exhibited by the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a, which is one circuit.

Further, one end of the switch SW3-2 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is connected to the anode terminal of the DC power supply DC1 and the diode D1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned on, the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive and power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Then, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is in the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off, power is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, so that the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 is opened. Even so, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is in a stopped state.

On the other hand, one end of the switch SW3-1 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 via the diode D2 and the resistor R10. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned on, the switch SW3-1 conducts and power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. , The terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame is in the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off, the power supply from the DC power supply DC1 to the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame is stopped, but the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 is conducted. Then, since power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is put into an operating state. Here, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off and power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame, the power is supplied to the input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame. It can be cut off by the diode D1 that exhibits the backflow prevention function. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off, the number of times the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be detected can be increased.

Further, the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame stands up when the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch SW3-1 is conducted, and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt. It functions as a monostable multivibrator that raises the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt for about 10 ms from the drop. Then, by providing the integrating circuit 281 in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 is applied regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12. The period from when the voltage drops to zero volt to when it returns to about 10.3 volt can be adjusted shorter than the period when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. In this way, the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator by setting the falling period of the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 by the integrating circuit 281. Can be operated normally, and the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt can be limited to about 10 ms. As a result, the period during which the current is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 can be limited to about 10 ms, and the output period of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be reduced to about 10 ms. Can be fastened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the terminal plate output for the inner frame changes according to the continuity cutoff state of the switch SW3-1 (open / closed state of the inner frame 12) regardless of the power on / off state of the pachinko machine 500. TRG terminal voltage of timer IC1 of circuit 290a, OUT terminal voltage of timer IC1 of inner frame output circuit 290a, output of external output terminal board 291 for inner frame (input of hall computer 262), pachinko machine 500 The relationship with the output of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, which changes according to the continuity cutoff state (open / closed state of the inner frame 12) of the switch SW3-2 when the power supply of the switch SW3-2 is turned on, will be described. FIG. 26 shows an on / off state of the power supply of the pachinko machine 500 (a state of the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1), a conduction cut state of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 (a state of opening and closing the inner frame 12). The TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a, and the output of the inner frame external output terminal board 291 (input of the hall computer 262). ) And the output of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, which is a timing chart showing the relationship.

As described above, the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a provided in the front frame open detection circuit 292 differs from the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a in that the connected switch is from the switch SW3-1. Only the switch SW4-1 has been changed, and the other parts have the same configuration as the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. Therefore, the operation of the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a is the same as the operation of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a. Further, the input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame differs from the input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame only in the place where the connected switch is changed from the switch SW3-2 to the switch SW4-2. Others have the same configuration as the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Therefore, the operation of the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b is the same as the operation of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Further, since the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame has the same configuration as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, the operation of the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame is the same as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame. Is. Therefore, the description of the operation of the front frame terminal board output circuit 292a, the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b, and the front frame external output terminal board 293 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the power supply of the pachinko machine 500 is on until t11 o'clock (the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is 12 volts until t11 o'clock), and after t11 o'clock, the pachinko machine is in a 12-volt state. The power supply of the machine 500 is turned off (the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 becomes zero volt). Therefore, until t11 o'clock, the power from the DC power supply DC1 is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Then, after t11 o'clock, the supply of electric power by the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is stopped. However, since the capacitor CD1 is provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a, power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a after t11 o'clock. Therefore, even after t11 o'clock, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is in an operable state.

As shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t9, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the timer The TRG terminal voltage of IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (at 9 o'clock). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 26D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at 9 o'clock). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame are conductive, and the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is connected (see FIG. 25). The current supply is started (at 9 o'clock). Then, as shown in FIG. 26E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is high from the low state at t9. Switch to the state. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 to the hall computer 262 is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t9, DC is applied to the resistors R11 and R12 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. The power from the power supply DC1 is supplied, and the voltage applied to the resistor R12 becomes 5 volts (at 9 o'clock). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), a signal having a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (at t9).

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), when about 2 ms elapses from t9, charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t9 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t9, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 26 (d). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 26 (e) when about 10 ms elapses from t9 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t10, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a detects the inner frame 12 again. Is set to the possible state. Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-2 is in the cutoff state (the inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t10, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is connected to the resistors R11 and R12. The power supply from the DC power supply DC1 is stopped, and the voltage applied to the resistor R12 becomes zero volt (at t10). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the DC voltage 5 volt signal output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is stopped at t10 (inner frame input). Output port The output from the output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 becomes zero volt at t10).

As shown in FIG. 26A, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off after t11 (when the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 becomes zero volt), the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a and the inner frame The supply of power by the DC power supply DC1 to the input / output port output circuit 290b is stopped. However, even when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is off, the power from the capacitor CD1 is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t12, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 26 (c). , The TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (at 12 o'clock). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 26D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at 12 o'clock). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame are made conductive, and the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is connected (see FIG. 25). The current supply is started (at 12:00). Then, as shown in FIG. 26E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is high from the low state at t12. Switch to the state. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 to the hall computer 262 is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26B, even if the switch SW3-2 is in a conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t12, the resistors R11 and R12 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b Since the power from the DC power supply DC1 is not supplied to the resistor (since the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is zero volt), the voltage applied to the resistor R12 is zero volt (at t12). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the signal output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 maintains the stopped state (input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b). The output to output port 205 maintains zero volt).

The electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a between t9 and t10 is instantaneously completed to be discharged at t12 via the Zener diode D3 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. .. The discharge period of the capacitor CD7 is a period much smaller than about 2 ms, when the voltage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 changes from about 10.3 volts to zero volts and becomes about 10.3 volts again, so that the TRG of the timer IC1 It does not significantly affect the voltage applied to the terminals. Further, in addition to this discharge, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 from t9 to t10 is also discharged by the self-discharge of the capacitor CD7.

Further, at t12, the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a stores a voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 and the capacitor CD7 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a. A voltage of about 10.3 volts associated with the applied charge can be superimposed to apply an overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1. However, since the Zener diode D3 having a limiting voltage (Zener voltage) of about 10.5 volts is connected to the front stage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, the maximum value of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is An overvoltage of about 10.5 volts, which is large enough to destroy the timer IC1, is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), when about 2 ms elapses from t12 o'clock, the charging of the capacitor CD7 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 starts from zero volt again. Return to about 10.3 volts. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t12 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t12, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 26 (d). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 26 (e) when about 10 ms elapses from t12 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t13, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a detects the inner frame 12 again. Is set to the possible state. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-2 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t13, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is used to power the pachinko machine 500. Is set so that the inner frame 12 can be detected when is turned on.

As described above, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 (until t11 o'clock), the inner frame 12 is opened and the inner frame is opened. When the switch SW3-1 provided in the terminal plate output circuit 290a is conductive, the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame outputs a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame to the hall computer 262. To do. Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b becomes conductive, a 5-volt signal is transmitted from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205. Is entered.

Further, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off (even after t11 o'clock), the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a Since power is supplied from the capacitor CD1, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is subjected to. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame to the hall computer 262. However, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off (in the case after t11 o'clock), the DC voltage of the DC power supply DC1 to 12 V is the inner frame. Since it is not supplied to the input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame, even if the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 provided in the input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame conducts, the input / output for the inner frame No signal is output from the port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (the DC voltage output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt).

As described above, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500, the function of outputting a signal to the input / output port 205 and the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262, In addition, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 is added to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290, which is one circuit. Can be demonstrated in.

When the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state), the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame is in the conductive period of the switch SW3-1 (inner frame 12). Regardless of the opening period), when the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volt to zero volt, about 10 ms elapses, the timer IC1 The voltage of the OUT terminal of is switched from about 9.6 volts to zero volts. As a result, the supply period of the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is about 10 ms.

Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC power supply DC1 to 12 volt DC voltage is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. Is not supplied, that is, when a DC voltage of about 10.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1. The supply period of the supplied current can be limited to about 10 ms per opening of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 can be suppressed to a small value.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 and 28, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, each control process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is the main process among the control processes executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment ( (See FIG. 12) and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) are changed, and the other control processes are the same as the control processes executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Is. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the main process shown in FIG. 27 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 28 will be described, and the description of other control processes will be omitted. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28) will be described first, and then the main process (FIG. 27) will be described.

The timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. The timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 28 is the timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. A process for setting the inner frame opening flag 203a and the front frame opening flag 203b to be turned on or off (processes S506 to S513) is added between the processes of S501 and S502 (see FIG. 15). Therefore, in FIG. 15, the same parts as the timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above are assigned the same number, the description thereof is omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the output reading process of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is executed (S506). That is, the voltage value of the signal output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the output (signal) of the read inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is 5 volts (S507). If the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame is 5 volts (S507: Yes), the inner frame 12 is open, so the inner frame open flag 203a is turned on (S508). .. On the other hand, if the output (signal) of the read inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is zero volt (S507: No), the inner frame 12 is closed, so the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off (S509). ).

After the processing of S508 or S509, the output reading processing of the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b is executed (S510). That is, the voltage value of the signal output from the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b to the input / output port 205 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is 5 volts (S511). If the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is 5 volts (S511: Yes), the front frame 14 is open, so the front frame open flag 203b is turned on (S512). .. On the other hand, if the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is zero volt (S511: No), the front frame 14 is closed, so the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off (S513). ). After the processing of S512 or S513, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502).

In this way, if the output (signal) of the read inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is 5 volts, the main control device 110 turns on the inner frame open flag 203a because the inner frame 12 is open. To. On the other hand, if the output (signal) of the read inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is zero volt, the inner frame 12 is closed, so the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off. Further, if the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is 5 volts, the main control device 110 turns on the front frame open flag 203b because the front frame 14 is open. .. On the other hand, if the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is zero volt, the front frame 14 is closed, so the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 and S215 to S220 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

The main process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 27 is the main process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 12). ), A process of transmitting either an inner frame opening command or an inner frame closing command, or a front frame opening command or a front frame closing command to the voice lamp control device 113 (S215 to S202) between the processes of S201 and S202. (Processing of S220) is added. Therefore, in FIG. 12, the same parts as the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above are assigned the same numbers, the description thereof is omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the main process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the output data such as the command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. After executing the process (S201), it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening flag 203a is on (S215). If the inner frame opening flag 203a is on (S215: Yes), that is, if the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S216). On the other hand, if the inner frame opening flag 203a is off (S215: No), that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame closing command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S217). After the processing of S216 or S217, it is determined whether or not the front frame opening flag 203b is on (S218). If the front frame opening flag 203b is on (S218: Yes), that is, if the front frame 14 is open, a front frame opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S219). On the other hand, if the front frame opening flag 203b is off (S218: No), that is, if the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame closing command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S220). After the processing of S219 or S220, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202).

As described above, if the inner frame opening flag 203a is on, that is, the inner frame 12 is opened, the main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the inner frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the inner frame opening flag 203a is off, that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame closing command is repeatedly transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, if the front frame opening flag 203b is on, that is, the front frame 14 is opened, the main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the front frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the front frame opening flag 203b is off, that is, if the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame closing command is repeatedly transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

The command transmission of the main control device 110 may be as follows. For example, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on, the main control device 110 transmits the inner frame opening command once to the voice lamp control device 113, and the inner frame 12 is closed. Then, when the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off, the inner frame closing command may be transmitted once to the voice lamp control device 113. Similarly, when the front frame 14 is opened and the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on, the main control device 110 transmits the front frame opening command once to the voice lamp control device 113, and the front frame 14 is closed. Then, when the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off, the front frame closing command may be transmitted once to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the processing performed by the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and this start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S816 (see FIG. 30) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S812 in FIG. 30), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S816. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S815 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S702: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S816. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S703).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S703: Yes), the process proceeds to S704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S703: No), the process proceeds to S708.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S816 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S703: No), and the data shifts to S708.

If the power off processing flag is on (S702: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S816, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S704). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S706). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S705: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S708, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S708). Since the power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S816 is executed (see S815 of FIG. 30), the power-off flag is turned on by the process of S815 as described later with reference to FIG. 30. That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S816 is executed, the process of S708 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power failure process of S816 is started without completing the execution after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (S708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S710), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S711) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S708 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S708 is performed via the processes of S704 to S706. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S708: No), S709, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S710, the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S710), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S711), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S709 is that when the processing of S708 is reached via the processing of S704 to S706, the processing of S704 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started (S801), and if 1 ms or more has not passed (S801: No), the processes of S802 to S809 are executed. The process proceeds to S810 without performing. In the process of S801, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S802 to S809 determines whether or not 1 ms has passed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas each of S810 This is because it is preferable to execute the counter update process and the command reception process of S811 in a short cycle. As a result, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110.

If 1 ms or more has passed in the process of S801 (S801: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of S807 described later (S801: Yes). S802), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S803). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S804 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S804, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S805). In the customer waiting effect, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 500 is not played by the player, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 85 according to the operation hold ball N is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S806). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. It may be changed to a production that can be held, or may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S806 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S807), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S808). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After that, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S809), and the process proceeds to the process of S810. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110. The effect time of the lamp editing process of S807 and the sound editing / output process of S808 is set based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process.

In the process of S810, the variable display process of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. In this fluctuation display processing, a plurality of counters (counter for setting the stop symbol at the time of big hit, counter for selecting the stop symbol at the time of disconnection, etc.) mounted on the voice lamp control device 113 are updated, and the value and main of the counter are updated. Based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command transmitted from the control device 110, the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be set, and the fluctuation display pattern (reach other than front-back deviation, reach other than front-rear deviation, complete deviation). Etc. are set. The stop symbol and the fluctuation pattern are transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

In the process of S810, for example, when the command of the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main controller 110 is "complete deviation", the complete deviation A pattern is selected from the plurality of patterns corresponding to the complete deviation, and the third symbol display. A command is transmitted to the display control device 110 so that the device 81 completely disengages and produces the A pattern. Therefore, with respect to the fluctuation pattern of 1 determined by the main control device 110, the detailed fluctuation pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the control of the main control device 110 The burden can be reduced. Further, since the pattern of each effect determined by the main control device 110 can be reduced, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

Then, the command from the main control device 110 is received (S811). When a command from the main control device 110 is received, if it is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113 in response to the command, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 233, and the command is used by the display control device 114. If it is a command, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the processing of S811 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S812). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S812 (S812: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S815), and the power-off process is executed (S816). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S817), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S812 (S812: No), either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be opened, or both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be opened. If there is, the door opening notification process (S813) for notifying is executed using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227.

Here, the door opening notification process will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a door opening notification process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This door opening notification process determines whether or not the voice lamp control device 113 has received four commands, an inner frame opening command, a front frame opening command, an inner frame closing command, or a front frame closing command, and responds to the determination. It is a process to execute the notification.

In the door opening notification process, first, in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening command indicating that the inner frame 12 is open is received (S901). When the inner frame opening command is received (S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is on (S902). If the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is not turned on (S902: No), the inner frame opening notification processing, which is the processing of S905 described later, has not been started yet. Therefore, in order to start this inner frame opening notification processing, S903 Move to the subsequent processing. First, the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned on to indicate that the inner frame opening command has been received (S903), and the inner frame opening command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S904). Then, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are used to start the inner frame opening notification process for notifying that the inner frame 12 is open (S905). In this inner frame opening notification process, for example, the voice output device 226 is used to notify by an electronic sound that "the inner frame is open", or the lamp display device 227 is used to open the inner frame 12. For example, blinking is executed four times per second to indicate. As a result, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of persons that the inner frame 12 has been opened.

The main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the inner frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113 during the period when the inner frame 12 is open. Therefore, if the inner frame open command has already been received and the inner frame open command has been received again when the processes of S903 to S905 have been executed (S901: Yes), the inner frame open command reception flag 223a Is determined to be on (S902: Yes), and the already started inner frame opening notification process (S905) is continuously executed (S906). As a result, the inner frame opening notification process (S905) is continuously executed during the period when the inner frame 12 is open. If the inner frame opening command is not received in the processing of S811 (S901: No), the processing of S903 to S906 is skipped.

Next, in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not a front frame opening command indicating that the front frame 14 is open has been received (S907). When the front frame opening command is received (S907: Yes), it is determined whether or not the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is on (S908). If the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is not turned on (S908: No), the front frame opening notification process, which is the process of S911 described later, has not been started yet. Therefore, in order to start this front frame opening notification process, S909 Move to the subsequent processing. First, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned on to indicate that the front frame opening command has been received (S909), and the front frame opening command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S910). Then, the front frame opening notification process for notifying that the front frame 14 is open is started by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 (S911). In this front frame opening notification process, for example, the voice output device 226 is used to notify by an electronic sound that "the front frame is open", or the lamp display device 227 is used to open the front frame 14. For example, blinking once per second is performed to indicate. As a result, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of persons that the front frame 14 has been opened.

The main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the front frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113 during the period when the front frame 14 is open. Therefore, if the front frame open command has already been received and the front frame open command has been received again when the processes of S909 to S911 have been executed (S907: Yes), the front frame open command reception flag 223b Is determined to be on (S908: Yes), and the front frame opening notification process (S911) that has already been started is continuously executed (S912). As a result, the front frame opening notification process (S911) is continuously executed during the period when the front frame 14 is open. If the front frame opening command is not received in the processing of S811 (S907: No), the processing of S909 to S912 is skipped.

Next, in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not the inner frame closing command indicating that the inner frame 12 is closed has been received (S913). When the inner frame closing command is received (S913: Yes), it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is on (S914). If the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is on (S914: Yes), the inner frame opening notification process (S905) is started, but the processing for ending the inner frame opening notification process (S917) described later is still executed. Since this has not been done, the process shifts to the process of S915 or later in order to execute the process of terminating the inner frame opening notification process. First, the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned off to indicate that the inner frame closing command has been received (S915), and the inner frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S916). Then, the inner frame opening notification process executed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is terminated (S917). As a result, it is possible to end the notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12, which has been performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227.

The main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the inner frame closing command to the voice lamp control device 113 during the period when the inner frame 12 is closed. Therefore, if the inner frame closing command has already been received and the inner frame closing command has been received again when the processes of S915 to S917 have been executed (S913: Yes), the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a Is determined to be off (S914: No), and the processing of S915 to S917 is skipped. Further, even when the inner frame closing command is not received in the processing of S811 (S913: No), the processing of S915 to S917 is skipped.

Next, in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not a front frame closing command indicating that the front frame 14 is closed has been received (S918). When the front frame closing command is received (S918: Yes), it is determined whether or not the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is on (S919). If the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is on (S919: Yes), the front frame opening notification process (S911) has been started, but the process of ending the front frame opening notification process (S922), which will be described later, is still executed. Since this has not been done, the process proceeds to S920 or later in order to execute the process of terminating the front frame opening notification process. First, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned off to indicate that the front frame closing command has been received (S920), and the front frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S921). Then, the front frame opening notification process executed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is terminated (S922). As a result, the notification indicating the opening of the front frame 14 that has been performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 can be terminated.

The main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the front frame closing command to the voice lamp control device 113 during the period when the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, if the front frame closing command has already been received and the front frame closing command has been received again when the processes of S920 to S922 have been executed (S918: Yes), the front frame opening command reception flag 223a Is determined to be off (S919: No), and the processing of S920 to S922 is skipped. Further, even when the front frame closing command is not received in the processing of S811 (S918: No), the processing of S920 to S922 is skipped.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the inner frame opening command in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a indicates that the inner frame opening command has been received. It is turned on (S903), the inner frame opening command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S904), and the inner frame opening notification process is started (S905). Since this inner frame opening notification process (S905) is continuously performed until the inner frame 12 is closed, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the inner frame 12 is being opened. Similarly, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the front frame opening command in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned on to indicate that the front frame opening command has been received. (S909), the front frame opening command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S910), and the front frame opening notification process is started (S911). Since this front frame opening notification process (S911) is continuously performed until the front frame 14 is closed, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the front frame 14 is being opened.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the inner frame closing command in the processing of S811 (see FIG. 30) and the inner frame opening notification processing (S905) has already been performed, the inner frame opening command receiving flag The 223a is turned off to indicate that the inner frame closing command has been received (S915), the inner frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S916), and the inner frame opening notification process is terminated (S917). Similarly, when the front frame closing command is received in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30) and the front frame opening notification process (S911) has already been performed, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is set to close the front frame. The command is turned off (S920) to indicate that the command has been received, the front frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S921), and the front frame opening notification process is terminated (S922).

Returning to the description of FIG. After executing the door opening notification process (S813), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S814) based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223, and if the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S814: No), S801 Return to the process and repeat the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S814: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall and ask for the repair of the pachinko machine 500. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the processing performed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. For convenience of explanation, the external interrupt process of FIG. 33 will be described first, and then the main process of FIG. 32 will be described.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the external interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the external interrupt processing is executed, the command received by the processing of S1101 to S1106 is determined. If the received command is an effect permission command (S1101: Yes), the effect permission flag 233a of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1108) to end the external interrupt processing. If the received command is a variation pattern command (S1101: No, S1102: Yes), the variation start flag 233b of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1109) to end the external interrupt processing.

Next, if the received command is an inner frame opening command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: Yes), the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c of the work RAM 233 and the inner frame opening command have been received. When the indicator is turned on (S1110), the display of "the inner frame is open" is started on the third symbol display device 81 (S1111). After that, the external interrupt processing is terminated. By starting the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the inner frame 12 is open. The characters "the inner frame is open" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed so as to overlap with the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the characters "inner frame is open" are described later because the inner frame 12 is closed, that is, the display inner frame open command reception flag 233c is turned off during the period when the inner frame 12 is open. It is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the processing of S1115 is performed.

Next, if the received command is a front frame open command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: No, S1104: Yes), the front frame open command reception flag 233d for displaying the work RAM 233 is set to the front frame open command. It is turned on to indicate that it has been received (S1112), and the display of "the front frame is open" is started on the third symbol display device 81 (S1113). After that, the external interrupt processing is terminated. By starting the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the front frame 14 is open. The characters "the front frame is open" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed so as to overlap with the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the characters "the front frame is open" means that the front frame 14 is closed, that is, the display front frame open command reception flag 233d is turned off during the period when the front frame 14 is open, which will be described later. It is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the processing of S1117 is performed.

Next, if the received command is an inner frame closing command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: No, S1104: No, S1105: Yes), the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c of the work RAM 233 is set. It is turned off to indicate that the inner frame closing command has been received (S1114), and the display of "the inner frame is open" of the third symbol display device 81 is erased (S1115). After that, the external interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, if the received command is a front frame closing command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: No, S1104: No, S1105: No, S1106: Yes), the front frame opening command for display of the work RAM 233 is received. The flag 233d is turned off to indicate that the front frame closing command has been received (S1116), and the display of "the front frame is open" of the third symbol display device 81 is erased (S1117). After that, the external interrupt processing is terminated.

Finally, if the received command is neither a production permission command, a variation pattern command, an inner frame opening command, a front frame opening command, an inner frame closing command, or a front frame closing command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: No, S1104: No, S1105: No, S1106: No), and other processes corresponding to the received commands are executed (S1107), and the external interrupt process is terminated. For example, if the received command is a stop command, the process of stopping the fluctuation performed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

As described above, when the display control device 114 receives the inner frame opening command, the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1110) to indicate that the inner frame opening command has been received. 3 The symbol display device 81 starts displaying "the inner frame is open" (S1111). By starting the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the inner frame 12 is open. Similarly, when the display control device 114 receives the front frame opening command, the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d of the work RAM 233 is turned on to indicate that the front frame opening command has been received (S1112), and the third The symbol display device 81 starts displaying "The front frame is open" (S1113). By starting the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the front frame 14 is open.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the inner frame closing command when the display "inner frame is open" is started on the third symbol display device 81, the display inner frame opening command of the work RAM 233 is received. The reception flag 233c is turned off to indicate that the inner frame closing command has been received (S1114), and the display of "the inner frame is open" of the third symbol display device 81 is erased (S1115). Similarly, when the display control device 114 receives the front frame closing command when the display "front frame is open" is started on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 opens the display front frame of the work RAM 233. The command reception flag 233d is turned off to indicate that the front frame closing command has been received (S1116), and the display of "the front frame is open" of the third symbol display device 81 is erased (S1117).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main process executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and this main process is started when the power is turned on. First, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1001). Specifically, the process of initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. After that, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read (S1002), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 (S1003). Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 storing the character information decompressed by the process of S1003. The extracted character information is written in the inner area (S1004).

Next, it is determined whether or not the effect permission flag 233a is turned on in order to determine whether or not the effect permission command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1005), and the effect permission flag 233a is not turned on. (S1005: No), the process after S1006 is waited until the effect permission command is transmitted from the main control device 110, that is, until the effect permission flag 233a is turned on.

As a result of the determination in S1005, if the effect permission flag 233a is turned on (S1005: Yes), the character information extracted in the process of S1004 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the process proceeds to the process after S1006.

In the process of S1006, it is determined whether or not the display executed by the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit (S1006), and if it is not a big hit (S1006: No), the third symbol display device 81 It is determined whether or not the variation start flag 233b for permitting the start of the variation display is turned on (S1007). As a result, if the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned on (S1007: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off (S1008), and the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (S1009). Here, in the process of S1008, the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off because in the pachinko machine 500 of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned on, the fluctuation display is started on the third symbol display device 81. (S1007: Yes to S1009), unless the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off, the fluctuation start processing (S1009) is repeatedly executed, and the normal processing is not executed.

On the other hand, as a result of determination in the process of S1007, when the variation start flag 233b is off (S1007: No), or when the variation is started in the process of S1009, the variation effect processing is performed (S1010). In the variation effect processing, when the variation display is continuously performed, the character information and the effect pattern information are updated and set (new extraction of the character information from the video RAM 234 and the extracted character information to the video RAM 234). If the variable display is not performed, the process proceeds to the process of S1011 without performing any particular process. Here, in the process of S1011, in order to execute the process (S1006 to S1010) of performing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 ms, whether or not 20 ms or more has passed since the process of S1006 was started is determined. Confirmation (S1011), if not, wait until 20 ms or more elapses (S1011: No), and if 20 ms or more elapses (S1011: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S1006.

Further, as a result of the processing of S1006, if the jackpot is in progress (S1006: Yes), the jackpot effect processing is executed (S1012). In the jackpot production process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of prize balls is updated, and the background image, etc., which is different for each round, is updated (new extraction of character information from video RAM 234 and video RAM 234 of extracted character information). Write to). After the jackpot effect processing (S1012) is completed, the processing shifts to the processing of S1011.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b of the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 290 supplies power to the pachinko machine 500. When a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the switch SW3-2 conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts is output to the input / output port 205. When this signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 transmits an inner frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113, and uses the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to display the inner frame 12 of the inner frame 12. Notify the opening. Further, the pachinko machine 500 transmits an inner frame opening command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to clearly notify an unspecified number of persons that the inner frame 12 is open.

Similarly, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b of the front frame open detection circuit 292 is supplied with power to the pachinko machine 500 from the DC power supply DC1. When a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied and the switch SW4-2 conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14, a signal of a DC voltage of 5 volts is output to the input / output port 205. When this signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 transmits a front frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113, and uses the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to display the front frame 14 of the front frame 14. Notify the opening. Further, the pachinko machine 500 transmits a front frame opening command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a message indicating the opening of the front frame 14 on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to clearly notify an unspecified number of persons that the front frame 14 is open.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 is in addition to the case where a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. For example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 (the main control device 110 is stopped). When the switch SW3-1 conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262. The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the inner frame 12 Opening can be detected.

Similarly, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a of the front frame opening detection circuit 292 is supplied with a DC voltage of 12 volts from the DC power supply DC1. In addition, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 (the main control device 110 is stopped). When the switch SW4-1 conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14, a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 to the hall computer 262. .. The pulse signal output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the front frame 14 Opening can be detected.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened while the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is being performed, the function of outputting the pulse signal to the hall computer 262 and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 are cut off. When the inner frame 12 is opened while the inner frame 12 is being operated, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 can be exhibited by the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a, which is one circuit.

Further, when the front frame 14 is opened while the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is being performed, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 are cut off. The function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 when the front frame 14 is opened can be exhibited by the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a, which is one circuit.

The hall computer 262 has been operated for 24 hours. Therefore, in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a, the pulse signal is output from the inner frame external output terminal board 291 and the time when the pulse signal is output, that is, the opening time of the inner frame 12 is also the hall computer. It can be stored in 262. Similarly, in the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a, the pulse signal is output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293, and the time when the pulse signal is output, that is, the opening time of the front frame 14 is also holed. It can be stored in the computer 262.

In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 500 separately notifies the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the pachinko machine 500 uses the third symbol display device 81 to separately display the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 may be performed in the same notification mode and display mode. Specifically, the notification performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 may be the same when the inner frame 12 is opened and when the front frame 14 is opened. Similarly, the display performed by using the third symbol display device 81 may be the same when the inner frame 12 is opened and when the front frame 14 is opened. In this case, when either one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, or both of them are opened, "the door is open" may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened, the pachinko machine 500 uses the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to notify the pachinko machine 500 and the third The display was performed using the symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and either notification using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 or display using the third symbol display device 81 may be performed.

Next, the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. The pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has three switches SW3, SW3-1, SW3-2, and SW3-3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment. The switch SW3A with a built-in switch is changed, and the switch SW4 connected to the front frame opening detection circuit 292 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the switch SW4-1, SW4-2, SW4-3-3. After changing to the switch SW4A with two built-in switches, the Zener diode D3 used in the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the front frame opening detection circuit 292 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is removed. (The Zener diode D3 may not be removed and may be connected as it is in the same manner as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the front frame opening detection circuit 292). In the future, the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment with the above-mentioned changes to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 will be referred to as the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment. The front frame opening detection circuit 292 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is modified as described above, and the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment is referred to as the front frame opening detection circuit 302. Therefore, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has been changed as described above, and the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a. The inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b of the pachinko machine 500 of the embodiment is modified as described above, and the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment is referred to as an inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. Similarly, the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment. The front frame input / output port output circuit 292b of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the front frame input / output port output circuit 302b of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is opened, it is stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrating circuit 281 of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a). When the inner frame 12 is closed, the charged charge is instantaneously discharged to the ground via the switch SW3-3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a). can do. Similarly, when the front frame 14 is opened, the front frame 14 is closed with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrating circuit 281 of the front frame opening detection circuit 302 (front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a). In this case, the electric charge can be instantaneously discharged to the ground via the switch SW4-3 connected to the front frame opening detection circuit 302 (front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a).

In this way, by the time the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened again, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrator circuit 281 is always zero, so that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. Even if the integrator circuit 281 is opened a plurality of times in succession in a short period of time, the integrator circuit 281 operates normally, and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is applied regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. The falling period of is set to a fixed period (about 2 ms).

Further, according to the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, as described above, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrating circuit 281 of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is charged. When the inner frame 12 is closed, it is discharged to the ground via the switch SW3-3 and stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrating circuit 281 of the front frame open detection circuit 302 (front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a). The electric charge is discharged to the ground via the switch SW4-3 when the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, unlike the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened again and the switch SW3-1 or the switch SW4-1 is conducted, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is charged. An overvoltage (for example, a voltage of 12.3 volts) that is superimposed on the voltage supplied from the capacitor CD1 and destroys the timer IC1 is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for the Zener diode D3 that prevents an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC 1 from being applied.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 When any of the above is opened, the pachinko machine 600 is used to separately notify whether the inner frame 12 has been opened, the front frame 14 has been opened, or both have been opened. be able to. Further, according to the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the case where the DC voltage of DC power supply DC1 to 12V is supplied, the DC power supply DC1 to 12V Even when the DC voltage of the above is not supplied, when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the pulse signals can be output separately to the hall computer 262. Therefore, from the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, it is possible to identify whether the inner frame 12 has been opened, the front frame 14 has been opened, or both have been opened.

In the description of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, the same parts as the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment are designated by the same numbers, the description thereof is omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

With reference to FIG. 34, the structures of the switch SW3A connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 and the switch SW4A connected to the front frame opening detection circuit 302 will be described. The switch SW3A is a switch SW3 containing the switches SW3-1 and SW3-2 with the switch SW3-3 added, and has the same structure as the switch SW3. Similarly, the switch SW4A is a switch SW4 containing the switches SW4-1 and SW4-2 with the switch SW4-3 added, and has the same structure as the switch SW4. Therefore, in the switch SW3A and the switch SW4A, the same parts as the switch SW3 and the switch SW4 are assigned the same numbers and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described. Further, since the switch SW3A and the switch SW4A have the same structure, the structure of the switch SW3A will be described, and the description of the switch SW4A will be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the switch SW3A. FIG. 34A is a cross-sectional view showing a state (blocking state) of the switch SW3A in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed. Further, FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view showing a state of the switch SW3A in a state where the inner frame 12 is in the middle of opening or closing. Further, FIG. 34 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state (conduction state) of the switch SW3A in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the switch SW3A connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 is provided with the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-3 which operates in the reverse manner to the switch SW3-2. There is. The switch SW3-3 faces a conductor plate SW3-3a made of metal, which is a conductive member arranged on the movable shaft SW3a that comes into contact with the inner frame 12 in a closed state, and the conductor plate SW3-3a. A pair of terminal plates SW3-3b made of metal arranged at positions, a support plate SW3-3c for arranging the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b on the housing SW3b, and a conductor plate SW3-3a. A pair of springs SW3ca are provided on a surface facing the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b and are provided with respect to the conductor plate SW3-3a to generate an urging force in the direction opposite to the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b. ing. As described above, the switch SW3 has three built-in switches, a switch SW3-1, a switch SW3-2, and a switch SW3-3.

As shown in FIG. 34A, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the movable shaft SW3a comes into contact with the inner frame 12, and the movable shaft SW3a is pushed into the housing SW3b. Therefore, the contact between the conductor plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b is hindered, and the contact between the conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b is hindered. On the other hand, the conductor plate SW3-3a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b come into contact with each other. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the continuity of both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 is cut off, while the switch SW3-3 is in a conductive state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the inner frame 12 is in the process of opening or closing, the movable shaft SW3a is released from contact with the inner frame 12, so that a pair of springs SW3ca are attached. By force, the conductor plate SW3-1a comes into contact with the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b, the conductor plate SW3-2a comes into contact with the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b, and the conductor plate SW3-3a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b. Any contact with is hindered. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the middle of opening or closing, the continuity of the switch SW3-1, the switch SW3-2, and the switch SW3-3 is cut off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the state where the inner frame 12 is opened, the conductor plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b come into contact with each other due to the urging force of the pair of springs SW3ca. , The conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b come into contact with each other. On the other hand, contact between the conductor plate SW3-3a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b is hindered. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened, both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state, while the switch SW3-3 is in a state in which the conduction is cut off.

As described above, both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 built in the housing SW3b are in a cutoff state when the inner frame 12 is closed, while are in a conductive state when the inner frame 12 is open. It becomes. On the other hand, the switch SW3-3 built in the housing SW3b operates in the opposite manner to the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2, and becomes conductive when the inner frame 12 is closed, while the inner frame becomes conductive. When 12 is opened, it is in a cutoff state. That is, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 have a structure in which the conduction state and the cutoff state operate in conjunction with each other, and the switch SW3-3 is in a state opposite to the state of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2. It has a structure that performs the above operation. However, the structure of the switch SW3A is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 34, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a cutoff state, and the switch SW3-3 is in a cutoff state. On the other hand, in the state where the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 may be in the conductive state, and the switch SW3-3 may be in the cutoff state. This also applies to the structure of the switch SW4A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 300 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. The inner frame opening detection circuit 300 of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment switches the switch SW3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment to the switch SW3-1. , SW3-2, SW3-3 was changed to the switch SW3A with a built-in switch, and the Zener diode D3 used in the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment was removed. It is a thing. The inner frame opening detection circuit 300 has the same configuration as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 described above in FIG. 25, except for the above changes. Further, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same structure as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, regarding the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291, the same parts as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 described above in FIG. 25 The same number will be assigned and the description will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

Further, the front frame opening detection circuit 302 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment is different from the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 300 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment in that it is connected. Only the switch to be switched is changed from the switch SW3A to the switch SW4A, and other than that, the configuration is the same as that of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300. Further, the front frame external output terminal plate 293 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment. That is, it has the same structure as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment described in FIG. 25. Therefore, the description of the front frame open detection circuit 302 and the front frame external output terminal plate 293 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the switch SW3-3 provided on the switch SW3A (see FIG. 34), one end of the switch SW3-3 (one end of the terminal plate 3-3b) is the other end of the switch SW3-1 (see FIG. 34). The other end of the switch SW3-3 (the other end of the terminal plate 3-3b) is grounded while being connected to the other end of the terminal plate 3-2b) and the capacitor CD7. As described above, the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the switch SW3-3 added to the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment. Become. The inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment.

As described above, the switch SW3-3 used in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a operates in a state opposite to that of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW3-3 is conducted and one end of the capacitor CD7 is grounded, while the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are cut off. Become.

Then, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, due to the structure of the switch SW3A, first, the switch SW3-3 is in the cutoff state, and then the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the conductive state (FIG. FIG. 34 (a) → FIG. 34 (b) → see FIG. 34 (c)). In this way, when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state, first, one end of the capacitor CD7 is cut off from the ground by the switch SW3-3, and then the power from the capacitor CD1 is transferred to the switch SW3-1. It is supplied to the capacitor CD7 via. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the capacitor CD1 that supplies power does not short-circuit to the ground. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the electric power from the capacitor CD1 flows into the ground, and the inner frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is short-circuited and broken. Absent. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch SW3-1 is conducted, and the power of the capacitor CD1 is supplied to the capacitor CD7, the electric charge is stored in the capacitor CD7 as described above, and the stored electric charge is increased. As a result, the voltage generated in the capacitor CD7 increases. Then, due to the change in the voltage generated in the capacitor CD7, the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 can be set to a fixed period (about 2 ms). In this way, by adjusting the fall period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 by the integrating circuit 281, that is, by adjusting by the capacitor CD7 and the resistor R10, it is easy without using a complicated circuit. With a configuration and low cost, the fall period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 can be set to a fixed period.

Next, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, due to the structure of the switch SW3A, first, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the cutoff state, and then the switch SW3-3 is in the conductive state ( 34 (c)-> FIG. 34 (b)-> FIG. 34 (a)). In this way, when the inner frame 12 changes from the open state to the closed state, first, the power supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the capacitor CD7 is stopped by the switch SW3-1, and then one end of the capacitor CD7 is stopped. Ground via switch SW3-3. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the capacitor CD1 that supplies power does not short-circuit to the ground. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the electric power from the capacitor CD1 flows into the ground, and the inner frame open detection circuit 300 is not short-circuited and broken.

When the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW3-1 is cut off and the power supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the capacitor CD7 is stopped, the switch SW3-3 grounds one end of the capacitor CD7. Can be done. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 when the inner frame 12 is in the open state can be instantaneously discharged via the switch SW3-3 to be zero. .. Therefore, since the charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is always zero by the time the inner frame 12 is opened again, even if the inner frame 12 is continuously opened a plurality of times in a short period of time. The integrating circuit 281 can be operated normally, and the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 can be set to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12.

Further, as described above, the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) stores the inner frame 12 in the capacitor CD7 when the inner frame 12 is in the open state. The charged charge can be instantaneously discharged to the ground via the switch SW3-3. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 is conducted, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is superimposed on the voltage supplied from the capacitor CD1, and an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC1 ( For example, a voltage of 12.3 volts) is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a Zener diode that prevents an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC 1 from being applied.

Further, as described above, in the inner frame opening detection circuit 300, the switch SW3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the switch SW3A, and the fourth implementation is performed. The Zener diode D3 used in the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 is removed, and the configuration is the same as that of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 except for the above changes. Further, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same structure as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment.

Therefore, similarly to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 600 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened. When the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b becomes conductive, a 5-volt signal is output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205. When a 5-volt signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 600 notifies the opening of the inner frame 12 by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the pachinko machine 600 displays a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is holed from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262.

On the other hand, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off, the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, so that the inner frame 12 is opened. Even if the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b conducts, no signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 (inner frame input / output). The DC voltage input from the port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt). However, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off, the power is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a from the capacitor CD1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is connected to the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the hall computer 262.

The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, the hall computer 262 outputs the pulse signal from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, and the output time of the output pulse signal is stored to open the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine. The time can be detected.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened while the power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 600, the function of outputting a signal to the input / output port 205 and the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262, Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened while the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 is provided as a function of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300, which is one circuit. Can be demonstrated in.

Further, one end of the switch SW3-2 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is connected to the anode terminal of the DC power supply DC1 and the diode D1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned on, the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive and power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. Then, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is in the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off, power is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b, so that the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 is opened. Even so, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is in a stopped state.

On the other hand, one end of the switch SW3-1 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 via the diode D2 and the resistor R10. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned on, the switch SW3-1 conducts and power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a. , The terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame is in the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off, the power supply from the DC power supply DC1 to the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame is stopped, but the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 is conducted. Then, since power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is put into an operating state. Here, when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off and power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a, the power is supplied to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. It can be cut off by the diode D1 that exhibits the backflow prevention function. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off, the number of times the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be detected can be increased.

Further, the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame stands up when the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch SW3-1 is conducted, and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt. It functions as a monostable multivibrator that raises the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt for about 10 ms from the drop. Then, by providing the integrating circuit 281 in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 is applied regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12. The period from when the voltage drops to zero volt to when it returns to about 10.3 volt can be adjusted shorter than the period when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. In this way, the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator by setting the falling period of the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 by the integrating circuit 281. Can be operated normally, and the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt can be limited to about 10 ms. As a result, the period during which the current is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 can be limited to about 10 ms, and the output period of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be reduced to about 10 ms. Can be fastened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 (the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7) that changes according to the open / closed state of the inner frame 12 regardless of the on / off state of the power supply of the pachinko machine 600. , TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame, OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame, and output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame (of the hall computer 262). The relationship between the input) and the output of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b, which changes according to the open / closed state of the inner frame 12 when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned on, will be described. FIG. 36 shows an on / off state of the power supply of the pachinko machine 600 (a state of the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1), an open cutoff state of the inner frame 12, a continuity cutoff state of the switch SW3-3, and the switch SW3-1 and. The continuity cutoff state of the switch SW3-2, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 (charge stored in the capacitor CD7), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a, and the inner frame terminal plate output. A timing chart showing the relationship between the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the circuit 300a, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame (input of the hall computer 262), and the output of the input / output port output circuit 300b for the inner frame. is there.

As described above, the front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a provided in the front frame open detection circuit 302 differs from the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a in that the switch to be connected is the switch SW4-1. There is only a place where it is a switch SW3-1 and a place where it is a switch SW4-3 or a switch SW3-3. Therefore, since the operation of the front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a is the same as the operation of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a, the description of the operation of the front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a will be omitted. Further, the input / output port output circuit 302b for the front frame is different from the input / output port output circuit 300b for the inner frame only in that the switch to be connected is the switch SW4-2 or the switch SW3-2. is there. Therefore, since the operation of the front frame input / output port output circuit 302b is the same as the operation of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b, the description of the operation of the front frame input / output port output circuit 302b will be omitted. .. Further, as described above in FIG. 35, since the front frame external output terminal plate 293 has the same configuration as the inner frame external output terminal plate 291, the operation of the front frame external output terminal plate 293 is for the inner frame. It is the same as the external output terminal board 291. Therefore, the description of the operation of the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the power supply of the pachinko machine 600 is on until t18:00 (the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is 12 volts until t18:00), and after t18:00, the pachinko machine is in a 12-volt state. The power supply of the machine 600 is turned off (the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is zero volt). Therefore, until t18 o'clock, the power from the DC power supply DC1 is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. Then, after t18 o'clock, the supply of electric power by the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is stopped. However, since the capacitor CD1 is provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a, power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a after t18 o'clock. Therefore, even after t18:00, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is in an operable state.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state between t14:00 and t15:00, the switch SW3-3 follows this change as shown in FIG. 36 (c). It changes from the conductive state to the cutoff state (at 14:00). After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 change from the cutoff state to the conductive state (at t15). It should be noted that the switch SW3-3 is cut off at t14 and the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state at t15 due to the structure of the switch SW3A (FIGS. 34 (a) → 34 (b) → See FIG. 34 (c)).

When the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive at t15, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 starts to rise from zero volt (at t15). When the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 becomes the same as the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 10. . It falls from 3 volt to zero volt and starts to rise (at 15:00). Following this, as shown in FIG. 36 (g), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at 15:00). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame are made conductive, and the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is connected (see FIG. 35). The current supply is started (at 15:00). Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (h), the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is high from the low state at t15. Switch to the state. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 to the hall computer 262 is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state between t14:00 and t15:00 and the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive (at t15), the inner frame is turned on. Power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the resistors R11 and R12 of the output port output circuit 300b, and the voltage applied to the resistors R12 becomes 5 volts (at t15). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (i), a signal having a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 (at t15).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), when about 2 ms elapses from t15 o'clock, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 becomes about 10.3 volt. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt (about 2 ms has elapsed from t15:00). However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t15:00), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t15, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 36 (g). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the outer frame external output terminal plate 291 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 36 (h) when about 10 ms elapses from t15 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the inner frame 12 changes from the open state to the closed state between t16:00 and t17:00, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are shown in FIG. 36 (d). Goes from a conductive state to a cutoff state at t16. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the switch SW3-3 becomes conductive again (at 17:00). It should be noted that the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the cutoff state at t16 and the switch SW3-3 is in the conductive state at t17 due to the structure of the switch SW3A ((FIG. 34 (c) → FIG. 34 (b)). → See FIG. 34 (a))).

As shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-1 is in the cutoff state (at 16:00) and then the switch SW3-3 becomes conductive as shown in FIG. 36 (c) (at 17:00), the capacitor CD7 One end is grounded, and as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is instantaneously discharged between t15:00 and t16 (t17:00). As a result, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 becomes zero, and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 becomes zero volt (at 17:00). Therefore, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 can be detected again (at 17:00). Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-2 is in the cutoff state (at t16), power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the resistors R11 and the resistors R12 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. Is stopped, and the voltage applied to the resistor R12 becomes zero volt (at t16). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (i), the signal of DC voltage 5 volt output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 is stopped at t16 (inner frame input). Output port The output from the output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 becomes zero volt at t16).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off (when the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 becomes zero volt) after t18 o'clock, the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a The supply of electric power by the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is stopped. However, even when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is off, the power from the capacitor CD1 is supplied to the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state again from t17:00 when it was closed last time to, for example, from t19:00 to t20 o'clock after about 3 minutes have passed, FIG. 36 ( As shown in c), the switch SW3-3 changes from the conductive state to the cutoff state (at 19:00), and then, as shown in FIG. 36D, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 change from the cutoff state to the conductive state. (T20 o'clock), charging of the capacitor CD7 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 starts to rise from zero volt (at 20 o'clock). It should be noted that the switch SW3-3 is cut off at t19 and the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state at t20 due to the structure of the switch SW3A (FIGS. 34 (a) → 34 (b) → See FIG. 34 (c)).

As shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-1 changes from the cutoff state to the conductive state (at 20 o'clock), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 becomes the same as the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7, so that FIG. 36 As shown in (f), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 once drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts, and then starts to rise (at 20 o'clock). Following this fall, as shown in FIG. 36 (g), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at 20 o'clock). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame are made conductive, and the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is connected (see FIG. 35). The current supply is started (at 20:00). Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (h), the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is high from the low state at t20. Switch to the state. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 to the hall computer 262 is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), even if the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state again between t19:00 and t20:00 and the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive (at t20). Since the power from the DC power supply DC1 is not supplied to the resistors R11 and R12 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b (since the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is zero volt), the voltage applied to the resistor R12. Is zero volt (at 20:00). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (i), the signal output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 maintains the stopped state (input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b). The output to output port 205 maintains zero volt).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), about 2 ms after t20 o'clock, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 becomes about 10.3 volts. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt (about 2 ms has elapsed from t20:00). However, since about 10 ms have not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t20:00), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t20 o'clock, as shown in FIG. 36 (g), the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 36 (h) when about 10 ms elapses from t20 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the inner frame 12 changes from the open state to the closed state between t21:00 and t22:00, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3- 2 changes from the conductive state to the cutoff state at t21. After that, as shown in FIG. 36C, the switch SW3-3 becomes conductive again (at 22:00). The switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are cut off at t21, and the switch SW3-3 is in a conductive state at t22 due to the structure of the switch SW3A ((FIG. 34 (c) → FIG. 34 (b) → FIG. 34 (a))).

As shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-1 is in the cutoff state (at 21:00) and then the switch SW3-3 is in the conductive state (at 22:00) as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the capacitor One end of the CD7 is grounded, and as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is instantaneously discharged between t20:00 and t21:00 (t22:00). As a result, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 becomes zero, and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 becomes zero volt (at 22:00). Therefore, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 can be detected again (at t22). Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-2 is in the cutoff state (at 21:00), the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b has an inner frame when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned on. It is set to a state in which 12 can be detected (at 21:00).

As described above, the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) shuts off the switch SW3-1 when the inner frame 12 is closed (at 17:00 and t22), and the capacitor CD1 After stopping the power supplied from the capacitor CD7 to the capacitor CD7, one end of the capacitor CD7 can be grounded by the switch SW3-3. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state (at 17:00 and t22:00), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 when the inner frame 12 is in the open state (from the electric charge stored at t15:00 to t16 and t20). The charge stored at t21 o'clock) can be instantaneously discharged via the switch SW3-3 to zero (t17 o'clock and t22 o'clock). As a result, by the time the inner frame 12 is opened again, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is always zero, so that the inner frame 12 is continuously opened a plurality of times in a short period of time. However, the integrating circuit 281 operates normally, and the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 can be set to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12.

Further, in the inner frame frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a), when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state (t14:00 to t15 o'clock and t19:00 to t20:00), the switch SW3A Structurally, first, after the switch SW3-3 is in the cutoff state (t14 o'clock and t19 o'clock), the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the conductive state (t15 o'clock and t20 o'clock). In this way, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, one end of the capacitor CD7 is first cut off from the ground by the switch SW3-3 (at 14:00 and t19:00), and then from the capacitor CD1. Power is supplied to the capacitor CD7 via the switch SW3-1 (at 15:00 and t20). Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the capacitor CD1 that supplies power does not short-circuit to the ground. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the electric power from the capacitor CD1 flows into the ground, and the inner frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is short-circuited and broken. Absent.

Similarly, in the inner frame frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a), when the inner frame 12 changes from the open state to the closed state (t16:00 to t17:00 and t21:00 to t22:00), the switch SW3A First, after the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are cut off (t16 o'clock and t21 o'clock), the switch SW3-3 becomes conductive (t17 o'clock and t22 o'clock, see FIG. 34). .. In this way, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the power supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the capacitor CD7 is first stopped by the switch SW3-1 (at 16:00 and t21:00), and then. One end of the capacitor CD7 is grounded via the switch SW3-3 (at 17:00 and t22:00). Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the capacitor CD1 that supplies power does not short-circuit to the ground. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the electric power from the capacitor CD1 flows into the ground, and the inner frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is short-circuited and broken. Absent.

Further, the inner frame frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is a capacitor when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state (at 17:00 and t22) and when the inner frame 12 is in the open state. The charge stored in the CD7 (the charge stored from t15 to t16 and the charge stored from t20 to t21) can be instantaneously discharged to the ground via the switch SW3-3 (at 17:00 and t21). (t22:00). Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 is conducted (at t15 and t20), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is superimposed on the voltage supplied from the capacitor CD1, and the timer IC1 is pressed. A destructive overvoltage (eg, a voltage of 12.3 volts) is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a Zener diode that prevents an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC 1 from being applied.

Further, as described above, in the inner frame opening detection circuit 300, the switch SW3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the switch SW3A, and the fourth implementation is performed. The Zener diode D3 used in the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 is removed, and the configuration is the same as that of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 except for the above changes. Further, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same structure as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment.

Therefore, as in the case of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 600 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 (until t18:00), the inside When the frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a conducts, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a moves from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262. , Outputs a pulse signal with a pulse width of 10 ms. Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b conducts, a 5-volt signal is transmitted from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205. Is output.

Further, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off (even after t18:00), the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame may be used. Since power is supplied from the capacitor CD1, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is electrically connected, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is subjected to. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame to the hall computer 262. However, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off (in the case of after 18:00), the DC voltage of DC power supply DC1 to 12V is the inner frame. Since it is not supplied to the input / output port output circuit 300b for the inner frame, even if the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 provided in the input / output port output circuit 300b for the inner frame conducts, the input / output for the inner frame No signal is output from the port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 (the DC voltage output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt).

In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 600, the function of outputting a signal to the input / output port 205 and the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262, In addition, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off is a circuit of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300. Can be demonstrated in.

The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, the hall computer 262 outputs the pulse signal from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, and the output time of the output pulse signal is stored to open the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine. The time can be detected.

Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state, the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame is not limited to the conduction period of the switch SW3-1, that is, , Regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12, when the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive and about 10 ms elapses after the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts, the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 Switch the voltage from about 9.6 volt to zero volt. As a result, the supply period of the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is about 10 ms.

Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off, and the DC power supply DC1 to 12 volt DC is applied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. When no voltage is supplied, that is, when a DC voltage of about 10.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291, the photocoupler PR1 is supplied from the capacitor CD1. The supply period of the current supplied to the inner frame 12 can be limited to about 10 ms per opening of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 can be suppressed to a small value.

In each embodiment, the pulse signals output from the external output terminal board 261 and the external output terminal board 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal board 293 for the front frame are installed in a hall computer 262 whose installation location is different from that of the pachinko machine. Output to, but not limited to this. A dedicated storage device having the function of the hall computer 262 may be provided for each pachinko machine, and the dedicated storage device may be arranged on the back side of each pachinko machine provided with the main control device 110 or the like. In this case, better, a dedicated storage device such as the main control device 110, the payout control device 111, and the launch control device 112 is housed in the board box, and the box base and the box cover provided in the board box. And are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connection by caulking structure). Then, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box cover and the box base.

Further, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame are provided on separate substrates, but the present invention is not limited to this. The external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame may be provided on the same substrate. Even when the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame are provided on the same board, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is the frame open detection circuit 290 for the inner frame. The front frame external output terminal board 293 is connected to the front frame open detection circuit 292. Then, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame separately output a pulse signal to the hall computer 262.

Further, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 and the front frame opening detection circuit 292 that detects the opening of the front frame 14 are separately separated. However, it is not limited to this. When outputting to the hall computer 262 without distinguishing between the opening of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, the configuration may be as follows. First, the front frame opening detection circuit 292 and the front frame external output terminal plate 293 are removed, and the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 are left in the main control device 110. Then, the switch SW3 and the switch SW4 may be connected in parallel and connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290. With this configuration, it is possible to output to the hall computer 262 without distinguishing between the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14. It should be noted that what is left in the main control device 110 is not the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 but the front frame opening detection circuit 292 and the front frame external output terminal plate 293. ..

Further, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is opened, a 5-volt signal is output to the input / output port 205 by using the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. It is not limited. When the inner frame 12 is opened and a 5-volt signal is output to the input / output port 205 without using the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, the configuration may be as follows. First, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is removed from the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 (the DC power supply DC1 remains). Next, a resistor is connected in series between the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 and the ground, and the input / output port 205 is connected to the connection point between the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 and the resistor connected in series. Then, when the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are electrically connected, that is, when the inner frame 12 is opened, a resistor connected in series so that a signal of 5 volts is output to the input / output port 205. Just adjust the value. As a result, when the inner frame 12 is opened while eliminating the need for the switch SW3-2, the resistor R11 and the resistor R12, a 5-volt signal is output to the input / output port 205 and a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the hall computer. It can be output to 262. In the above description, the case where the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is unnecessary has been described, but even when the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b is unnecessary, the front frame frame open detection circuit A similar procedure may be applied to 292.

Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, the external output terminal board 261 and the external output terminal board 291 for the inner frame, the external output terminal board 293 for the front frame, and the hall computer 262 are connected to connect the external output terminal board 261. , The external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame output a pulse signal to the hall computer 262, and the hall computer 262 stores the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. It is not limited to. For example, EEPROM (Electronically Erasable and) for pachinko machines
Programmable Read Only Memory) and backup RAM are provided. Then, the external output terminal board 261 and the external output terminal board 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal board 293 for the front frame are connected to the EEPROM and the backup RAM. With this configuration, the EEPROM or backup RAM can store the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, the MPU 201 confirms the storage of the EEPROM and the backup RAM. Thereby, the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be detected by using a pachinko machine. That is, the role of the hall computer 262 can be assigned to the EEPROM or the backup RAM (the role of the "specific device" described in the claim can be assigned to the EEPROM or the backup RAM). As the backup RAM, RAM 203 may be used.

Although the present invention has been described above based on one embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred from.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. However, the command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holdings is 4 times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is different by the number of times the variable display is held, even in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is changed by the number of times of holding. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of hold times. You may.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, it may be carried out on a so-called second-class pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an arepachi or a sparrow ball.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above will be shown. In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. When the door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body and the door opening detecting means detect the opening of the door body, if it is in the initial state, the door body is operated from the initial state to the specified time. Based on the period adjusting means for outputting a signal having a predetermined output period regardless of the opening period of the door and the signal output by the period adjusting means, the detection result by the door opening detecting means is output to the specific device. The door opening detecting means initially includes the output means, the output means, and the power supply means for supplying power to the period adjusting means to operate the door opening detecting means when the closing of the door body is detected. The power supply means includes an initialization means for bringing the state to a state, and the power supply means includes an off-time operating means for supplying power to the output means and the period adjusting means to operate when the power of the game machine is turned off. A game machine A1 characterized by being a door.

According to the game machine A1, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is predetermined by the operation from the initial state to the specified time regardless of the opening time of the door body. Outputs a signal for the output period. Then, the output means outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the signal output from the period adjusting means. Here, the output period of the signal output by the period adjusting means is determined by the operation of the period adjusting means from the initial state to the specified time. In order to have the period adjusting means output a signal having a predetermined output period regardless of the opening time of the door body, the initialization means is a period adjusting means when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. To the initial state. Therefore, the period adjusting means can always operate from the initial state when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. Therefore, each time the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is normally and stably operated from the initial state to the specified time, so that the output period predetermined for the period adjusting means is obtained. The signal can be output normally and stably, and the detection result can be output normally and stably from the output means to the specific device.

Further, according to the game machine A1, in addition to the state where the power of the game machine is turned on, even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, the door opening detecting means of the door body. When the opening is detected, the power is supplied to the output means and the period adjusting means by the operating means during the off. Therefore, even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, a signal having a predetermined output period by the period adjusting means is obtained. Is output, and the output means outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the output signal. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

The space formed by the door body and the main body indicates the back surface or the back side (including the back side of the main body) of the door body that cannot be touched when the door body is closed. Further, the detection result output from the output means provided for each of the plurality of game machines may be received by one specific device, or the specific device may be provided for each game machine and the specific device may be distributed to each game machine. You may set it. When the specific device is arranged in each game machine, the box base and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected to each other and specified in the space formed by the box cover and the box base. Store the device. Then, the box cover and the box base are connected by the sealing unit so as not to be opened. Further, a sealing sticker is attached to the connecting portion between the box cover and the box base over the box cover and the box base. On top of that, the specific device may be arranged on the back surface or the back surface side of the door body.

In the game machine A1, the door opening detecting means includes a stopping means for stopping the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means when the closing of the door body is detected. A2.

According to the game machine A2, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the stopping means stops the power supply by the power supply means to the period adjusting means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be put into the initial state by the initialization means while the operation of the period adjusting means is stopped by the stopping means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be normally and stably set to the initial state.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the period adjusting means is configured by using the electric charge storage means, and the electric charge stored in the electric charge by the electric power supplied by the power supply means from the initial state to the specified time. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the voltage generated in connection with the above is output as a signal having a predetermined output period.

According to the game machine A3, when the electric power from the power source means is supplied to the electricity storage means constituting the period adjusting means from the initial state to the specified time, the electric charge is stored in the electricity storage means. The period adjusting means outputs the voltage generated by the electric charge stored in the storage means as a signal having a predetermined output period. By configuring the period adjusting means by the power storage means in this way, it is possible to output a signal having a predetermined output period with a simple configuration without making the period adjusting means a complicated circuit.

In the game machine A3, when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body, the initializing means discharges the electric charge stored in the electric storage means constituting the period adjusting means to store the electric charge. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that it includes a discharging means for initializing the means.

According to the game machine A4, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the discharging means discharges the electric charge stored in the electric charge means constituting the period adjusting means. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the electric charge stored in the power storage means is discharged by the discharging means to zero when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. can do. As a result, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means configured by the power storage means can always operate from the initial state. Therefore, each time the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is normally and stably operated from the initial state to the specified time, so that the output period predetermined for the period adjusting means is obtained. The signal can be output normally and stably, and the detection result can be output normally and stably from the output means to the specific device. As a method of discharging the power storage means, short-circuiting the power storage means to the ground is exemplified.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, the stopping means is a releasing means for releasing the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. A game machine A5 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine A5, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means is released by the releasing means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be brought to the initial state by the initializing means or the discharging means while the power supply to the period adjusting means is stopped by the releasing means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be normally and stably set to the initial state.

In the game machine A5, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the initialization means releases the short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the ground by the discharging means. The stopping means includes the discharge releasing means, and when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the stopping means stops the disconnection of the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means by the releasing means. Further, the power supply restarting means for restarting the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means is provided, and when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the power supply restarting means After the short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the ground by the discharging means is released by the discharging releasing means, the disconnection of the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means is stopped. When the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means is restarted and the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the discharging means is the electricity of the power supply means and the period adjusting means. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, after the target connection is released by the release means, the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means is short-circuited to the ground to discharge the charge stored in the power storage means.

According to the game machine A6, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the power supply restarting means first uses the short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the grant as the discharge releasing means. After the release, the power supply from the power supply means to the period adjusting means is restarted. On the other hand, when the door opening detecting means detects that the door body is closed, the discharging means first causes the disconnecting means to disconnect the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means, and then constitutes the period adjusting means. The power storage means is short-circuited to the ground to discharge the electric charge stored in the power storage means. Therefore, the power supply means and the ground are not short-circuited in both the case where the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body and the case where the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. .. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent damage to the power supply means and the like due to a short circuit between the power supply means and the ground.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, an output period limiting means for keeping one output period by the output means within a predetermined period is provided, and the off operating means is in addition to the output means and the period adjusting means. The gaming machine A7 is configured to supply electric power to the output period limiting means for operation.

According to the game machine A7, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means and the period adjusting means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door body once. Can be kept within a predetermined period to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the off-time operating means is configured to be rechargeable by electric power supplied from the power source of the game machine.

According to the game machine A8, the operating means during off is charged by the electric power supplied to the game machine while the power of the game machine is turned on, so that the power of the game machine is turned on according to the business hours of the game hall. Only the operating means can be charged while off. Therefore, if the door is opened while the power of the game machine is turned off after the game hall is closed, the output means and the period adjusting means (further, the output period limiting means) are used by the operating means during the off period. Can be operated to notify the specific device of the detection result by the door opening detection means.

In the game machine A7 or A8, the output means outputs a detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means, and the output period limiting means of the door body by the door opening detecting means. The gaming machine A9, characterized in that when an opening is detected, an output is performed to the output means during the predetermined period.

According to the game machine A9, to the output means that outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means, during the predetermined period when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, Output is performed by the output period limiting means. Therefore, the output operation to the output means by the output period limiting means can be stopped within a predetermined period for each opening of the door body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In the game machine A9, the output period limiting means stops the output to the output means when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body.

According to the game machine A10, the output of the output period limiting means to the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device is stopped when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body, the power consumed by the output operation of the output period limiting means can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In any of the game machines A7 to A10, the output period limiting means is configured by using a monostable multivibrator, and the output period of the signal output to the monostable multivibrator by the period adjusting means is the door body. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is set to a period shorter than the predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the above.

According to the game machine A11, the signal input to the output period limiting means using the monostable multivibrator is a predetermined output period by the output means regardless of the opening period of the door body by the period adjusting means. Adjusted shorter than the period. Here, the monostable multivibrator continues to output the signal unless the input period of the input signal is shorter than the output period of the output signal. Therefore, when the monostable multivibrator is used as the output period limiting means, it is input to the output period limiting means more than the output period of the output signal, that is, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means. The input period of the signal, that is, the opening period of the door body must be short. However, since it is completely unpredictable how long the opening period of the door body will be, in order to make the opening period of the door body always shorter than the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means, the predetermined period is required. It is necessary to set the setting to a sufficient period. For example, if the opening period of the door body is predicted to be from several tens of seconds to several minutes, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means is set from several minutes to several tens of minutes with sufficient margin. Must. Then, during this predetermined period, power is continuously supplied to the output period limiting means and the output means from the off operating means, so that the off operating means is significantly consumed. Therefore, in order to suppress the consumption of the operating means during off after using the monostable multivibrator as the output period limiting means, a special circuit configuration is required. However, according to the game machine A11, the period adjusting means can adjust the signal input to the output period limiting means to be shorter than the predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the door body. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the door body, the output period limiting means can be operated normally, so that one output period by the output means can be kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. As described above, according to the game machine A11, by providing the period adjusting means, the consumption of the operating means during off is suppressed, and the output period is used by using the monostable multivibrator without adopting a special circuit configuration. The limiting means can be realized.

In any of the game machines A1 to A11, the game machine A12 is characterized in that the output means is mounted on a substrate different from the control means.

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, the output means includes a photocoupler, and the detection result by the door open detection means is output to the specific device by the output of the photocoupler. Machine A13.

In any of the game machines A1 to A13, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) are configured to be operable even if the voltage is lower than the operating voltage of the control means. Characteristic gaming machine A14.

According to the game machine A14, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) are configured to be able to operate even if the voltage is lower than the operating voltage of the control means. Even if the amount of charge decreases and the output voltage of the operating means during off becomes lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) are operated to open the door body. Can be reported to a specific device. That is, it is possible to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

In any of the game machines A1 to A14, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) have an operable range voltage configured in a wider range than the operable range voltage of the control means. A game machine A15 characterized by.

According to the game machine A15, the operable range voltage of the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) is configured to be wider than the operable range voltage of the control means. Therefore, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) can be operated for a long time by the operating means during the off, so that the door body when the power of the gaming machine is turned off It is possible to detect the opening of the door for a long time.

In any of the game machines A7 to A15, the game machine A16 is characterized in that the output period limiting means is configured to include a C-MOS semiconductor.

According to the game machine A16, the output period limiting means includes a C-MOS semiconductor. Here, the C-MOS semiconductor generally consumes less power during operation. Therefore, according to the game machine A16, it is possible to reduce the consumption of the operating means during the off and to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

A17, wherein in any of the game machines A1 to A16, the period adjusting means is configured by using an integrator circuit.

According to the game machine A17, since the period adjusting means is configured by using the integrating circuit, the signal input to the output period limiting means is adjusted shorter than the predetermined period without using a complicated circuit or signal processing. be able to. Further, by adjusting the resistance value of the resistor used in the integrating circuit and the capacitance value of the capacitor, the output period of the signal output by the period limiting means can be freely adjusted within a predetermined period.

A18, which is one of the gaming machines A1 to A17, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A17, the game machine A19 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A20 of the gaming machines A1 to A17, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. The door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body and the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means are provided. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that when the power of the gaming machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, the detection result by the door opening detecting means can be output to the specific device.

According to the game machine B1, even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is specified by the output means. Output to the device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. A door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body, an output means for outputting the detection result to a specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and one time by the output means. A game characterized by comprising an output period limiting means for keeping an output period within a predetermined period, and an off-time operating means for operating the output period limiting means and the output means while the power of the gaming machine is off. Machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Since the output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off, if the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body even when the power of the game machine is off. , The detection result can be output to a specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door once is within a predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. A door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body, an output means for outputting the detection result to a specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and one time by the output means. The output means includes an output period limiting means for keeping the output period within a predetermined period, and an off-time operating means for operating the output period limiting means and the output means while the power of the gaming machine is off. The detection result is output to the specific device based on the output from the period limiting means, and the output period limiting means is said to be said during the predetermined period when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. A game machine B3 characterized by outputting to an output means.

According to the game machine B3, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Since the output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off, if the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body even when the power of the game machine is off. , The detection result can be output to a specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door once is within a predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

Further, the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means is provided by the output period limiting means during a predetermined period when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. Output is done. Therefore, the output operation to the output means by the output period limiting means can be stopped within a predetermined period for each opening of the door body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. A door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body, an output means for outputting the detection result to a specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and one time by the output means. The output means includes an output period limiting means for keeping the output period within a predetermined period, and an off-time operating means for operating the output period limiting means and the output means while the power of the gaming machine is off. The detection result is output to the specific device based on the output from the period limiting means, and the output period limiting means outputs to the output means when the opening of the door body is not detected by the door opening detecting means. A game machine B4 characterized by stopping the door.

According to the game machine B4, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Since the output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off, if the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body even when the power of the game machine is off. , The detection result can be output to a specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door once is within a predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

Further, the output of the output period limiting means to the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device is stopped when the opening of the door body is not detected by the door opening detecting means. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body, the power consumed by the output operation of the output period limiting means can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. A door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body, an output means for outputting the detection result to a specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and one time by the output means. The output when the output period limiting means using a monostable multi-vibrator that keeps the output period within a predetermined period and the output period limiting means are connected and the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body. The power of the game machine is turned off by the input period adjusting means for adjusting the signal input to the period limiting means to a period shorter than the predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the door body, and the output period limiting means and the output means. The gaming machine B5, which is provided with an off-middle operation means for operating the inside.

According to the game machine B5, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Since the output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off, if the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body even when the power of the game machine is off. , The detection result can be output to a specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door once is within a predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

Further, the signal input to the output period limiting means using the monostable multivibrator is shorter than the predetermined period, which is one output period by the output means, regardless of the opening period of the door body by the input period adjusting means. Be adjusted. Here, the monostable multivibrator continues to output the signal unless the input period of the input signal is shorter than the output period of the output signal. Therefore, when the monostable multivibrator is used as the output period limiting means, it is input to the output period limiting means more than the output period of the output signal, that is, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means. The input period of the signal, that is, the opening period of the door body must be short. However, since it is completely unpredictable how long the opening period of the door body will be, in order to make the opening period of the door body always shorter than the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means, the predetermined period is required. It is necessary to set the setting to a sufficient period. For example, if the opening period of the door body is predicted to be from several tens of seconds to several minutes, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means is set from several minutes to several tens of minutes with sufficient margin. Must. Then, during this predetermined period, power is continuously supplied to the output period limiting means and the output means from the off operating means, so that the off operating means is significantly consumed. Therefore, in order to suppress the consumption of the operating means during off after using the monostable multivibrator as the output period limiting means, a special circuit configuration is required. However, according to the game machine B5, the input period adjusting means can adjust the signal input to the output period limiting means to be shorter than a predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the door body. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the door body, the output period limiting means can be operated normally, so that one output period by the output means can be kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. As described above, according to the game machine B5, by providing the input period adjusting means, the consumption of the operating means during off is suppressed, and the output is performed by using the monostable multivibrator without adopting a special circuit configuration. A time limiting means can be realized.

The game machine B6 is characterized in that the input period adjusting means is configured by using an integrator circuit in the game machine B5.

According to the game machine B6, since the input period adjusting means is configured by using the integrating circuit, the signal input to the output period limiting means is adjusted shorter than the predetermined period without using a complicated circuit or signal processing. can do. Further, by adjusting the resistance value of the resistor used in the integrating circuit and the capacitance value of the capacitor, the input period of the signal input to the output period limiting means can be freely adjusted within a predetermined period.

In the game machine B5 or B6, the game machine B7 is characterized in that the input period adjusting means includes a constant voltage means for making the maximum voltage of a signal input to the output period limiting means constant.

According to the game machine B7, since the constant voltage means is provided, the maximum voltage of the signal input to the output period limiting means is made constant, the signal input to the output period limiting means is stabilized, and the output means is used. One output period can be stably maintained within a predetermined period.

When the input period adjusting means is configured by using the integrator circuit, an electric charge is stored in the capacitor used in the integrator circuit, and the voltage due to this electric charge is superimposed on the signal input to the output period limiting means. , There is a risk that an overvoltage that can destroy the output period limiting means will be applied to the output period limiting means. However, according to the gaming machine 7, since the maximum voltage of the signal input to the output period limiting means is made constant by the constant voltage means, the overvoltage that can destroy the output period limiting means is not applied to the output period limiting means. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output period limiting means from being destroyed.

In the game machine B7, the game machine B8 is characterized in that the constant voltage means is composed of a Zener diode.

According to the game machine B8, since the constant voltage means is composed of the Zener diode, the input to the output period limiting means is simpler and cheaper than the constant voltage circuit composed of a complicated circuit or the like. The maximum voltage of the signal can be kept constant. Therefore, by using a simple configuration and inexpensive Zener diode, the signal input to the output period limiting means is stabilized, and one output period by the output means is stably kept within a predetermined period while the output period is limited. It is possible to prevent an overvoltage that can destroy the means from being applied to the output period limiting means.

In the game machines B1 to B8, the door body is configured to have an inner frame that is opened and closed with respect to the main body and a transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame, and the door opening detecting means. Are provided on the inner frame and the transparent plate support door, respectively, and are connected in parallel to the output means, and the output means is connected to at least one of the inner frame or the transparent plate support door by the door opening detecting means. A gaming machine B9, characterized in that, when an opening is detected, the detection result is output to the specific device.

According to the game machine B9, the door opening detecting means is provided in the inner frame and the transparent plate support door, respectively, and is connected in parallel to the output means. Therefore, the door opening detecting means of the inner frame or the transparent plate supporting door can be used. When at least one of the open doors is detected, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Therefore, even if either the inner frame or the transparent plate support door constituting the door body is opened, the opening can be notified to the specific device by the output means of 1.

In any of the game machines B1 to B9, the door opening detecting means is configured to conduct conduction when the door body is open, but to shut off when the door body is closed. A game machine B10 characterized by being played. According to the game machine B10, the door opening detecting means is conducted when the door body is open, and is shut off when the door body is closed, so that it is a time when a fraudulent act is executed. The power consumption can be kept small by operating the output means only while the door body is open.

In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the off-time operating means that is charged while the power of the game machine is on is provided, and the output means operates by the electric charge or electric power charged in the off-time operating means. A game machine B11 characterized by this. According to the game machine B11, the operating means during off is charged by the electric power supplied to the game machine while the power of the game machine is turned on, so that the power of the game machine is turned on according to the business hours of the game hall. Only the operating means can be charged while off. Therefore, if the door is opened while the power of the game machine is turned off after the game hall is closed, the output means (and the output period limiting means) are operated by the operating means during the off, and the door is opened. The detection result by the open detection means can be notified to the specific device.

In any of the game machines B1 to B11, the control means includes a main control means for performing main control of the game, and the output means is mounted on the main control means. ..

In any of the game machines B1 to B11, the game machine B13 is characterized in that the output means is mounted on a substrate different from the control means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B13, the output means includes a photocoupler, and the detection result by the door open detection means is output to the specific device by the output of the photocoupler. Machine B14.

In any of the game machines B2 to B14, the output period limiting means and the output means are configured to be operable even if the voltage is lower than the operating voltage of the control means. .. According to the game machine B15, since the output period limiting means and the output means are configured to be able to operate even at a voltage lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the charge amount of the operating means during off is reduced. Even if the output voltage of the operating means during off becomes lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the output period limiting means and the output means can be operated to notify the specific device of the opening of the door body. That is, it is possible to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

In any of the game machines B2 to B15, the output period limiting means and the output means are characterized in that the operable range voltage thereof is configured to be wider than the operable range voltage of the control means. B16. According to the game machine B16, the output period limiting means and the output means are configured such that the operable range voltage thereof is wider than the operating range voltage of the control means. Therefore, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the output period limiting means and the output means can be operated for a long time by the operating means during the off, so that the opening detection of the door body when the power of the game machine is turned off is performed for a long time. Can be done.

In any of the game machines B2 to B16, the game machine B17 is characterized in that the output period limiting means is configured to include a C-MOS semiconductor. According to the game machine B17, the output period limiting means includes a C-MOS semiconductor. Here, the C-MOS semiconductor generally consumes less power during operation. Therefore, according to the game machine B17, it is possible to reduce the consumption of the operating means during the off and to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

A gaming machine B18, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of the gaming machines B1 to B17.

In any of the game machines B1 to B17, the game machine B19 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine.

A gaming machine B20 in any of the gaming machines B1 to B17, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

A main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, a control means that is provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body and controls a game, and a notification means that performs notification by controlling the control means. In a gaming machine equipped with the above, when the door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the door body with respect to the main body and the door opening detecting means detect the opening of the door body, the detection result is obtained by the control means. The output means is provided with an output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device and outputting the notification to the specific device, and the output means is controlled by the control means when the power of the game machine is turned on. In this case, the detection result by the door opening detection means is output to the specific device, and even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control by the control means is not performed, the door opening detection means is used. A game machine C1 characterized in that it is configured to output a detection result to the specific device.

According to the game machine C1, when the power of the game machine is turned on and the control means is controlled, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is controlled by the output means. It is output to the means and the notification by the notification means is executed, and the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Therefore, for example, if the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone while the power of the game machine is turned on, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the notification by the notification means. At the same time, it is possible to identify the game machine whose door body is open by the specific device. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the control of the control means is stopped, but even in this case, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output. It is output to a specific device by means. Therefore, even if the door body is opened by somebody's fraudulent act after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the specific device. Therefore, regardless of the power on / off state of the game machine, when the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means of 1, and the game in which the door body is opened. The machine can be identified by a specific device.

In the game machine C1, a power supply means for supplying electric power to the output means to operate when the power of the game machine is turned on and a power supply means thereof are provided separately, and the power of the game machine is turned off. The control means includes an off-time operating means for supplying electric power to the output means to operate the output means, and the output means operates with the electric power supplied by the power supply means to obtain a detection result by the door open detection means. It is provided with a control output means for outputting to the specific device and a specific output means for operating by the electric power supplied by the power supply means or the operating means during off and outputting the detection result by the door open detection means to the specific device. A game machine C2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C2, when the power of the game machine is turned on, electric power is supplied to the control output means and the specific output means by the power supply means. As a result, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the control means by the control output means, the notification by the notification means is executed, and the detection result is output for identification. It is output to a specific device by means. Therefore, for example, if the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone while the power of the game machine is turned on, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the notification by the notification means. At the same time, it is possible to identify the game machine whose door body is open by the specific device. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, power is supplied to the specific output means by the operating means during the off. As a result, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the specifying output means. Therefore, even if the door body is opened by somebody's fraudulent act after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the specific device. Therefore, regardless of the power on / off state of the game machine, when the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone, the detection result is output to the specific device by the specific output means, and the game in which the door body is opened. The machine can be identified by a specific device.

In the game machine C2, the output period limiting means for keeping one output period by the specific output means within a predetermined period is provided, and the off-operating operating means is the output period limiting means in addition to the specific output means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is configured to supply electric power to operate the device.

According to the game machine C3, one output period by the specific output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Similar to the specific output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the operation period of the specific output means by opening the door once. Can be kept within a predetermined period to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the specific output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the off-time operating means is configured to be rechargeable by electric power supplied from the power source of the game machine.

According to the game machine C4, the operating means during off is charged by the electric power supplied to the game machine while the power of the game machine is turned on, so that the power of the game machine is turned on according to the business hours of the game hall. Only the operating means can be charged while off. Therefore, if the door is opened while the power of the game machine is turned off after the game hall is closed, the specific output means and the output period limiting means are operated by the operating means during the off, and the door is opened. The detection result by the open detection means can be notified to the specific device.

In any of the game machines C2 to C4, a diode for passing a current supplied from the power supply means in one direction is provided, and the operating means during off is configured by using a capacitor or a secondary battery, and the door open detection means. Is configured to be conducted when the door body is open, while being cut off when the door body is closed, and the power supply means is connected to the anode terminal of the diode. It is connected, the cathode terminal of the diode is connected to one end of the off operating means, the other end of the off operating means is grounded, and the control output means is the power supply means. And the anode terminal of the diode are connected via the door opening detecting means, and the specifying output means is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode and one end of the operating means during off via the door opening detecting means. A game machine C5 characterized by being a diode.

According to the game machine C5, the control output means is connected to the power supply means and the anode terminal of the diode. Therefore, when the door body is opened when the power of the game machine is turned on, the door open detection means Is conducted and power is supplied from the power supply means to the control output means to enter the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the power supply by the power supply means is stopped, so even if the door body is opened and the door open detection means conducts, the control output means is sent. Power is not supplied from the power supply means and the unit is stopped. On the other hand, since the specific output means is connected to the operating means during off and the cathode terminal of the diode, when the door body is opened when the power of the game machine is turned on, the door open detection means is used. It becomes conductive and power is supplied from the power supply means to the specific output means to enter the operating state. When the power of the game machine is turned off, the power supply to the specific output means by the power supply means is stopped, but when the door body is opened and the door open detection means is electrically connected, the identification is performed by the operating means during the off. Since the power is supplied to the output means, the specific output means is in the operating state. Here, when the power of the game machine is turned off and power is supplied from the operating means to the specific output means during the off, the power supply to the control output means can be cut off by the diode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the specific output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, the door body includes an inner frame that is opened and closed with respect to the main body, and a transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame. The inner frame door opening detecting means provided on the inner frame and the transparent plate door opening detecting means provided on the transparent plate support door are provided, and the output means is said by the inner frame door opening detecting means. When the opening of the inner frame is detected, the detection result is output to the control means to execute the notification by the notification means, and the detection result is output to the specific device. The first output means and the transparent plate. When the opening of the transparent plate support door is detected by the door opening detecting means, the detection result is output to the control means to execute the notification by the notification means, and the detection result is output to the specific device. A game machine C6 including a second output means.

According to the game machine C6, when the power of the game machine is turned on and the control means is controlled, when the opening of the inner frame is detected by the door opening detecting means for the inner frame, the detection result is the first. 1 The output means outputs to the control means to execute the notification by the notification means, and the detection result is output to the specific device by the first output means. Similarly, when the power of the game machine is turned on and the opening of the transparent plate support door is detected by the transparent plate door opening detecting means, the detection result is output to the control means by the second output means. The notification by the notification means is executed, and the detection result is output to the specific device by the second output means. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the control of the control means is stopped, but even in this case, when the opening of the inner frame is detected by the inner frame door opening detecting means, the detection is detected. The result is output to the specific device by the first output means. Similarly, when the power of the game machine is turned off and the opening of the transparent plate support door is detected by the transparent plate door opening detecting means, the detection result is output to the specific device by the second output means. .. As described above, the first output means for outputting the detection result when the inner frame is opened and the second output means for outputting the detection result when the transparent plate support door is opened are separately provided. Therefore, when either one or both of the inner frame and the transparent plate support door are opened, it is possible to determine which one was opened by the notification by the notification means and the specific device.

In any of the game machines C3 to C6, the specific output means outputs a detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means, and the output period limiting means is the door opening detecting means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that when the opening of the door body is detected by the above, an output is performed to the specific output means during the predetermined period.

According to the game machine C7, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the specifying output means. Since the specific output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means while the game machine is turned off, the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body even when the game machine is turned off. Then, the detection result can be output to the specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the specific output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Similar to the specific output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the operation period of the specific output means by opening the door once. Can be kept within a predetermined period to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times the specific output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

Further, for the specific output means that outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means, the output period is limited during the predetermined period when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body. Output is done by means. Therefore, the output operation to the specific output means by the output period limiting means can be stopped within a predetermined period for each opening of the door body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the specific output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In the game machine C7, the output period limiting means stops the output to the specific output means when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body.

According to the game machine C8, the output of the output period limiting means to the specifying output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device is stopped when the opening of the door body is not detected by the door opening detecting means. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body, the power consumed by the output operation of the output period limiting means can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the specific output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In any of the game machines C3 to C8, the output period limiting means is configured by using a monostable multivibrator, is connected to the monostable multivibrator, and opens the door body by the door opening detecting means. When is detected, the game is provided with an input period adjusting means for adjusting a signal to be input to the monostable multivibrator to a period shorter than the predetermined period regardless of the opening time of the door body. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, the signal input to the output period limiting means using the monostable multivibrator has one output period by the specific output means by the input period adjusting means regardless of the opening period of the door body. It is adjusted to be shorter than the predetermined period. Here, the monostable multivibrator continues to output the signal unless the input period of the input signal is shorter than the output period of the output signal. Therefore, when the monostable multivibrator is used as the output period limiting means, it is input to the output period limiting means more than the output period of the output signal, that is, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means. The input period of the signal, that is, the opening period of the door body must be short. However, since it is completely unpredictable how long the opening period of the door body will be, in order to make the opening period of the door body always shorter than the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means, the predetermined period is required. It is necessary to set the setting to a sufficient period. For example, if the opening period of the door body is predicted to be from several tens of seconds to several minutes, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means is set from several minutes to several tens of minutes with sufficient margin. Must. Then, during this predetermined period, power is continuously supplied from the off operating means to the output period limiting means and the specific output means, so that the off operating means is significantly consumed. Therefore, in order to suppress the consumption of the operating means during off after using the monostable multivibrator as the output period limiting means, a special circuit configuration is required. However, according to the game machine C9, the input period adjusting means can adjust the signal input to the output period limiting means to be shorter than a predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the door body. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the door body, the output period limiting means can be operated normally, so that one output period by the specific output means can be kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. As described above, according to the game machine C9, by providing the input period adjusting means, the consumption of the operating means during off is suppressed, and the output is performed by using the monostable multivibrator without adopting a special circuit configuration. A time limiting means can be realized.

In any of the game machines C1 to C9, the control means includes a main control means for performing a main control of the game, and the output means is mounted on the main control means of the game machine C10. ..

In any of the game machines C1 to C10, the game machine C11 is characterized in that the output means is mounted on a substrate different from the control means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C11, the output means includes a photocoupler, and the detection result by the door open detection means is output to the control means and the specific device by the output of the photocoupler. The game machine C12.

In any of the game machines C3 to C12, the output period limiting means and the specifying output means are configured to be operable even at a voltage lower than the operating voltage of the control means. Machine C13.

According to the game machine C13, since the output period limiting means and the specifying output means are configured to be able to operate even at a voltage lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the charge amount of the operating means during off is reduced. Therefore, even if the output voltage of the operating means during off becomes lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the output period limiting means and the specifying output means can be operated to notify the specific device of the opening of the door body. That is, it is possible to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

In any of the game machines C3 to C13, the output period limiting means and the specifying output means are characterized in that the operable range voltage thereof is configured to be wider than the operable range voltage of the control means. Game machine C14.

According to the game machine C14, the output period limiting means and the specifying output means are configured such that the operable range voltage thereof is wider than the operating range voltage of the control means. Therefore, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the output period limiting means and the specific output means can be operated for a long time by the operating means during the off, so that the opening detection of the door body when the power of the game machine is turned off can be detected for a long time. It can be carried out.

In any of the game machines C3 to C14, the game machine C15 is characterized in that the output period limiting means is configured to include a C-MOS semiconductor.

According to the game machine C15, the output period limiting means includes a C-MOS semiconductor. Here, the C-MOS semiconductor generally consumes less power during operation. Therefore, according to the game machine C15, it is possible to reduce the consumption of the operating means during the off and to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

In any of the game machines C9 to C15, the game machine C16 is characterized in that the input period adjusting means is configured by using an integrator circuit.

According to the game machine C16, since the input period adjusting means is configured by using the integrating circuit, the signal input to the output period limiting means is adjusted shorter than the predetermined period without using a complicated circuit or signal processing. can do. Further, by adjusting the resistance value of the resistor used in the integrating circuit and the capacitance value of the capacitor, the input period of the signal input to the output period limiting means can be freely adjusted within a predetermined period.

In any of the game machines C9 to C16, the input period adjusting means includes a constant voltage means for stabilizing the maximum voltage of a signal input to the monostable multivibrator which is the output period limiting means. Game machine C17.

According to the game machine C17, since the constant voltage means is provided, the maximum voltage of the signal input to the output period limiting means is made constant, the signal input to the output period limiting means is stabilized, and the specific output is output. It is possible to stably keep one output period by means within a predetermined period.

When the input period adjusting means is configured by using the integrator circuit, an electric charge is stored in the capacitor used in the integrator circuit, and the voltage due to this electric charge is superimposed on the signal input to the output period limiting means. , There is a risk that an overvoltage that can destroy the output period limiting means will be applied to the output period limiting means. However, according to the game machine C17, since the maximum voltage of the signal input to the output period limiting means is made constant by the constant voltage means, the overvoltage that can destroy the output period limiting means is not applied to the output period limiting means. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output period limiting means from being destroyed.

In the game machine C17, the constant voltage means is the game machine C18, which is composed of a Zener diode.

According to the game machine C18, since the constant voltage means is composed of the Zener diode, the input to the output period limiting means is simpler and cheaper than the constant voltage circuit composed of a complicated circuit or the like. The maximum voltage of the signal can be kept constant. Therefore, by using a simple configuration and inexpensive Zener diode, the signal input to the output period limiting means is stabilized, and one output period by the specific output means is stably maintained within a predetermined period while the output is performed. It is possible to prevent an overvoltage that can destroy the period limiting means from being applied to the output period limiting means.

A gaming machine C19 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C18, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

In any of the game machines C1 to C18, the game machine C20 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine.

In any of the game machines C1 to C18, the game machine C21 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. The door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body and the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means are provided. When the power of the game machine is turned on and the control is performed by the control means, the detection result by the door opening detection means is output to the specific device, the power of the game machine is turned off, and the control means is used. The gaming machine C22 is configured to output the detection result by the door opening detecting means to the specific device even when the control is not performed.

According to the game machine C22, when the power of the game machine is turned on and the control means is controlled, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is specified by the output means. Output to the device. Therefore, for example, if the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone while the power of the game machine is turned on, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the specific device. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the control of the control means is stopped, but even in this case, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output. It is output to a specific device by means. Therefore, even if the door body is opened by somebody's fraudulent act after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the specific device. Therefore, regardless of the power on / off state of the game machine, when the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means of 1, and the game in which the door body is opened. The machine can be identified by a specific device.

In any of the game machines C1, C6, C10 to C12 or C19 to C22, the generation means for generating the signal output as the detection result from the output means, and the generation means of the game machine via a specific location. The game machine C23 is characterized by comprising an on-time supply means for supplying electric power while the power is on, and an off-time supply means for supplying electric power to the specific location while the game machine is off.

According to the game machine C23, while the power of the game machine is on, power is supplied from the power supply means while the power of the game machine is on, while power is supplied to the specific place of the generation means while the power of the game machine is off. Power is supplied from the means. That is, power is supplied to the generation means regardless of whether the power of the game machine is on or off. Therefore, the generation means can generate a signal output as a detection result from the output means regardless of the on / off state of the power supply of the game machine.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
11 Outer frame (main body)
12 Inner frame (part of door body)
14 Front frame (part of door body)
110 Main controller (part of control means)
281 Integrator circuit (period adjustment means)
300 Inner frame open detection circuit (part of output means)
300a Inner frame terminal board output circuit (part of output means)
291 External output terminal board for inner frame (part of output means)
302 Front frame open detection circuit (part of output means)
302a Front frame terminal board output circuit (part of output means)
293 External output terminal board for front frame (part of output means)
CD1 capacitor (part of power supply means, operating means while off)
D1 diode DC1 DC power supply (part of power supply means)
IC1 timer (output period limiting means)
PR1 photocoupler (part of output means)
SW3A switch (part of door open detection means, part of stop means, part of release means, part of power supply restart means, part of initialization means, part of discharge means, part of discharge release means )
SW3-1 switch (part of stop means, part of release means, part of power supply restart means)
SW3-3 switch (part of initialization means, part of discharge means, part of discharge release means)
SW4A switch (part of door open detection means, part of stop means, part of release means, part of power supply restart means, part of initialization means, part of discharge means, part of discharge release means )
SW4-1 switch (part of stop means, part of release means, part of power supply restart means)
SW4-3 switch (part of initialization means, part of discharge means, part of discharge release means)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine, a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (for example, a slot machine), a rotating cylinder type gaming machine using a gaming ball, and the like.

In pachinko machines, when a ball driven into the game area enters the symbol operating port, a lottery is performed at the timing of the entry. Further, in a slot machine or a rotating game machine using a game ball, when the start lever is operated, a lottery is performed at the timing of the operation. A result of the lottery, comes to the person have enough For example, a capable state payout of prize balls and coins. The control for determining the lottery and or those are performed by the main controller, the main controller is liable to be subject to fraud.

Specific fraud, for example, the main control unit, or replaced by illegal that those have enough occurs frequently, or connect the invalid substrate (e.g., "hanging board") to the main controller, an equivalent or there is illegal to those to be generated. Also, in the case of pachinko machines, for example, illegally bent nails which are driven on the game board, there is also misconduct to facilitate the ball entrance spheres to winning hole and patterns actuation port.
For pachinko machine, when the fraud who's spamming game board and the main control device or the like, it is necessary to release the inner frame or glass frame, the inner frame or glass frame is opened in this case, because the opening is detected by the sensor, a predetermined notification is made, it is possible to grasp the fraud.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-198332

However, for example, midnight, etc. after closing of the game arcade, fraudster may enter, if the intruder was fraud by opening the inner frame or glass frame or the like, the power of the pachinko machine is sectional in the time and which, since pachinko machine is stopped, there is an inner frame or a problem that the de Ki such have it open for detecting the glass frame.
In addition to pachinko machines, these problems, that is, the problem that the door body cannot be grasped when the door body is opened while the power of the game machine is turned off, are not only pachinko machines, but also ale-pachi, sparrow balls, and slots. It can also occur in various gaming machines such as machines, so-called pachinko machines and slot machines fused together.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and when the door body is opened while the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the opening can be grasped. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be used.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve this object, which comprises a body, a door body openable and closable with respect to the main body, and control means for controlling the Yu technique, before Kitobira When the door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body and the door opening detecting means detect the opening of the door body, if it is in the initial state, the door body is operated from the initial state to the specified time. Based on the period adjusting means for outputting a signal having a predetermined output period regardless of the opening period of the door and the signal output by the period adjusting means, the detection result by the door opening detecting means is output to the specific device. The output means, the power supply means for supplying power to the output means and the period adjusting means to operate, and stopping the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means when the closing of the door body is detected. The door opening detecting means includes a stopping means , the door opening detecting means includes an initialization means for initializing the period adjusting means when the closing of the door body is detected, and the power supply means turns off the power of the gaming machine. When this is done, the output means and the period adjusting means are provided with an off-time operating means for operating by supplying power.

According to the present invention, when the door body is opened while the power of the game machine is turned off, it is possible to grasp the opening.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in a state where the inner frame, the front frame and the lower plate unit are open. It is a figure which showed the structure of a switch. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of a frame opening detection circuit and an external output terminal board. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state of the inner frame, the state of the front frame, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer, and the output of the external output terminal plate. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU201 in the main control device 110. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation process executed in the main process. It is a flowchart which showed the variation start processing executed in the variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed in the timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the frame opening detection circuit of 2nd Embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state of the inner frame 12, the state of the front frame 14, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit of the second embodiment, and the output of the external output terminal plate. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the frame opening detection circuit of 3rd Embodiment. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state of the inner frame, the state of the front frame, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer of the third embodiment, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer of the third embodiment, and the output of the external output terminal plate. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine of the 4th embodiment in a state where the inner frame, the front frame and the lower plate unit are open. It is sectional drawing of the switch SW3 used in the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the frame opening detection circuit for an inner frame, and the external output terminal board for an inner frame. The state of the power supply of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the state of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer, the output of the external output terminal plate for the inner frame, and the inner frame. It is a timing chart which showed the relation of the output of an input / output port output circuit. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the door opening notification processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the display control apparatus of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the external interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device of 4th Embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the switch SW3A used for the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of the frame opening detection circuit for an inner frame and the external output terminal board for an inner frame used in the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. The state of the power supply of the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment, the state of the inner frame, the state of the switch SW3-3, the state of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer, It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between the OUT terminal voltage of a timer, the output of an external output terminal board for an inner frame, and the output of an input / output port output circuit for an inner frame.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changing the effect content at the time of reach effect.

In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided. Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the changing variable resistor, whereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. The ball entry port 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, is arranged on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time saving, or the normal state by the lighting state, indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the fluctuating state by the lighting state, and the stop symbol corresponds to the probabilistic jackpot. Whether it is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a non-standard symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. ..

Note that the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change state is a game state in which the jackpot probability is increased and it is easy to shift to the special game state. Further, during the probability change in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the ball is easily entered into the first entry port 64. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time, it is a state of a game in which the jackpot probability remains the same, only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased). In addition, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 and the number of times for the electric accessory to be opened at one time are changed. It may be a thing.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) that variablely displays the third symbol triggered by winning a prize in the first ball opening 64. And a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter, abbreviated as “LED”) that fluctuates and displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball of the second entry port 67. ..

The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, and for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. 86 is arranged. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A decorative display is made according to the above. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when the ball enters the first entry port 64 before the stop symbol (one of the probabilistic jackpot symbol, the normal jackpot symbol, and the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of times the ball has been entered is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 85. Four holding lamps 85 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps 85, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holdings is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. , Or it may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the hold lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of hold of the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set as a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the holding lamp 85 may not be used to display the lighting.

The second symbol display device 82 has a display unit 83 of the second symbol and a holding lamp 84, and each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the display unit 83 serves as a display symbol (second symbol). When the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are alternately lit to perform variable display, and the variable display is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the "○" symbol), the first 1 The ball entry port 64 is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 described above and is also lit and displayed by the hold lamp 84. The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps on the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. It may be done by using a part of 81. Similarly, the hold lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of times of holding the second ball opening 67 is not limited to four, as in the case of the first ball opening 64, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example,). It may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of holds is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the hold lamp 84 may not be used to display the lighting.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the internal configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are open.

The pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell thereof, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11. In the amusement park, the outer peripheral surface of the outer frame 11 is fixed to an installation location called an island of the amusement park. Since the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are configured to be openable to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11, the pachinko machine 10 cannot be touched from the front side or the inside. The inspection and adjustment are performed by opening the inner frame 12 and the like to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11.

Metal upper hinges (not shown) and lower hinges (not shown) are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view to support the inner frame 12. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with the side on which the upper hinge and the lower hinge are provided as an opening / closing shaft.

The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of an inner frame base 55 made of ABS resin formed in a rectangular shape, and a substantially circular central window 55a is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base 55. A mounting portion for the game board 13 is provided on the back surface side of the inner frame base 55, and the game board 13 is detachably mounted.

The lower side of the central window 55a of the inner frame base 55 is formed by being recessed in a concave shape with the front side open, and a flat mounting surface 52b is formed on the back side thereof. A launching unit 140 for launching a ball to the front surface of the game board 13, a passage forming member 54 for forming a passage for discharging the ball to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the like are attached to the mounting surface 52b.

Switches SW1 (SW1a, SW1b) for detecting the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 are provided between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and the front surface is provided between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. Switches SW2 (SW2a, SW2b) for detecting the opening and closing of the frame 14 are provided. The switch SW1 is composed of a female switch SW1a arranged on a surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12, and a male switch SW1b arranged on a surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11. To. Further, the switch SW2 is composed of a female switch SW2a arranged on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the front frame 14 and a male switch SW2b arranged on the surface of the front frame 14 facing the inner frame 12. It is composed.

Here, the structures of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 have the same structure, the structure of the switch SW1 will be described, and the description of the switch SW2 will be omitted.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the structure of the switch SW1. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing a state (blocking state) of the switch SW1 in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed. Further, FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a state (conduction state) of the switch SW1 in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 5 (a), the female switch SW1a arranged on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 contains a pair of terminal pairs SW1c made of metal which is a conductive member. ing. In the state where the inner frame 12 is closed, the female switch SW1a arranged on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 has a male switch SW1a arranged on the surface of the inner frame 12 facing the outer frame 11. The mold switch SW1b is inserted, and the contact between the terminals and the SW1c is hindered. Therefore, in the state where the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW1 is in a state where the continuity is cut off.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the inner frame 12 is open, the female switch SW1a arranged on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 is outside the inner frame 12. The male switch SW1b arranged on the surface facing the frame 11 is pulled out. Since the terminal pair SW1c built in the female switch SW1a has a structure in which an urging force is generated in the direction opposite to each other, the terminal pair SW1c are in contact with each other when the male switch SW1b is pulled out from the female switch SW1a. To do. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is open, the switch SW1 is in a conductive state.

As described above, the switch SW1 is in a cutoff state when the inner frame 12 is closed, and is in a conductive state when the inner frame 12 is open. However, the structure of the switch SW1 is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 5, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW1 is shut off, while when the inner frame 12 is open, the switch SW1 is in a cutoff state. Any structure may be used as long as the switch SW1 is in a conductive state. This also applies to the structure of the switch SW2.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (work) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like are stored. Area) and. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 12) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process (see FIG. 11) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a specific prize. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the port 65a to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the opening and closing plate of the port 65a.

Further, the main control device 110 is provided with a frame opening detection circuit 260 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 by conducting the switch SW1 and detects the opening of the front frame 14 by conducting the switch SW2. There is. The frame opening detection circuit 260 is connected to a switch SW1 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12, a switch SW2 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14, and an external output terminal board 261 configured to be connectable to the hall computer 262. Has been done. In addition, in the connection between the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 and the frame opening detection circuit 260, and the connection between the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261, an input / output unit (input / output port 205) that inputs / outputs signals is used. Are connected via different I / O ports, not shown). When the switch SW1 conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, or when the switch SW2 conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14, the frame opening detection circuit 260 transmits the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output. The pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, it is possible to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14.

The frame opening detection circuit 260 is configured to be unconnected to the MPU 201 and the input / output port 205 (input / output port of the MPU 201) of the main control device 110. Therefore, the frame opening detection circuit 260 may be configured to be mounted on a device (circuit board) other than the main control device 110. For example, it may be mounted on a device (circuit board) on which an arithmetic unit such as an MPU or a CPU is not mounted, or a dedicated board for the frame opening detection circuit 260 may be provided and mounted there. Better yet, like the main control device 110, the payout control device 111, and the launch control device 112, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is housed in the board box, and the box base and the box cover provided on the board box are sealed. It is connected so that it cannot be opened by (not shown) (connection by caulking structure). Then, a sealing sticker (not shown) may be attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box cover and the box base.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.), and a display control device 114. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 to be performed. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and a bus line 239, 240. have. The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 237, and the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236 are connected to the output side of the input port 237. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various programs by the MPU 231. The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores data for effect such as a symbol (background symbol or third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing the effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 234.

The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231 and the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the display data 81. It is to be displayed on.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 17).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the payout control device 111 clears the backup data. The payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

Next, the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261. In FIG. 7, the frame opening detection circuit 260 will be described first, and then the external output terminal plate 261 will be described.

The frame opening detection circuit 260 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 includes a DC power supply DC1 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts, a diode D1, capacitors CD1 to CD5, resistors R1 to R4, and the like. It mainly has a timer IC1 (LMC555 manufactured by National Semiconductor) which is a C-MOS timer, and a transistor TR1 provided with an internal resistance R5 and an internal resistance R6.

In order to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 by conducting the switch SW1 and to detect the opening of the front frame 14 by conducting the switch SW2, the above-mentioned parts of the frame opening detection circuit 260 are shown in FIG. Connected according to the block diagram. Since the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are connected in parallel to the frame opening detection circuit 260, if either switch is conductive, the frame opening detection circuit 260 will be connected to the inner frame 12 or the front frame. The opening of 14 can be detected.

The DC power supply DC1 is a power supply that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261. The electric power (power source) to the DC power source DC1 is supplied from the power source unit 251 provided in the power source device 115 through a power source path (not shown). The DC power supply DC1 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode D1. One end of a 0.1F (Farad) capacitor CD1 is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode D1. The other end of the capacitor CD1 is grounded. Further, one end of the capacitor CD1 is connected to one end of the switch SW1, one end of the switch SW2, and the VDD terminal and the RES terminal of the timer IC1.

The capacitor CD1 is charged to supply a DC voltage to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. It is a component that exerts the function of a battery.

This is because the capacitor CD1 is supplied with power to the pachinko machine 10, and when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the capacitance of the capacitor CD1 is 0.1 F (farad) and the capacitor CD1. The charge obtained by the product of the applied DC voltage (about 11.3 volt obtained by subtracting the voltage drop of about 0.7 volt at the diode D1 from the 12 volt supplied from the DC power supply DC1) is stored.

On the other hand, the capacitor CD1 is stored in the capacitor CD1 when, for example, the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. A DC voltage (about 11.3 volts) based on the generated electric charge is supplied to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261.

Therefore, the frame opening detection circuit 260 naturally operates when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Further, for example, a game hall business Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off at the end of the time and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, it operates by the DC voltage supplied by the capacitor CD1. The opening of the frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. In this embodiment, the capacitor CD1 is used as a component for supplying the DC voltage to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261 when the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the capacitor CD1 may be used as a secondary battery (rechargeable battery) having a larger storage capacity or a primary battery that does not need to be charged.

Further, since the cathode terminal of the diode D1 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 and the diode D1 functions to prevent the backflow of current, direct current is applied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261. Even when a voltage (about 11.3 volts) is supplied, the DC voltage is not applied to the DC power supply DC1 and the DC power supply DC1 is not damaged.

The timer IC1 is a C-MOS timer, and detects the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 by connecting the resistors R1 to R2 of 100 kΩ and the capacitors CD3 to CD5 of 0.1 μF, and detects the opening of the inner frame 12 or the external output terminal. It functions as a circuit that energizes the photocoupler PR1 of the plate 261 for about 10 ms.

The operating voltage range of the timer IC1 is the MPU 201 mounted on the main control device 110, the MPU 211 mounted on the payout control device 111, the MPU 221 mounted on the voice lamp control device 113, and the MPU 231 mounted on the display control device 114. It is set wider than each operating voltage range. Specifically, the operating voltage range of the timer IC1 is from about 1.5 volts to about 12.0 volts, while the operating voltage range of the MPU 2011, 211, 221, 231 is from about 4.5 volts. It is about 5.5 volts (note that each operating voltage of this embodiment is about 5.0 volts). Therefore, the timer IC1 can operate at a voltage lower than each operating voltage of the MPU 2011, 211, 221, 231. Therefore, even if the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 is reduced and the voltage supplied by the capacitor CD1 is reduced to less than about 4.5 volts, the timer IC1 can operate sufficiently. Further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the timer IC1 is DC-controlled by the capacitor CD1. It is used both when the voltage is supplied and when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Therefore, as a matter of course, the timer IC 1 can operate at a DC voltage of 12 volts or less supplied to the frame opening detection circuit 260 when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. Further, since the timer IC1 is a timer composed of a C-MOS semiconductor, it can suppress power consumption during operation and can operate for a long time.

The VDD terminal of the timer IC1 is a terminal for inputting the DC voltage supplied to the timer IC1 and is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1. Further, the VDD terminal of the timer IC1 is connected to one end of the 0.1 μF capacitor CD4, and the other end of the capacitor CD4 is connected to the GND terminal of the grounded timer IC1. The capacitor CD4 reduces the noise generated in the VDD terminal of the timer IC1 when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are conducted or cut off (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened or closed). ..

The RES terminal of the timer IC1 is a terminal for operating a reset function that forcibly puts the voltage output from the OUT terminal into an output stop state (zero volt) when a pulse signal is input to the RES terminal. However, since this reset function is not used in the frame open detection circuit 260, the RES terminal of the timer IC1 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 so that the reset function does not operate. Since the VDD terminal of the timer IC1 and the RES terminal of the timer IC1 are connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 as described above, a DC voltage of about 11.3 volts is applied to the VDD terminal and the RES terminal of the timer IC1. It is applied.

The TRG terminal of the timer IC1 reduces the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed). Set to 10.6 volt, while either switch SW1 or switch SW2, or both switch SW1 and switch SW2 are in a conductive state (either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14). Or, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state), it is a terminal for setting the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from about 10.6 volt to zero volt after about 10 ms. .. The TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, one end of the capacitor CD5, the other end of the switch SW1, the other end of the switch SW2, one end of the resistor R1, and one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. The other end of the resistor R2 and the other end of the capacitor CD5 are grounded.

The resistor R2 connected to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is a timer when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state (see FIG. 5B). This is a resistor for applying a DC voltage (about 11.3 volts) to the TRG terminal of the IC1. Further, this capacitor CD5 is a capacitor for reducing noise generated in the resistor R2 when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are conducted or cut off (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened or closed). Is.

With the above connection, when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the cutoff state (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the closed state), no voltage is supplied to the resistor R2 and the capacitor CD5, so that the resistor R2 and the capacitor CD5 are supplied with voltage. The applied voltage (the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1) is zero volt. At this time, the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts.

On the other hand, when either one of the switch SW1 or the switch SW2, or both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in a conductive state (either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 or both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in a conductive state). Since the voltage is supplied to the resistor R2 and the capacitor CD5 (when in the open state), the voltage applied to the resistor R2 and the capacitor CD5 (the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1) is applied to one end of the capacitor CD1. It is about 11.3 volts, which is the same as the applied voltage. At this time, the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts for about 10 ms after either switch SW1 or switch SW2, or both switch SW1 and switch SW2 are in a conductive state. After that, it becomes zero voltage.

In this way, the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC 1 can be set to either about 10.6 volts or zero volts by the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1. The switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted (the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened), and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to the resistor R2) is about 11.3 volts from zero volt. When the voltage changes to, as described above, the voltage of about 10.6 volts output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volts with a delay of about 10 ms from the rise of the voltage. Then, as will be described in detail later, the time difference between the rise of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to the resistor R2) and the fall of the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 ( About 10 ms), a current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 for about 10 ms, and the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is energized only for about 10 ms.

The OUT terminal of the timer IC1 has a voltage of about 10.6 volts when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off (the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed) and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 becomes zero volt. On the other hand, when the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted (the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened) and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 rises to about 11.3 volts, the rise is started. It is a terminal that sets the output voltage of about 10.6 volts to zero volts with a delay of about 10 ms. This OUT terminal is connected to one end of a 10 kΩ resistor R3. The other end of the resistor R3 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD2 and one end of the resistor R4 having 10 kΩ, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 and the other end of the resistor R4 are grounded.

The resistor R3 and the resistor R4 are voltage dividing resistors for dividing the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1. Therefore, the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is divided into the resistor R3 and the resistor R4 according to the ratio of the resistance value of the resistor R3 and the resistance value of the resistor R4. Since both the resistor R3 and the resistor R4 are 10 kΩ, the voltage of about 10.6 volt output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is divided into a maximum value of about 5.3 volt by the resistor R3 and the resistor R4, respectively. Be pressured.

The 10 μF capacitor CD2 connected in parallel with the resistor R4 is a capacitor for stabilizing the voltage applied to the resistor R4. One end of the capacitor CD2 is connected to one end of the resistor R4, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 is connected to the other end of the resistor R4 and is grounded. By stabilizing the voltage applied to the resistor R4 by the capacitor CD2, the bias voltage applied between the base terminal b of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 is stabilized, and the transistor TR1 The operation can be stabilized.

The transistor TR1 is a switching element that switches between the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 to either conduction or interruption based on the voltage applied to the resistor R4. The transistor TR1 is provided with an internal resistance R5 of 10 kΩ. One end of the resistance R4 is connected to one end of the internal resistance R5, and the base terminal b is connected to the other end of the internal resistance R5. Further, the transistor TR1 is provided with an internal resistance R6 of 10 kΩ. The other end of the internal resistance R5 is connected to one end of the internal resistance R6, and the emitter terminal e is connected to the other end of the internal resistance R6.

Therefore, when a voltage of about 10.6 volts is output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC 1 (when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened). (If it is within about 10 ms), the voltage is divided by the resistor R3 and the resistor R4, and the voltage applied to the resistor R4 (about 5.3 volts) becomes one end of the internal resistance R5 of the transistor TR1. It is applied between the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e. As a result, the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are made conductive. At this time, if the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state), until the voltage of about 10.6 volt output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched to zero volt. That is, a current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 for about 10 ms after the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. If a current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 can be energized for about 10 ms, and a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output to the hall computer 262. However, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off, the connection between one end of the capacitor CD1 and the resistor R7 provided on the external output terminal plate 261 is cut off. Therefore, no current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. Therefore, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is not energized, and the pulse signal is not output to the hall computer 262.

On the other hand, when the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is zero volt (when about 10 ms has elapsed since the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 was opened), no voltage is applied to the resistor R4, so that the internal resistance R5 of the transistor TR1 No voltage is applied between one end of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1. As a result, the connection between the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 is cut off. Therefore, even if the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state), no current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. Therefore, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is not energized, and the pulse signal is not output to the hall computer 262.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 can be energized for about 10 ms. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

The TH terminal of the timer IC1 is a terminal for measuring the voltage applied to the TH terminal, and is connected to the other end of the resistor R1, one end of the capacitor CD3, and the DCH terminal of the timer IC1. The DCH terminal of the timer IC1 has a voltage (about 7.5 volts) that is two-thirds of the DC voltage (about 11.3 volts) in which the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 is input to the VDD terminal of the timer IC1. It is a terminal that switches the impedance of the DCH terminal from the infinite state to the zero state when it becomes. When the impedance of the DCH terminal becomes zero (ground state), the voltage cannot be applied to the capacitor CD3. On the other hand, when the impedance of the DCH terminal becomes infinite, a voltage can be applied to the capacitor CD3.

The inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 of the resistor R1 and the capacitor CD3 connected to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 and the DCH terminal of the timer IC1 are opened based on the time constant which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R1 and the capacitor CD3. When this is done, it is a component for determining the period until the voltage of about 10.6 volt output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC 1 is switched to zero volt to be about 10 ms. One end of the resistor R1 is connected to the other end of the switch SW1, the other end of the switch SW2, and one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. Further, the other end of the resistor R1 is connected to the TH terminal of the timer IC1, the DCH terminal of the timer IC1, and one end of the capacitor CD3. The other end of the capacitor CD3 is grounded.

Here, the resistor R1 and the capacitor CD3 will be described together with the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, the TH terminal of the timer IC1, the DCH terminal of the timer IC1, and the OUT terminal of the timer IC1.

When the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off), no voltage is supplied to the resistor R1, so that the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 is zero volt (about 7.5 volt). The impedance of the DCH terminal of the timer IC1 is set to infinite. Therefore, a voltage can be applied to the capacitor CD3, and the capacitor CD3 is in a rechargeable state (a state in which electric charges can be stored). However, when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off, the connection between one end of the capacitor CD1 and the resistor R1 is cut off, so that no voltage is applied to the capacitor CD3 and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD3 is zero volt. It becomes. In this way, the capacitor CD3 is in a rechargeable state, but is not charged. At this time, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, and the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are conductive. However, since the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the cutoff state, no current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. Therefore, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is not energized, and the pulse signal is not output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

Next, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state (see FIG. 5B) and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (to the resistor R7). The applied voltage) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt. At this time, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, and the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are conducting. Therefore, the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 is started, and the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is energized. As a result, the signal is started to be output to the hall computer 262.

Further, at the same time that the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to the resistor R7) is switched from zero volt to about 11.3 volt, the voltage is applied to the capacitor CD3 and the capacitor CD3 is charged. To be started. At this time, the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 starts to rise.

The voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is 2/2 of the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 (voltage applied to the capacitor CD3) and the voltage input to the VDD terminal of the timer IC1 (about 11.3 volts). Keep about 10.6 volts until it equals the voltage of 3, ie about 7.5 volts. When the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 (voltage applied to the capacitor CD2) rises and becomes equal to about 7.5 volts, the impedance of the DCH terminal of the timer IC1 changes from infinite to zero (ground). Switch to the state where it was done). Then, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD3 becomes a zero volt state, and the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD3 is discharged. As a result, the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 is switched from about 7.5 volts to zero volts. By switching the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched from about 10.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the conduction between the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 is cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 is stopped. As a result, the energization of the external output terminal plate 261 to the photocoupler PR1 is stopped, and the output of the signal to the hall computer 262 is stopped.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (see FIG. 5B), the output is output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1. The period until the voltage of about 10.6 volt is switched to zero volt, that is, the period until the voltage applied to the TH terminal of the timer IC1 (voltage applied to the capacitor CD3) changes from zero volt to about 7.5 volt. , It is determined to be about 10 ms based on the time constant which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R1 and the capacitance of the capacitor CD3. Then, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the supply of current to one end of the resistor R7 of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is started. Then, about 10 ms after the start of supplying the current to one end of the resistor R7, the voltage of about 10.6 volt output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched to zero volt, and the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 The continuity with e is cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 is stopped. As a result, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a current is supplied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 for about 10 ms, and the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is supplied for about 10 ms. It can be energized only during the period. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

When the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 change from the open state to the closed state (the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state to the cutoff state), that is, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 (applied to the resistor R7). When the voltage) is switched from about 11.3 volt to zero volt, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched from zero volt to about 10.6 volt. In this state, as described above, the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are conducting, but since the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the cutoff state, one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 Is not supplied with current. Therefore, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is not energized, and the pulse signal is not output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

As described above, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state, one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 is applied based on the time constant which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R1 and the capacitor CD3. A current is supplied for about 10 ms, and the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 can be energized for about 10 ms. As a result, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

Returning to the description of FIG. The CNT terminal of the timer IC1 is a terminal that adjusts the output period of the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 according to the signal input to the CNT terminal. However, since the frame open detection circuit 260 does not adjust the output period of the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 (the output period of the voltage output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is fixed at 10 ms), the timer IC1 The CNT terminal is not connected to any of the components of the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261 and is open.

As described above, in the frame open detection circuit 260, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (see FIG. 5B), the external output terminal plate 261 Start supplying current to one end of the resistor R7. On the other hand, the frame open detection circuit 260 cuts off the connection between the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 from the conductive state when about 10 ms has passed since the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 was opened. It switches to the state and stops the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. As a result, the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 is energized for about 10 ms, and a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262.

In the door opening detection circuit 260, an LMC555 is used for the timer IC1 to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14, and realize a circuit in which the photocoupler PR1 is energized for about 10 ms. It is not limited. That is, by using another integrated circuit or the like for the timer IC 1, a circuit that generates one pulse signal for one opening of the inner frame 12 or one opening of the front frame 14 is realized. The photocoupler PR1 may be energized for a predetermined period based on the pulse signal.

Next, the external output terminal board 261 connected to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and also connected to the hall computer 262 will be described. The external output terminal plate 261 has a function of outputting a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms to the hall computer 262, and is mainly composed of a 1 kΩ resistor R7 and a photocoupler PR1.

The resistor R7 is a resistor that limits the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1, and one end of the resistor R7 is connected to one end of the resistor R1 of the frame opening detection circuit 260, the other end of the switch SW1, and the other end of the switch SW2. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 (the anode terminal of the light emitting diode). The photocoupler PR1 is a current switch composed of a light emitting diode and a light receiving element (phototransistor) that receives light emitted by the light emitting diode. As described above, in the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1, the anode terminal is connected to one end of the resistor R7, and the cathode terminal is connected to the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 260. Further, the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 is connected to the hall computer 262.

Therefore, the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are electrically connected for about 10 ms after the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state (the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state). Then, a current is supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 via the resistor R7, and the light emitting diode emits light for about 10 ms. Then, the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the emitted light and changes the received light of about 10 ms into a pulse signal (electric signal) having a pulse width of about 10 ms. The pulse signal is output to the hall computer 262. The hall computer 262 can store the pulse signal output from the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1. Therefore, it is possible to store the hall computer 262 that the inner frame 12 has been opened or the front frame 14 has been opened.

On the other hand, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off), no voltage is supplied to one end of the resistor R7, so that the light emitting diode which is the primary side of the photocoupler PR1. No current is supplied to the switch. Therefore, the pulse signal is not output from the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 to the hall computer 262.

Here, the advantage of using the photocoupler PR1 for the external output terminal plate 261 that outputs a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 will be described. The photocoupler PR1 has a configuration (light emission) that converts the current supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side into light, receives the light on the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side, and outputs a pulse signal (electric signal). A configuration in which a signal is transmitted from a diode to a light receiving element in one direction). Therefore, an electric signal such as a pulse signal cannot be transmitted from the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side to the light emitting diode on the primary side. As a result, even if the frame opening detection circuit 260 is connected to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 and the hall computer 262 is connected to the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, the hall computer 262 It is not possible to transmit an electric signal such as a pulse signal from the above to a main control device 110 or the like provided with a frame opening detection circuit 260 or a frame opening detection circuit 260. Therefore, by using the photocoupler PR1, it is possible to prevent the transmission of electric signals such as an illegal pulse signal from the hall computer 262 to the frame opening detection circuit 260, the main control device 110, etc., and from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer. There is an advantage that a pulse signal can be transmitted to 262.

Further, in the photocoupler PR1, the light emitting diode on the primary side and the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side are electrically insulated. Therefore, for example, even if the current supplied to the light emitting diode of the photocoupler PR1 contains electrical noise, the electrical noise is not transmitted to the phototransistor on the secondary side. Therefore, by using the photocoupler PR1, the external output terminal plate 261 has an advantage that an accurate pulse signal can be output to the hall computer 262.

As described above, since the frame opening detection circuit 260 is provided with the 0.1F capacitor CD1, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is supplied with power to the pachinko machine 10 and has a DC power supply of DC1 to 12 volts. It operates naturally when a DC voltage is supplied, and further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even if this is not done, the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. Then, when the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 is detected by the frame opening detection circuit 260, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. The pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours.

Here, in general, the amusement park has a crime prevention contract with a private security company, and if there is an intruder into the amusement park, a security guard of the security company immediately rushes to the amusement park. However, since the fraudulent activity is carried out in a short time, when the guards rush in, in most cases, the intruder has already escaped from the playground, and it is not possible to determine which pachinko machine 10 the fraudulent activity was committed to. There was a problem. The pachinko machine 10 that has been cheated must be returned to a normal state, but if it is not known which pachinko machine 10 has been cheated, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 of all the pachinko machines 10 are used. It had to be opened and inspected one by one, and performing this work in the amusement park where a large number of pachinko machines 10 were installed was a considerable amount of hard work.

However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 is detected by the frame opening detection circuit 260, the pulse width from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is reduced. A pulse signal of 10 ms is output. Then, the output pulse signal is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in which the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, by storing the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 and the output time of the output pulse signal, the opening time of the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine 10 or The opening time of the front frame 14 can be detected.

For example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the DC voltage is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261. When the total supply period of the current from the CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 due to the opening of the frame 12 or the front frame 14 is lengthened, or the number of times the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is detected is increased, the capacitor is used. The capacity of the CD1 may be increased (for example, the capacity of the capacitor CD1 is 1F), or the capacitor CD1 may be changed to a secondary battery having a large storage capacity.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, the TRG terminal voltage (external output terminal plate) of the timer IC1 changes according to the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12) and the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14). The relationship between the voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the 261), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1, and the output of the external output terminal plate 261 (the input of the hall computer 262) will be described. FIG. 8 shows the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12), the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14), and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261). ), The timing chart showing the relationship between the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 and the output (input of the hall computer 262) of the external output terminal plate 261.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the switch SW1 is in a conductive state (inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t1, the TRG terminal voltage (external output terminal plate) of the timer IC1 is shown in FIG. 8C. The voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of 261) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt at t1. At this time, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 continues to output a voltage of about 10.6 volts from the OUT terminal until about 10 ms elapses from t1 o'clock. As a result, the current supply to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 7) is started (at t1). Then, as shown in FIG. 8E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t1. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, when about 10 ms elapses from t1 o'clock, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 10.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state 10 ms after t1 o'clock. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t2, the TRG terminal voltage (external output) of the timer IC1 is shown in FIG. 8C. The voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the terminal plate 261) switches from about 11.3 volts to zero volts, and the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 switches from zero volts to about 10.6 volts (at t2). As a result, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be detected again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8 (a), when the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (front frame 14 is in an open state) at t3, the TRG terminal voltage (external) of the timer IC1 is shown in FIG. 8 (c). The voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the output terminal plate 261) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt at t3. At this time, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 continues to output a voltage of about 10.6 volts from the OUT terminal until about 10 ms elapses from t3. As a result, the current supply to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 7) is started (at t3). Then, as shown in FIG. 8E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t3. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, when about 10 ms has elapsed from t3, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 10.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 8 (d). Then, the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state 10 ms after t3 o'clock. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 8A, when the switch SW2 is in the cutoff state (the front frame 14 is in the closed state), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 (external output terminal plate 261) is shown in FIG. 8C. The voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7) switches from about 11.3 volts to zero volts, and the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 switches from zero volts to about 10.6 volts (at t4). As a result, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be detected again.

Finally, a case where the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 8A, the switch SW1 is in a conductive state (inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t5, and further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (front surface) at t6. When the frame 14 is in the open state), as shown in FIG. 8C, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261) is about zero volt at t5. Switch to 11.3 volts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 continues to output a voltage of about 10.6 volts from the OUT terminal until about 10 ms elapses from t5 o'clock. As a result, the current supply to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 7) is started (at t5). Then, as shown in FIG. 8E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t5. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, about 10 ms after t5, as shown in FIG. 8D, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 10.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the current supply to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state 10 ms after t5 o'clock. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the switch SW1 is in the shutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t7, and as shown in FIG. 8B, the switch SW2 is in the shutoff state at t8. (When the front frame 14 is closed), as shown in FIG. 8C, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 (the voltage applied to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261) is about 11.3 volts. At the same time, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 switches from zero volt to about 10.6 volt (at 8 o'clock). As a result, the frame opening detection circuit 260 is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be detected again.

In this way, even when the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state), the timer IC1 keeps the continuity period of the switch SW1. (The length of the opening period of the inner frame 12) and the length of the conduction period of the switch SW2 (the length of the opening period of the front frame 14), either the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state. When about 10 ms has elapsed from the time when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state, the voltage of the OUT terminal is switched from about 10.6 volt to zero volt. As a result, the supply period of the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 becomes about 10 ms.

Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal board 261. That is, when a DC voltage of about 11.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261, the supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is set as the inner frame. It can be limited to about 10 ms per opening of 12 or the front frame 14. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be suppressed to a small value.

Here, since the capacitor CD1 has a capacitance of 0.1 F and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD1 is about 11.3 volts, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 is the capacitance of the capacitor CD1 and the applied voltage of the capacitor CD1. From the product of, it becomes about 1.13C (coulomb). The electric charge of about 1.13C stored in the capacitor CD1 corresponds to about 500 times of current supply when the current supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is about 10 ms. To do. Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened (switch SW1). Even when the front frame 14 is opened (conducting) or the front frame 14 is opened (conducting the switch SW2) many times, the frame opening detection circuit 260 still opens the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (continuing the switch SW1). The continuity of the switch SW2) can be reliably detected up to about 500 times each time, and a pulse signal can be output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262. At this time, when the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened about 500 times, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 decreases, and the current value supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 decreases, but the hole By increasing the detection sensitivity of the pulse signal of the computer 262 (by lowering the threshold value for the amplitude of the pulse signal), the hall computer 262 can store the pulse signal.

In the present embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is electrically connected, a pulse signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. It is not limited to this. That is, when the connection of each component of the main frame opening detection circuit 260 is changed, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, and the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed, the photocoupler PR1 is connected. A current may be supplied for about 10 ms to output a pulse signal from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

However, in the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the present embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is electrically connected, a pulse signal is transmitted from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. Is configured to output, so that the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be quickly detected. Therefore, it is possible to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 before the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the main control device 110 or the game board 13 is cheated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent abnormal operation due to fraudulent acts that occur when power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10.

The pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in which the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, by storing the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 and the output time of the output pulse signal, the opening time of the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine 10 or The opening time of the front frame 14 can be detected.

Further, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, so that the frame open detection circuit 260 The collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e (see FIG. 7) of the transistor TR1 are in a conductive state. However, at this time, the only current flowing through the transistor TR1 is the base current. Both the resistor R3 and the resistor R5 that determine the current value of the base current have a resistance value of 10 kΩ, which is sufficiently larger than the resistance value (1 kΩ) of the resistor R7 that limits the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1. Therefore, the current value of the base current can be kept at about 100 μA (note that the current value supplied to the photocoupler PR1 when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are conducting is about 11.3 mA). Therefore, the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 due to the conduction state of the transistor TR1 can be stopped very slightly.

Further, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, so that the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 Current is consumed through resistors R3 and R4 connected in series between and ground. However, both the resistor R3 and the resistor R4 have a resistance value of 10 kΩ, which is sufficiently larger than the resistance value (1 kΩ) of the resistor R7 that limits the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, the current value flowing from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 to the ground via the resistors R3 and R4 can be kept at about 530 μA. Therefore, the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 by the resistors R3 and R4 can be stopped very slightly.

When the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed (when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off), the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 due to the base current of the transistor TR1 and the resistance R3 and If it is desired to further suppress the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 by the resistor R4, the resistance values of the resistors R3, R4 and R5 may be further increased to more than 10 kΩ.

Further, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off, the charge stored in the capacitor CD1 due to the base current of the transistor TR1 is consumed and the capacitor CD1 by the resistors R3 and R4. If you want to reduce the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor to zero, you can use the following configuration. The male switch SW1b and the male switch SW2b are further provided on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, respectively, and the male switch SW1b and the male switch SW2b arranged on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are provided with two male switches SW1b and two male switches SW2b, respectively. Correspondingly, the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are further provided with the female switch SW1a and the female switch SW2a, respectively, and the female switch SW1a and the female switch SW2a arranged on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are respectively 2 Make them one by one. As a result, one new combination of the male switch SW1b and the female switch SW1a is added to the switch SW1. Similar to the switch SW1, a new combination of the male switch SW2b and the female switch SW2a is added to the switch SW2. Then, the connection between the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 in the frame opening detection circuit 260 and one end of the resistor R3 is disconnected, and the female switch SW1a newly added to the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 after the connection is disconnected is built in. Connect one end of a pair of terminals to SW1c. Then, the other end of the pair of terminals vs. SW1c built in the newly added female switch SW1a is connected to one end of the resistor R3 after the connection is disconnected. Similarly, one end of a pair of terminals paired SW2c built in the newly added female switch SW2a is connected to the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 after the connection is disconnected. Then, the other end of the pair of terminals / SW2c built in the newly added female switch SW2a is connected to one end of the resistor R3 after the connection is disconnected. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 10.6 volts, which is the resistor R3. It is not applied to the resistors R4 and R5, and the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 by the base current of the transistor TR1 and the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 by the resistors R3 and R4 can be reduced to zero. it can. On the contrary, when one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 or both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open (one of the switch SW1 or the switch SW2, or both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2). (When is conducting), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is divided and applied to the resistor R3, resistor R4, resistor R5, resistor R6 and the capacitor CD2 to supply current to the photocoupler PR1. It can be done normally through the resistor R7.

The location where the connection with the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is cut off and the terminal pair SW1c and the terminal pair SW2c are connected is not limited to the above. For example, the other end of the resistor R3 and one end of the resistor R4, the resistor R5, and the capacitor CD2 are cut off, and the other end of the resistor R3 after the connection is disconnected, a pair built in the female switch SW1a newly added. Connect one end of SW1c to the terminal of. Then, the other end of the pair of terminals / SW1c built in the newly added female switch SW1a is connected to one end of the resistor R4, the resistor R5, and the capacitor CD2 after the connection is disconnected. Similarly, one end of a pair of terminals pair SW2c built in the newly added female switch SW2a is connected to the other end of the resistor R3 after the connection is disconnected. Then, the other end of the pair of terminals / SW2c built in the newly added female switch SW2a may be connected to one end of the resistor R4, the resistor R5, and the capacitor CD2 after the connection is disconnected. That is, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed by the newly added male switch SW1b and female switch SW1a and the newly added male switch SW2b and female switch SW2a. (When the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are cut off), while cutting off the continuity between the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 and the ground, one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, or the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 When both are open (one of switch SW1 or switch SW2, or both switch SW1 and switch SW2 are conducting), resistor R3, resistor R4, resistor R5, resistor R6 and The OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC 1 may be divided and applied to the capacitor CD2.

Further, when it is desired to separately store in the hall computer 262 which of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, the following configuration may be used. First, the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261 used in the present embodiment are newly provided one by one, the switch SW2 connected in parallel to the switch SW1 is disconnected, and the disconnected switch SW2 is newly provided. It may be connected to the provided frame opening detection circuit 260. Specifically, one end of the disconnected switch SW2 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, the VDD terminal of the timer IC1, one end of the capacitor CD4, and the RES terminal of the timer IC1 and disconnected. The other end of the switch SW2 may be connected to one end of the capacitor CD5 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, one end of the resistor R1, and one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal board 261. In this way, a frame opening detection circuit 260 and an external output terminal plate 261 are newly provided, and only the switch SW2 is connected to the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, and a switch is connected to the existing frame opening detection circuit 260. By connecting only SW1, when there is continuity of switch SW1 (opening of inner frame 12), the pulse signal output from the existing external output terminal board 261 and conduction of switch SW2 (opening of front frame 14) ), The pulse signal output from the newly provided external output terminal board 261 can be output to the hall computer 262 separately. Here, the hall computer 262 has an input terminal for a pulse signal output from the existing external output terminal plate 261 (for detecting continuity of the switch SW1 (for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12)) and a newly provided external output terminal. Separate from the input terminal of the pulse signal output from the plate 261 (for detecting the continuity of the switch SW2 (for detecting the opening of the front frame 14)). With this configuration, the continuity of the switch SW1 (opening of the inner frame 12) and the continuity of the switch SW2 (opening of the front frame 14) can be distinguished and stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, depending on the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, there was continuity of the switch SW1 (opening of the inner frame 12), conduction of the switch SW2 (opening of the front frame 14), or both. Can be detected accurately.

Further, when power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 10, which of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened is separately stored in the hall computer 262, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are combined. If you want the pachinko machine 10 to notify you when either one is open, the following configuration may be used. First, the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261 used in the present embodiment are newly provided one by one, the switch SW2 connected in parallel to the switch SW1 is disconnected, and the disconnected switch SW2 is newly provided. It is connected to the provided frame opening detection circuit 260. Next, the male switches SW1b and SW2b and the female switches SW1a and SW2a are newly provided on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, respectively. Then, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 becomes conductive by using the newly provided male switches SW1b and SW2b and the female switches SW1a and SW2a, a signal is sent to the MPU 201. It may be configured to be input.

Specifically, one end of the disconnected switch SW2 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, the VDD terminal of the timer IC1, one end of the capacitor CD4, and the RES terminal of the timer IC1 and disconnected. The other end of the switch SW2 may be connected to one end of the capacitor CD5 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, one end of the resistor R1, and one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal board 261. In this way, a frame opening detection circuit 260 and an external output terminal plate 261 are newly provided, and only the switch SW2 is connected to the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, and a switch is connected to the existing frame opening detection circuit 260. By connecting only SW1, when there is continuity of switch SW1 (opening of inner frame 12), the pulse signal output from the existing external output terminal board 261 and conduction of switch SW2 (opening of front frame 14) ), The pulse signal output from the newly provided external output terminal board 261 can be output to the hall computer 262 separately.

Next, the male switch SW1b and the male switch SW2b are further provided on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, respectively, and the male switch SW1b and the male switch SW2b arranged on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are provided with two male switches SW1b and two male switches SW2b, respectively. To do. Correspondingly, the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are further provided with the female switch SW1a and the female switch SW2a, respectively, and the female switch SW1a and the female switch SW2a arranged on the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are respectively 2 Make them one by one. As a result, one new combination of the male switch SW1b and the female switch SW1a is added to the switch SW1. Further, as with the switch SW1, a new combination of the male switch SW2b and the female switch SW2a is added to the switch SW2 as well as the switch SW1. Then, one end of the pair of terminals pair SW1c built in the newly added female switch SW1a is connected to the DC power supply DC1 of the existing frame opening detection circuit 260, and built in the newly added female switch SW1a. The other end of the pair of terminals and SW1c is connected to the input / output port 205 of the MPU 201 via a voltage dividing circuit composed of a resistor. Similarly, one end of the pair of terminals vs. SW2c built into the newly added female switch SW2a is connected to the DC power supply DC1 of the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, and the newly added female type is used. The other end of the pair of terminals vs. SW2c built in the switch SW2a is connected to the input / output port 205 of the MPU 201 via a voltage divider circuit composed of a resistor, and to a port different from the other end of the terminal pair SW1c. Further, in the MPU 201, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conductive, and a voltage of 5 volts (supplied from the DC power supply DC1 by a voltage dividing circuit) for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 The 12-volt voltage is stepped down to 5 volts) or the 5-volt voltage that detects the opening of the inner frame 14 (the voltage divider circuit steps down the 12-volt voltage supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to 5 volts. ) Is input to the input / output port 205, a command indicating that the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is detected is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. At this time, the commands transmitted from the MPU 201 are a command when the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected (hereinafter, referred to as an "inner frame command") and a command when the front frame 14 is opened (hereinafter, "" It is separated from the "front frame command"). Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received each of these commands notifies different modes depending on whether the inner frame command is received or the front frame command is received. For example, the voice output device 226 emits a different warning sound, or the lamp display device 227 is lit differently. Further, the display control device 114 that has received each of these commands displays different modes depending on whether the inner frame command is received or the front frame command is received. For example, when the display control device 114 receives the inner frame command, the third symbol display device 81 displays "the inner frame is open", or when the display control device 114 receives the front frame command. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display "the front frame is open".

In this way, one new combination of the male switch SW1b and the female switch SW1a is added to the switch SW1, and the switch SW2 is also newly combined with the male switch SW2b and the female switch SW2a in the same manner as the switch SW1. When the switch SW1 is electrically connected (when the inner frame 12 is opened), the MPU 201 issues an inner frame command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by using them. Configure to send. Further, when the switch SW2 is electrically connected (when the front frame 14 is opened), the MPU 201 is configured to transmit a front frame command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. With this configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are used to perform notification in different modes depending on whether the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened. Can be done. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is used to accurately determine whether the switch SW1 is conducting (the inner frame 12 is opened), the switch SW2 is conducting (the front frame 14 is opened), or both are present. Can be detected.

Further, a frame opening detection circuit 260 and an external output terminal plate 261 are newly provided, and only the switch SW2 is connected to the newly provided frame opening detection circuit 260, and the switch SW1 is connected to the existing frame opening detection circuit 260. When there is continuity of the switch SW1 (opening of the inner frame 12) by connecting only the pulse signal output from the existing external output terminal plate 261 and the continuity of the switch SW2 (opening of the front frame 14). If there is, the pulse signal output from the newly provided external output terminal board 261 can be output to the hall computer 262 separately. Therefore, depending on the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, there was continuity of the switch SW1 (opening of the inner frame 12), conduction of the switch SW2 (opening of the front frame 14), or both. Can be detected accurately.

In the present embodiment, the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 is output to the hall computer 262, which is installed at a different location from the pachinko machine 10, but the present invention is not limited to this. A dedicated storage device having the function of the hall computer 262 may be provided for each pachinko machine 10, and the dedicated storage device may be arranged on the back side of each pachinko machine 10 provided with the main control device 110 or the like. In this case, better, a dedicated storage device such as the main control device 110, the payout control device 111, and the launch control device 112 is housed in the board box, and the box base and the box cover provided in the board box. And are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connection by caulking structure). Then, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box cover and the box base.

Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9" and one type of petal-shaped sub-symbol formed smaller than the main symbol. Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0,2,4,6,8) are protected almost completely on the front of the wooden box, and attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki and helmets are added. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is completed. It is configured to do. When shifting to the high-probability state (probability variation state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with odd numbers added (corresponding to the "high-probability symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability state after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") are aligned. Here, the high-probability state refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). Further, the normal state (low probability state) refers to a time when the probability is not changed, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. Therefore, a total of 20 third symbols, 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols, are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 scrolls from top to bottom with periodicity. The variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in 3 rows × 3 rows. Five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set in the main display area Dm. Then, in each game, the variable display is stopped in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and at the time of the stop, a combination of jackpot symbols is placed on any of the effective lines (in the present embodiment, If the same main symbol combination) is used, the jackpot movie will be displayed as a jackpot.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are usually covered with a double-door opaque door that is electrically opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown), and sometimes the solenoid is excited to bring the door to the front side. It is a display area that can be visually recognized by the player when it is opened. The notice area Ds2 in the center is a display area that can always be visually recognized without being covered by the door.

As shown in FIG. 9B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are obscured so that the display screen cannot be visually recognized. If one or both of the left and right doors are opened in the middle of the variable display, a moving image is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and the player is in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. It is suggested. In the central notice area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the present embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice production will be performed by appearing. In principle, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds, but the third symbol, characters, and the like are displayed larger across the respective display areas Dm and Ds. Display effects can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter. C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for the fluctuation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is the execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 12), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the updated value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. It is appropriately stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area consisting of one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has access to the first entry port 64. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored according to the winning timing of the ball.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 738, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is executed. It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12). The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. Stored in the area. The number of random numbers that will be big hits is set for two types, low probability and high probability. The number of random numbers that will be big hits at low probability is 2, and the value is "373,727". The number of random numbers that are big hits at high probability is 14, and the values are "59,109,163,211,263,317,367,421,479,523,631,683,733".

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a big hit, and in the present embodiment, one is added in order within the range of 0 to 4, and the maximum value ( That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. Stored in the area. The value of the random number that becomes the high probability state after the big hit is "1, 2, 3", and the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the big hit is "0, 4", and two types of hit types are determined. To. Therefore, the display modes corresponding to the stop symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37 are a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, a high-probability state and a low-probability state, and one type of display mode corresponding to the loss. One of the three display modes in total is selected.

The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the pattern of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. A "front-back off reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 8) that stops, and a "reach other than front-back off" (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) in which the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. , Three stop (effect) patterns with "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 39 to 238) where reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64. Stored in.

Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random values for which the stop pattern is selected. This depends on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, in which area of the holding ball storage area each random value is stored (that is, the number of holdings), and the like. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop pattern.

For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values of 10 to 238 corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. "Completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 0 to 5, and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 6 to 9, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and back" or "reach other than the front and rear". Further, if each random value is not stored in the reserved ball storage area in the low probability state, the disorder corresponding to the "completely off" stop pattern is used to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64. A table with a narrow numerical range of 51 to 238 is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop pattern of "reach other than front-back deviation" is widened to 9 to 50, and "reach other than front-back deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, so that the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 can be easily performed continuously.

Of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one fluctuation type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, reaches the maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0. The other variable type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 240, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter", and CS2 is also referred to as "second variation type counter".

The first variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (middle symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type and the fine symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a wide variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1 or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 12) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

The value of the variation type counter CS3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a "third variable type counter". The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment performs a decorative effect according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, and slides a fluctuating symbol in addition to the fluctuation of the symbol. , A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of a reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the advance notice effect is selected by the variable type counter CS3. Specifically, an effect pattern is selected in which the time required for the advance notice effect is added to the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time is subtracted in order to shorten the variable display time, or the fluctuation time is not added or subtracted. .. As with the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers for which the effect pattern is selected, and is the current state of the pachinko machine 10 a high probability state? The selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different depending on whether it is in a low probability state or in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random value is stored.

As described above, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 determine the fluctuation time of the symbol variation, and the fluctuation type counter CS3 determines the time to be added or subtracted from the fluctuation time. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol is stopped is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reaches the maximum value (that is, 250), and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Acquired when detected. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 12).

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 11 to 17. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at a 2 ms cycle in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first explained, and then the start-up process is performed. The main process will be described.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. The value is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (the present embodiment). Then, when they reach 738, 4, 238, 250), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

After that, the start winning process (see FIG. 16) accompanying the winning of the first ball opening 64 is executed (S504), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is completed. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch of the ball is turned on on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is the process of determining / off. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Here, the start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

When this start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S601). When it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), whether or not the number N of balls on hold for operation of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). (S602). If there is a prize in the first entry slot 64 and the number of operation-reserved balls N <4 (S602: Yes), the number of operation-reserved balls N is added by 1 (S603), and further updated in step S503. Each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the first free holding area of the holding ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S604). On the other hand, if there is no winning in the first ball opening 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning in the first ball opening 64, the number of pending balls N <4 (S602: No). , S603 and S604 are skipped, the start winning process is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S651) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout launch control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a start-up process when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and the control devices on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are put into an operable state. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104), and if it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process shifts to S110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if it is not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S110 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S110 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S213 in FIG. 12, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S110.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, interrupts are permitted and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the main process executed after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process of a 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). Specifically, the presence / absence of the prize detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 is determined, and if there is the prize detection information, the prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop symbol command, the stop command, the effect time addition command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, each value of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the first 3 The symbol display device 81 executes a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like (S204). The details of the variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the variation processing is completed, the large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of a big hit state (S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 The variable display of the second symbol is carried out on the display unit 83 of. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process is shifted to S201, and each process after S201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the thirth within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are repeatedly updated (S209, S210).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. To do. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Next, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the processing of S207, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 17 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S213), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S207 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S201 to S206, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S201 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the variation processing (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 12). In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N is larger than 0 (S303). If the number of balls on hold for operation N is 0 (S303: No), this process ends as it is. If the number of operation-holding balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the number of operation-holding balls N is subtracted by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the hold ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold ball storage area to the execution area side in order, and the hold first area → execution area, hold second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd area, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area. After the data shift processing, the fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S307). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3, and the fluctuation time is determined. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is used. Turn off and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn on the blue LED. A display mode is set in which the red LED is turned on as well as turned off.

The variation processing is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). In the setting of the stop symbol, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit, the symbol that becomes a high probability state after the big hit is determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the symbol is in a low probability state. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when the high probability state is reached after the big hit, the green LED is turned on when the low probability state is reached, and the blue LED is turned on when the probability is off. .. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S309, the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped in order to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. The command is set (S310). Upon receiving this stop command, the voice lamp control device 113 gives a stop instruction to the display control device 114. The fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 stops when the fluctuation time elapses, and when the stop command is received, the fluctuation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends.

Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S306) executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 13). In the fluctuation start processing (S306), first, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, "373,727" out of the numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1 is the winning value at the time of normal low probability, and "59,109,163,21,263,317,367" at the time of high probability. 421,479,523,631,683,733 ”is the winning value.

When it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S402). ). In the process of S402, whether to shift to the high probability state or the low probability state after the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit by the process of S402. Of the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first type counter C2, in the case of "0,4", the state shifts to the low probability state, and in the case of "1,2,3", the state shifts to the high probability state. ..

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S403). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. To. At this time, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and the rough symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are performed based on the values of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time is determined, and the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (middle symbol Z2 in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. decide.

The relationship between the numerical value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time and the relationship between the numerical value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set by using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and is set only by the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set with both values of both variable type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variable type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

If it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area. It is set whether the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is a front-rear reach, a reach other than the front-rear reach, or a complete loss. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is set according to whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state, and the number of pending operations N. The tables are set differently.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the disengaged symbol. Is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S403, the values of the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are confirmed, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are confirmed based on the values of the first variable type counter CS1. The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as, etc. is determined, and the fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (middle symbol Z2 in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 (in other words). For example, the number of variable symbols) is determined.

When the processing of S403 or the processing of S405 is completed, the effect time to be added or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, addition / subtraction of the effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display is performed. The fluctuation time of the device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the addition / subtraction of the effect time is determined by setting the variation display time to 2 when the variation display time is not changed and when the variation display time is added by 1 second according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3. When adding seconds, four types of addition values are determined, one is when the fluctuation display time is subtracted by 1 second.

When the variable display time is added or subtracted, the third symbol display device 81 has a notice effect in which the expected value of the jackpot is high (for example, a slip effect in which the variable time of the variable symbol is made longer than usual and accompanied by slippage. An effect of displaying the notice character, an effect of making the fluctuation time of the fluctuation symbol of 1 shorter than usual and immediately stopping, etc.) is performed. Further, when the value of the random number counter C1 per first is a big hit, the probability that the addition value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by checking the advance notice effect. Can be done.

Next, the fluctuation pattern command is set according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S403 or S405 (S407), and the stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404. (S408). Then, the effect time addition command is set according to the effect time addition value determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the variation process.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (see FIG. 5B), the frame open detection is detected. The circuit 260 supplies a current to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261 until about 10 ms elapses (for about 10 ms) after the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. Then, a current is supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 provided on the external output terminal plate 261 via the resistor R7, and the light emitting diode emits light for about 10 ms. Then, when the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the light of the light emitting diode, the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the light of about 10 ms in pulse width. Converts a pulse signal (electrical signal) of about 10 ms and outputs the pulse signal to the hall computer 262. The output pulse signal is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by using the frame opening detection circuit 260 and the external output terminal plate 261, it is possible to store the hall computer 262 that the inner frame 12 has been opened or the front frame 14 has been opened. The hall computer 262 has been operated for 24 hours. Therefore, in the frame opening detection circuit 260, the pulse signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 and the time when the pulse signal is output, that is, the opening time of the inner frame 12 and the opening time of the front frame 14 is also the hall computer. It can be stored in 262.

Further, since the frame opening detection circuit 260 is provided with a 0.1F capacitor CD1, the frame opening detection circuit 260 supplies power to the pachinko machine 10 and has a DC voltage of 12 volts from the DC power supply DC1. When is supplied, it operates naturally, and further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even if there is no such case, the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. Therefore, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. can do.

Next, the pachinko machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is obtained by changing the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to a frame opening detection circuit 270 having a different configuration. The frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment simplifies the circuit configuration with respect to the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment. Specifically, the frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment removes the timer IC1, the resistors R1 to R3, and the capacitors CD3 to CD5 from the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment, and the capacitors CD1 have different capacities. The circuit configuration is simplified by changing to the capacitor CD6 and changing the connection of each component.

According to the frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment, a high signal whose output period fluctuates according to the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be output to the hall computer 262, so that the inner frame 12 can be output. Alternatively, in addition to being able to detect the opening of the front frame 14, it is also possible to detect the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14.

FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment. In FIG. 7, the same parts as the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same numbers, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

The capacitor CD6 is obtained by changing the capacitance of the capacitor CD1 used in the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment from 0.1F (farad) to 1F (farad). The capacitor CD6 is a component that functions as a rechargeable battery like the capacitor CD1 of the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment. One end of the capacitor CD6 is connected to the cathode of the diode D1, and the other end of the capacitor CD6 is grounded. There is.

Similar to the capacitor CD1 (see FIG. 7) described above, this capacitor CD6 is supplied with power to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, and when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. It is obtained by the product of the capacitance 1F of the capacitor CD6 and the DC voltage applied to the capacitor CD6 (about 11.3 volts obtained by subtracting the voltage drop 0.7 volt at the diode D1 from the 12 volt supplied from the DC power supply DC1). Stores charge.

On the other hand, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the capacitor CD6 is used. , A DC voltage (about 11.3 volts) based on the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD6 is supplied to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal plate 261.

Specifically, since the capacitor CD6 has a capacitance of 1F (farad) and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD6 is about 11.3 volts, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD6 is the capacitance of the capacitor CD6 and the capacitor CD6. From the product of the applied voltages, it becomes about 11.3 C (Coulomb). The electric charge of about 11.3C stored in the capacitor CD6 is about 10 minutes in the output period of the high signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. Therefore, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the outside. The frame opening detection circuit 270 can detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 until the total output period of the high signal output from the output terminal plate 261 is about 10 minutes. Further, the frame opening detection circuit 270 can also detect the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. When the total output period of opening the inner frame 12 or opening the front frame 14 is close to about 10 minutes, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD6 decreases, and the current value supplied from the capacitor CD6 to the photocoupler PR1 decreases. However, by increasing the detection sensitivity of the high signal of the hall computer 262 (by lowering the threshold value for the amplitude of the high signal), the hall computer 262 can store the high signal.

In this way, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, it naturally operates, and further, for example, the business hours of the amusement park. Is completed, the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is cut off, and even when the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the frame opening detection circuit 270 has 1F ( Since the capacitor CD6 of Farad) is provided, the frame opening detection circuit 270 can detect the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14. A cathode terminal of a diode D1 is connected to one end of the capacitor CD6, and since this diode D1 functions to prevent backflow of current, direct current is applied from the capacitor CD6 to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal plate 261. Even when a voltage (about 11.3 volts) is supplied, the DC voltage is not applied to the DC power supply DC1 and the DC power supply DC1 is not damaged. In this embodiment, the capacitor CD6 is used as a component for supplying the DC voltage to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal board 261 when the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the capacitor CD6 may be a secondary battery (rechargeable battery) having a larger storage capacity or a primary battery that does not need to be charged.

One end of the capacitor CD6 is connected to one end of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, and is also connected to one end of the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. One end of the resistor R9 is connected to the other ends of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2. One end of the capacitor CD2, one end of the resistor R4, and one end of the internal resistance R5 of the transistor TR1 are connected to the other end of the resistor R9.

By this connection, one of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 (one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14), or both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state). Since a DC voltage is supplied to the resistor R4 during a certain period, the terminals between the collector terminal c of the transistor TR1 and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 become conductive. Then, during this period, a current is supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 via the resistor R7 of the external output terminal plate 261. As a result, one of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 (one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14), or both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state). ) During the period, a high signal is output from the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 to the hall computer 262. Therefore, according to the frame opening detection circuit 270 of the second embodiment, since the frame opening detection circuit 270 is provided with the capacitor CD6 on the 1st floor (Farad), the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment can be supplied. Even when the DC power supply DC1 is cut off and a DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied, a high signal whose output period fluctuates according to the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is transmitted to the external output terminal board 261. Can be output to the hall computer 262. Therefore, in addition to being able to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, it is also possible to detect the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. The hall computer 262 has been operated for 24 hours. Therefore, in the frame opening detection circuit 270, the high signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 and the time when the high signal is output, that is, the opening time of the inner frame 12 and the opening time of the front frame 14 is also the hall computer. It can be stored in 262.

Further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal board 261. That is, when a DC voltage of about 11.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD6 to the frame open detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal plate 261, the supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD6 to the photocoupler PR1 is set as the inner frame. It can be kept in the period when the 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be suppressed to a small value.

For example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off and the DC voltage is supplied from the capacitor CD6 to the frame opening detection circuit 270 and the external output terminal plate 261, the inner frame When the total supply period of current from the capacitor CD6 to the photocoupler PR1 due to the opening of the 12 or the front frame 14 is lengthened, or the number of times the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is detected is increased, the capacitor CD6 (For example, the capacity of the capacitor CD6 is 10F), or the capacitor CD6 may be changed to a secondary battery having a large storage capacity.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270 that changes according to the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12) and the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14) (FIG. 19). 18) and the output of the external output terminal board 261 (input of the hall computer 262) will be described. FIG. 19 shows the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12), the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14), the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270, and the output of the external output terminal plate 261 (the hall computer 262). It is a timing chart showing the relationship of input). It should be noted that each time from t1 o'clock to t8 o'clock shown in FIG. 19 is the same as each time from t1 o'clock to t8 o'clock shown in the timing chart of the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. is there.

As shown in FIG. 19 (a), when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t1, the frame open detection circuit 270 is followed as shown in FIG. 19 (c). The voltage of A (see FIG. 18) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt (at t1). Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the low state to the high state (t1). Time). As a result, the output of a high signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t2, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270 is as shown in FIG. 19C. Switch from about 11.3 volts to zero volts (at t2). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state (at t2).

The switching of the output of the external output terminal board 261 becomes a high signal, and the high signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262 from t1 o'clock to t2 o'clock. That is, a high signal having a pulse width of the output period from t1 to t2 is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19 (a), when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t3, the frame is opened as shown in FIG. 19 (c) following this. The voltage of A in the detection circuit 270 (see FIG. 18) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt (at t3). Then, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the low state to the high state (t3). Time). As a result, the output of a high signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t4, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270 is as shown in FIG. 19C. Switch from about 11.3 volts to zero volts (at t4). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state (at t4).

The switching of the output of the external output terminal board 261 becomes a high signal, and the high signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262 from t3 o'clock to t4 o'clock. That is, a high signal having a pulse width of the output period from t3 to t4 is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

Finally, a case where the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the switch SW1 is in a conductive state (inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t5, and further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (front surface) at t6. When the frame 14 is in the open state), as shown in FIG. 19C, the voltage of A of the frame open detection circuit 270 (see FIG. 18) switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt at t5. Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 19 (d), as shown in FIG. 19 (d), the output of the external output terminal board 261 switches from the low state to the high state (at 5 o'clock). As a result, the output of a high signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19A, the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t7, and as shown in FIG. 19B, the switch SW2 is in the shutoff state at t8. When (the front frame 14 is in the closed state), as shown in FIG. 19C, the voltage of A of the frame opening detection circuit 270 switches from zero volt to about 11.3 volt at t8. Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 19D, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state (at 8 o'clock).

The switching of the output of the external output terminal board 261 becomes a high signal, and the high signal is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262 from t5 o'clock to t8 o'clock. That is, a high signal having a pulse width of the output period from t5 to t8 is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

In this way, when the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the open state), in the frame open detection circuit 270, either the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (inner frame). External from the time when either 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state until both the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are in the cutoff state (both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are in the closed state). A high signal can be output from the output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262. Therefore, in addition to being able to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have been opened since either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 was opened. It is possible to detect the opening period until the is closed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, since the frame opening detection circuit 270 is provided with the capacitor CD6 on the 1st floor (farad), the power supply to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment is cut off. Even when a DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the frame opening detection circuit 270 provides a high signal whose output period fluctuates according to the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. It can be output to the hall computer 262. Then, it is possible to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 by storing the high signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 and the output period of the output high signal. In addition to being able to, the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can also be detected. Further, the high signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened can be identified by the high signal stored in the hall computer 262. Furthermore, by storing the high signal output from the external output terminal board 261 and the output time of the output high signal in the hall computer 262, the opening time or the front surface of the specified pachinko machine inner frame 12 is stored. The opening time of the frame 14 can also be detected.

Next, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. The pachinko machine of the third embodiment is obtained by changing the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment to a frame opening detection circuit 280 having a different configuration. The frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment simplifies the circuit configuration with respect to the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment. Specifically, the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment removes the resistor R2, the capacitor CD4 and CD5 from the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment, and removes the resistor R1, the capacitor CD3, the resistor R7, and the switch SW1. And, each connection of the switch SW2 is changed, the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator, and the integrator circuit 281 composed of the resistor 10 and the capacitor CD7 is connected to the front stage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 to configure the circuit. Is a simplification of. Then, the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment outputs the mode of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 and the OUT terminal of the timer IC 1 to the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment. This is a modification of the voltage mode.

According to the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment, the integrator circuit 281 keeps the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 constant regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. By setting the period (about 2 ms), the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is set to be larger than the period (about 10 ms) in which the voltage of about 9.6 volts is output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1. Can be adjusted short. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is limited to about 10 ms for each opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. be able to. Therefore, the frame opening detection circuit 280 can simplify the circuit configuration as compared with the frame opening detection circuit 260, and the period during which a voltage of about 9.6 volts is output from the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is limited to about 10 ms. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be further suppressed to be smaller than that of the frame opening detection circuit 260.

FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment. In FIG. 7, the same parts as the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment described above are designated by the same numbers, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

When the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, one end of the capacitor CD1 that supplies the DC voltage to the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal board 261 It is connected to one end of the 100 kΩ resistor R10, and is also connected to the VDD terminal of the timer IC1, one end of the 100 KΩ resistor R1a, the RES terminal of the timer IC 1, and one end of the 1 KΩ resistor R7a.

The other end of the resistor R1a is connected to one end of the 0.1 μF capacitor CD3a, and is also connected to the DCH terminal of the timer IC1 and the TH terminal of the timer IC1. The other end of the capacitor CD3a is grounded. By connecting the capacitor CD3a and the resistor R1a, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 of the timer IC1 is opened, so that the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is applied. When the voltage drops to zero volt, it functions as a monostable multivibrator that raises the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt for about 10 ms. The period for raising the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt is about 10 ms, which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R1a (100 kΩ) and the capacitance value of the capacitor CD3a (0.1 μF). It is determined by a certain time constant.

The resistor R10 is a resistor that stabilizes the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1, and is a resistor that constitutes the integrating circuit 281 with the capacitor CD7. The other end of the resistor R10 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode D2, the cathode terminal of the diode D2 is connected to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, and the Zener voltage limiting voltage (Zener voltage) is about 10.5 volts. It is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode D3, one end of each of the switches SW1 and the switch SW2 connected in parallel. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is about 11.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1. The voltage drop at the resistor R10 is about 0.3 volt, and the voltage drop at the diode D2 is about 0.7 volt, which is subtracted from the voltage of about 10.3 volt.

The 0.02 μF capacitor CD7 is a capacitor that constitutes an integrating circuit 281 with a resistor R10 and controls the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. The other ends of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are connected to one end of the capacitor CD7, and the other end of the capacitor CD7 is grounded. The integrating circuit 281 composed of the capacitor CD7 and the resistor R10 is applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 when the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 becomes conductive due to the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 being opened. It is a circuit that lowers the voltage of about 10.3 volt to zero volt and returns the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to about 10.3 volt again about 2 ms after the lowering.

Specifically, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted according to the opening, a voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 is applied to the capacitor CD7. The application is started, and the charging of the capacitor CD7 is started. At the start of charging, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 momentarily becomes zero volt, so that the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 momentarily becomes zero volt. Then, as the capacitor CD7 is charged, the capacitor CD7 raises the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, and finally controls the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 to about 10.3 volts. It is.

The period until the capacitor CD7 is fully charged, that is, the voltage of about 10.3 volts applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt, and the voltage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops from that drop. The period of about 2 ms until the voltage returns to about 10.3 volt is determined by the time constant which is the product of the resistance value of the resistor R10 (100 kΩ) and the capacitance value of the capacitor CD7 (0.02 μF).

In this way, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops, and the period (about 2 ms) from the fall until the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns to about 10.3 volts is the integrator circuit 281. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is adjusted to a period shorter than the period (about 10 ms) in which the voltage rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. By changing the resistance value of the resistor R10 and the capacitance value of the capacitor CD7, the voltage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to about 10.3 volts after the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops. The period until the timer IC1 returns to the value can be freely changed within about 10 ms, which is the period until the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt.

Here, the monostable multi-vibrator does not normally output a signal from the output terminal unless the input period of the signal input to the input terminal is shorter than the output period of the signal output from the output terminal (from the output terminal). The signal continues to be output). Therefore, when the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator without using the integrating circuit 281, the timer IC1 is longer than the period in which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. The period until the TRG terminal voltage of the above returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again, that is, the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 (conduction period of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2) must be short. However, since it is completely unpredictable how long the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 will be, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 have a longer voltage than the period when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. In order to keep the opening period of the front frame 14 always short, it is necessary to set the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt to a period with sufficient margin. For example, if the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is predicted to be from several tens of seconds to several minutes, the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt is sufficiently sufficient. Must be set from a few minutes to a few tens of minutes. Then, during this set period, the DC voltage is continuously supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal plate 261, so that the capacitor CD1 is significantly consumed. Therefore, in order to make the timer IC1 function as a monostable multivibrator without using the integrating circuit 281 and further suppress the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1, a special circuit configuration is required. there were.

However, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened by providing the integrating circuit 281 in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, the timer IC1 is irrespective of the opening period (the conduction period of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2). Adjust the period from when the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to about 10.3 volts until it returns to about 10.3 volts shorter than the period when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volts to about 9.6 volts. can do. In this way, the integrator circuit 281 makes the timer IC1 normal by setting the fall period of the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. By operating the timer IC1, the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt can be limited to about 10 ms.

Then, when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt for about 10 ms, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 conduct for about 10 ms, and pass through the resistor R7a. A current is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 for about 10 ms. As a result, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 for each opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. In this way, even if the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator, the integration circuit 281 is provided in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 to suppress the consumption of the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 and is special. The output period of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms without adopting a simple circuit configuration.

The TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode D3 having a limiting voltage (Zener voltage) of about 10.5 volts, and the ground is connected to the anode terminal of the Zener diode D3. In this Zener diode D3, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 and the voltage supplied from the capacitor CD1 are superimposed. This is an element that prevents an overvoltage (for example, a voltage of 12.3 volts) having a magnitude that destroys the timer IC1 from being applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Specifically, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted, and the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is returned to the inner frame 12 or the front frame within a relatively short period of time. When the next opening of 14 is performed and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted, the electric charge is discharged from the other end side to the one end side of the switch SW1 or the switch SW2. The voltage of about 10.3 volts discharged from the capacitor CD7 and the voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 are superimposed, and an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC1 is applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Can be applied. However, since the Zener diode D3 having a limiting voltage (Zener voltage) of about 10.5 volts is connected between the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 and the ground, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is increased. The maximum value is about 10.5 volts, and an overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1 is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. As described above, by using the Zener diode D3 having a simple structure and being inexpensive, it is possible to prevent an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC1 from being applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 and prevent damage to the timer IC1. it can.

As described above, since the limiting depressurization (Zener voltage) of the Zener diode D3 is about 10.5 volts, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are closed, and the switch SW1 and the switch SW2 are shut off. In that case, the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 does not flow to the ground via the Zener diode D3, and the charge of the capacitor CD1 is not consumed. Further, the cathode terminal of the diode D2 is connected to one end of the switch SW1 and the switch SW2, and since this diode D2 exerts a current backflow prevention function, the voltage of about 10.3 volts discharged from the capacitor CD7. However, it is applied to the VDD terminals of the capacitor CD1 and the timer IC1 so that they are not damaged.

As described above, in the timer IC1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is conducted, and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt. Then, for about 10 ms from this fall, it functions as a monostable multivibrator that raises the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. Then, by providing the integrating circuit 281 in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the timer IC 1 can be opened regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. Adjust the period from when the voltage applied to the TRG terminal drops to about 10.3 volts until it returns to about 10.3 volts, which is shorter than the period when the voltage at the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volts to about 9.6 volts. Can be done. In this way, the integrator circuit 281 sets the fall period of the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the open period of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, thereby forming a monostable multivibrator. The functioning timer IC1 can be operated normally, and the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt can be limited to about 10 ms. As a result, the period during which the current is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 can be limited to about 10 ms, and the output period of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms. it can.

Further, since the frame opening detection circuit 280 is provided with a 0.1F capacitor CD1, the frame opening detection circuit 280 supplies power to the pachinko machine, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is applied from the DC power supply DC1. If it is supplied, it naturally operates, and further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even so, the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. Then, when the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14 is detected by the frame opening detection circuit 280, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is transmitted from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 for each detection. Can be output. The pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, by storing the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 and the output time of the output pulse signal, the opening time or the front surface of the specified pachinko machine inner frame 12 is stored. The opening time of the frame 14 can be detected.

In the door opening detection circuit 280, an LMC555 is used for the timer IC1 to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the opening of the front frame 14, and realize a circuit in which the photocoupler PR1 is energized for about 10 ms. It is not limited. That is, by using another integrated circuit or the like for the timer IC 1, a circuit that generates one pulse signal for one opening of the inner frame 12 or one opening of the front frame 14 is realized. The photocoupler PR1 may be energized for a predetermined period based on the pulse signal.

Further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off and the DC voltage is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal plate 261, the inner frame When the total supply period of the current from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 due to the opening of the 12 or the front frame 14 is lengthened, or the number of times the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is detected is increased, the capacitor CD1 (For example, the capacity of the capacitor CD1 is 1F), or the capacitor CD1 may be changed to a secondary battery having a large storage capacity.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 that changes according to the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12) and the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14), and the timer IC1 The relationship between the OUT terminal voltage and the output of the external output terminal board 261 (input of the hall computer 262) will be described. FIG. 21 shows the state of the switch SW1 (the state of the inner frame 12), the state of the switch SW2 (the state of the front frame 14), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1, and the output of the external output terminal plate 261 (the state of the external output terminal plate 261). It is a timing chart which showed the relationship (input of a hall computer 262). It should be noted that each time from t1 o'clock to t8 o'clock shown in FIG. 21 is the same as each time from t1 o'clock to t8 o'clock shown in the timing chart of the frame opening detection circuit 260 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. is there.

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the switch SW1 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t1, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 21C, the timer IC1 The TRG terminal voltage drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (at t1). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 21D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at t1). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are conducted, and the current supply is started to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 20). (At t1). Then, as shown in FIG. 21E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t1. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), when about 2 ms elapses from t1, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t1 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, when about 10 ms elapses from t1 o'clock, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 21 (d). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state after about 10 ms has elapsed from t1 o'clock, as shown in FIG. 21 (e). As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the switch SW1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t2, the frame opening detection circuit 280 again detects the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. It is set to the possible state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the switch SW2 becomes conductive (the front frame 14 is in the open state) at t3, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 21 (c), charging is started. The TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (at t3). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 21D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at t3). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are conducted, and the current supply is started to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 20). (T3 o'clock). Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t3. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

The electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 between t1 and t2 is instantaneously completed to be discharged via the Zener diode D3 at t3. The discharge period of the capacitor CD7 is a period much smaller than about 2 ms, when the voltage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 changes from about 10.3 volts to zero volts and becomes about 10.3 volts again, so that the TRG of the timer IC1 It does not significantly affect the voltage applied to the terminals. Further, in addition to this discharge, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 from t1 to t2 is also discharged by the self-discharge of the capacitor CD7.

Further, at t3, a voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 and a voltage of about 10.3 volts associated with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 are superimposed on the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. An overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1 can be applied. However, since the Zener diode D3 having a limiting voltage (Zener voltage) of about 10.5 volts is connected to the front stage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, the maximum value of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is An overvoltage of about 10.5 volts, which is large enough to destroy the timer IC1, is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21C, when about 2 ms elapses from t3, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t3 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, when about 10 ms elapses from t3, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 21 (d). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 21 (e) when about 10 ms elapses from t3 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the switch SW2 is shut off (the front frame 14 is closed) at t4, the frame opening detection circuit 280 again detects the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. It is set to the possible state.

Finally, a case where the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the switch SW1 is in a conductive state (inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t5, and further, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (front surface) at t6. When the frame 14 is in the open state), charging of the capacitor CD7 is started at t5, and as shown in FIG. 21 (c), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (t5). Time). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 21D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at t5). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are conducted, and the current supply is started to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 (see FIG. 20). (T5 o'clock). Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 is cut from the low state to the high state at t5. It changes. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 to the hall computer 262 is started.

The electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 between t3 and t4 is instantaneously completed to be discharged via the Zener diode D3 at t5, which significantly affects the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. is not. Further, in addition to this discharge, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 from t3 to t4 is also discharged by the self-discharge of the capacitor CD7.

Further, at t5, a voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 and a voltage of about 10.3 volts associated with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 are superimposed on the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. An overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1 can be applied. However, since the maximum value of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 by the Zener diode D3 is about 10.5 volts, an overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1 is applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. There is no.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21C, when about 2 ms elapses from t5, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t5 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t5, as shown in FIG. 21D, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the external output terminal plate 261 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the external output terminal plate 261 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 21 (e) when about 10 ms elapses from t5 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the external output terminal plate 261 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the switch SW1 is in the shut-off state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t7, and the switch SW2 is in the shut-off state at t8 as shown in FIG. 21 (b). When (the front frame 14 is in the closed state), the frame opening detection circuit 280 is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be detected again.

In this way, even if the switch SW2 is in the conductive state (the front frame 14 is in the open state) when the switch SW1 is in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state), the timer IC1 keeps the continuity period of the switch SW1. Regardless of the (opening period of the inner frame 12) and the conduction period of the switch SW2 (opening period of the front frame 14), either the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in a conductive state (either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14). Is in the open state), and when about 10 ms elapses after the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts, the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is switched from about 9.6 volts to zero volts. As a result, the supply period of the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 261 becomes about 10 ms.

Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC power supply DC1 to the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied to the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal board 261. When a DC voltage of about 10.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the frame open detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal plate 261, the supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is set to the inner frame 12 Alternatively, it can be limited to about 10 ms per opening of the front frame 14. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be suppressed to a small value.

Here, since the capacitor CD1 has a capacitance of 0.1 F and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD1 is about 11.3 volts, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 is the capacitance of the capacitor CD1 and the applied voltage of the capacitor CD1. From the product of, it becomes about 1.13C (coulomb). The electric charge of about 1.13C stored in the capacitor CD1 corresponds to about 500 times of current supply when the current supply period of the current supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 is about 10 ms. To do. Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened (the continuity of the switch SW1). ) Or the front frame 14 is opened (conduction of the switch SW2) many times, the frame opening detection circuit 280 opens the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (conduction of the switch SW1 or the switch). (Conduction of SW2) can be reliably detected up to about 500 times each time, and a pulse signal can be output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. At this time, when the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened about 500 times, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD1 decreases, and the current value supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 decreases, but the hole By increasing the detection sensitivity of the pulse signal of the computer 262 (by lowering the threshold value for the amplitude of the pulse signal), the hall computer 262 can store the pulse signal.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is in the open state and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is in the conductive state, the integrator circuit 281 causes the inner frame. Regardless of the opening period of 12 or the front frame 14, the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 is set to a fixed period (about 2 ms). Then, the timer IC1 functioning as a monostable multivibrator operates normally, and the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 is reduced from zero volt until about 10 ms elapses after the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt. Start up to 9.6 volts. As a result, a current is supplied to the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 provided on the external output terminal plate 261 via the resistor R7a, and the light emitting diode emits light for about 10 ms. Then, when the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the light of the light emitting diode, the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1 receives the light of about 10 ms in pulse width. Converts a pulse signal (electrical signal) of about 10 ms and outputs the pulse signal to the hall computer 262. The output pulse signal is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by using the frame opening detection circuit 280 provided with the integrating circuit 281 and the external output terminal plate 261, it is possible to make the hall computer 262 memorize that the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened. it can. The hall computer 262 has been operated for 24 hours. Therefore, in the frame opening detection circuit 280, the pulse signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 and the time when the pulse signal is output, that is, the opening time of the inner frame 12 and the opening time of the front frame 14 is also the hall computer. It can be stored in 262.

Further, since the frame opening detection circuit 280 is provided with a 0.1F capacitor CD1, the frame opening detection circuit 280 supplies power to the pachinko machine, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is applied from the DC power supply DC1. If it is supplied, it naturally operates, and further, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even so, the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected. Therefore, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, a pulse signal having a pulse width of about 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. be able to.

In the present embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is electrically connected, a pulse signal is output from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. It is not limited to this. That is, when the connection of each component of the main frame opening detection circuit 280 is changed, the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, and the opened inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed, the photocoupler PR1 is connected. A current may be supplied for about 10 ms to output a pulse signal from the external output terminal board 261 to the hall computer 262.

However, in the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the present embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW1 or the switch SW2 is electrically connected, a pulse signal is transmitted from the external output terminal plate 261 to the hall computer 262. Is configured to output, so that the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be quickly detected. Therefore, it is possible to detect the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 before the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened and the main control device 110 or the game board 13 is cheated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent abnormal operation due to fraudulent activity that occurs when power is supplied to the pachinko machine.

Next, the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 32. In the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is used. When it is released, the pachinko machine 500 is used to separately notify which one is released, and which one is released is separately output to the hall computer 262. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Even if the control of the main control device 110 is stopped, when any of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is opened, which one is opened is separately output to the hall computer 262.

Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame is opened. The pachinko machine 500 can be used to separately notify whether the front frame 14 has been opened, the front frame 14 has been opened, or both have been opened. Further, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the case where the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the case where the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. However, when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, pulse signals can be output separately to the hall computer 262. Therefore, from the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, it is possible to identify whether the inner frame 12 has been opened, the front frame 14 has been opened, or both have been opened.

The internal configuration of the pachinko machine 500 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 500 in a state where the inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are open. In the explanation of FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has switches SW1 (SW1a, SW1b) and switches SW2 (SW2a, SW2b) provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described in FIG. ) Is changed to switch SW3 and switch SW4. Therefore, in FIG. 4, the same parts as the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 are assigned the same numbers, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

A switch SW3 for detecting the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 is provided between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and the opening and closing of the front frame 14 and the opening of the front frame 14 are provided between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14. A switch SW4 for detecting closure is provided. With the switch SW3 and the switch SW4, the opening and closing of the inner frame 12 and the opening and closing of the front frame 14 can be detected separately.

Next, the structures of the switch SW3 and the switch SW4 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the switch SW3 and the switch SW4 have the same structure, the structure of the switch SW3 will be described, and the description of the switch SW4 will be omitted.

FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view of the switch SW3. FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view showing a state (blocking state) of the switch SW3 in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed. Further, FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view showing a state (conduction state) of the switch SW3 in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 23A, the switch SW3 arranged on the surface of the outer frame 11 facing the inner frame 12 has a movable shaft SW3a that comes into contact with the inner frame 12 in a closed state, and a movable shaft thereof. It is composed of conductor plates SW3-1a and SW3-2a made of metal which is a conductive member arranged on SW3a, and metal arranged at opposite positions of the conductor plates SW3-1a and SW3-2a. The pair of terminal plates SW3-1b and SW3-2b, the support plates SW3-1c and SW3-2c for arranging the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b and SW3-2b in the housing SW3b, and the conductor plate SW3, respectively. A pair that is arranged on a surface opposite to the surface facing the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b on -2a and generates an urging force with respect to the conductor plate SW3-2a in the direction toward the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b. Spring SW3c is provided. The conductor plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b constitute the switch SW3-1, and the conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b constitute the switch SW3-2. Therefore, the switch SW3 has two built-in switches, a switch SW3-1 and a switch SW3-2.

As shown in FIG. 23A, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the movable shaft SW3a comes into contact with the inner frame 12, and the movable shaft SW3a is pushed into the housing SW3b. Therefore, the contact between the conductor plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b is hindered, and the contact between the conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b is hindered. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the continuity of both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 is cut off.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23B, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the contact of the movable shaft SW3a with the inner frame 12 is released, so that the conductor is urged by the urging force of the pair of springs SW3c. The plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b come into contact with each other, and the conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b come into contact with each other. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened, both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state.

As described above, both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 built in the housing SW3b are in a cutoff state when the inner frame 12 is closed, while are in a conductive state when the inner frame 12 is open. It becomes. That is, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 have a structure in which the conduction state and the cutoff state operate in conjunction with each other. However, the structure of the switch SW3 is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 23, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are shut off, while the inner frame 12 is closed. The structure may be such that the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state when is open. This also applies to the structure of the switch SW4.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 500. In the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the frame opening detection circuit 260 provided in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above in FIG. 6 is used for an inner frame having a modified circuit configuration. The frame opening detection circuit 290 is changed, and the electrical connection of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 is changed. Then, in the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the external output terminal plate 261 described above in FIG. 6 is changed to an external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame. In addition to this, the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is provided with a new front frame frame opening detection circuit 292 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described in FIG. is there. The pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is provided with an external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame in response to the front frame opening detection circuit 292 newly provided in the main control device 110. Is. Therefore, in FIG. 6, the same parts as the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 are assigned the same numbers, the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

The main control device 110 is provided with an inner frame opening detection circuit 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 by conducting the switches SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2). The inner frame opening detection circuit 290 includes an input / output port 205 which is an input / output port of the MPU 201, a switch SW3 which detects the opening of the inner frame 12, and an outer frame external output configured to be connectable to the hall computer 262. It is connected to the terminal plate 291. An input / output unit that inputs / outputs signals to the switch SW3 and the inner frame openness detection circuit 290 and the connection between the inner frame openness detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal board 291 ( The connection is made via an input / output port different from the input / output port 205 (not shown).

The inner frame open detection circuit 290 supplies the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2) when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. ) Conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, and outputs a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts to the input / output port 205. When this signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 turns on the inner frame opening flag 203a described later, and issues an inner frame opening command indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 via the input / output port 205. Output to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the inner frame opening command turns on the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a described later, outputs the inner frame opening command to the display control device 114, and outputs the inner frame opening command to the voice output device 226 and The lamp display device 227 is used to notify the opening of the inner frame 12. Further, the display control device 114 that has received the inner frame opening command output from the voice lamp control device 113 turns on the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c, which will be described later, and sends a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81. In addition to this, when the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2) conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 290 holes from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262.

On the other hand, the frame opening detection circuit 290 for the inner frame is used, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. When the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2) conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, the signal is not output to the input port 205, and the hole is inserted from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262. The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, the opening of the inner frame 12 can be detected by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262.

Further, the main control device 110 is provided with a front frame opening detection circuit 292 that detects the opening of the front frame 14 by conducting the switches SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2). The front frame opening detection circuit 292 includes an input / output port 205 which is an input / output port of the MPU 201, a switch SW4 which detects the opening of the front frame 14, and an external output for the front frame configured to be connectable to the hall computer 262. It is connected to the terminal plate 293. An input / output unit (input / output) that inputs / outputs signals to the connection between the switch SW4 and the front frame open detection circuit 292 and the connection between the front frame open detection circuit 292 and the front frame external output terminal board 293. The connection is made via an input / output port different from port 205 (not shown).

The front frame opening detection circuit 292 has the same function as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 described above. That is, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) conducts and the front frame 14 When it detects that the switch is open, it outputs a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts to the input / output port 205. When this signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 turns on the front frame opening flag 203b, which will be described later, and issues a front frame opening command indicating the opening of the front frame 14 via the input / output port 205. Output to the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the front frame opening command turns on the front frame opening command reception flag 223b, which will be described later, outputs the front frame opening command to the display control device 114, and outputs the front frame opening command to the voice output device 226 and The lamp display device 227 is used to notify the opening of the front frame 14. Further, the display control device 114 that has received the front frame opening command output from the voice lamp control device 113 turns on the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d, and sends a message indicating the opening of the front frame 14 to the third symbol. It is displayed on the display device 81. In addition to this, the front frame opening detection circuit 292 holes from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 when the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262.

On the other hand, the front frame open detection circuit 292 is used, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1. When the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14, the signal is not output to the input port 205, and the hole is inserted from the front frame external output terminal plate 293. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262. The pulse signal output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, the opening of the front frame 14 can be detected by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262.

Here, the front frame opening detection circuit 292 and the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 are each connected to different input ports of the input / output ports 205. Therefore, the signal output from the front frame opening detection circuit 292 and the signal output from the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 are individually input to the input / output port 205. Therefore, in the MPU 201 mounted on the main control device 110, the signal input to the input / output port 205 is output from the front frame opening detection circuit 292 or the inner frame opening detection circuit 290. It is possible to determine whether the signal is a signal.

Further, the front frame external output terminal plate 293 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 are respectively connected to different input terminals of the hall computer 262. Therefore, the pulse signal output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 and the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 are individually input to the hall computer 262. As a result, the pulse signal output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 and the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 can be individually stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by analyzing the pulse signals individually stored in the hall computer 262, it is possible to detect whether the inner frame 12 has been opened or the front frame 14 has been opened.

As described above, the main control device 110 includes an inner frame opening detection circuit 290 that operates when the inner frame 12 is opened, and a front frame opening detection circuit 292 that operates when the front frame 14 is opened. It is provided separately in. Therefore, when either one or both of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, which one is opened can be determined by the notification performed by the pachinko machine 500, and the hall computer. It can also be discriminated by the pulse signal stored in 262.

The RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with an inner frame opening flag 203a and a front frame opening flag 203b. The inner frame opening flag 203a is a flag indicating an open state or a closed state of the inner frame 12. As described above, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3) is opened. When -2) becomes conductive, a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 to the input / output port 205. When this 5-volt signal is detected by the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on. When the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on, the MPU 201 transmits an inner frame opening command informing the voice lamp control device 113 that the inner frame 12 has been opened.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is closed and the switch SW3 (switch SW3-1 and switch SW3-2) is closed. ) Is interrupted, the signal output of the DC voltage 5 volt from the inner frame open detection circuit 290 to the input / output port 205 is stopped (the output from the inner frame open detection circuit 290 to the input / output port 205 is zero volt. Will be). When the stop of the signal output is detected by the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off. When the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off, the MPU 201 transmits an inner frame closing command informing the voice lamp control device 113 that the inner frame 12 has been closed. In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on, while when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off.

The front frame opening flag 203b is a flag indicating an open state or a closed state of the front frame 14. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the front frame 14 is opened and the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) is turned on. When the conduction occurs, a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the front frame open detection circuit 292 to the input / output port 205. When this 5-volt signal is detected by the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on. When the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on, the MPU 201 transmits a front frame opening command informing the voice lamp control device 113 that the front frame 14 has been opened.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the front frame 14 is closed and the switch SW4 (switch SW4-1 and switch SW4-2) is closed. ) Is interrupted, the signal output of the DC voltage 5 volt from the front frame open detection circuit 292 to the input / output port 205 is stopped (the output from the front frame open detection circuit 292 to the input / output port 205 is zero volt. Will be). When the stop of the signal output is detected by the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off. When the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off, the MPU 201 transmits a front frame closing command informing the voice lamp control device 113 that the front frame 14 has been closed. In this way, when the front frame 14 is opened, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on, while when the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off.

The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with an inner frame opening command receiving flag 223a and a front frame opening command receiving flag 223b. The inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is a flag indicating whether the command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is an inner frame opening command or an inner frame closing command. As described above, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on. , The inner frame opening command is transmitted by the MPU 201 to the voice lamp control device 113. When this inner frame open command is detected by the MPU 221 via the input / output port 225, the inner frame open command reception flag 223a is turned on. When the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned on, the MPU 221 transmits an inner frame opening command indicating that the inner frame 12 has been released to the display control device 114. Further, the MPU 221 notifies the opening of the inner frame 12 by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227.

On the other hand, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off and the sound is heard. An inner frame closing command is transmitted by the MPU 201 to the lamp control device 113. When this inner frame closing command is detected by the MPU 221 via the input / output port 225, the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned off. When the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned off, the MPU 221 transmits an inner frame closing command informing the display control device 114 that the inner frame 12 has been closed. Further, the MPU 221 stops the notification performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the inner frame open command is detected by the MPU 221, the inner frame open command reception flag 223a is turned on, while the inner frame 12 is closed and the inner frame close command is sent to the MPU 221. When it is detected, the inner frame open command reception flag 223a is turned off.

Further, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is a flag indicating whether the command received by the voice lamp control device 113 is a front frame opening command or a front frame closing command. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the front frame 14 is opened, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on to control the voice lamp. A front frame opening command is transmitted by the MPU 201 to the device 113. When this front frame open command is detected by the MPU 221 via the input / output port 225, the front frame open command reception flag 223b is turned on. When the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned on, the MPU 221 transmits a front frame opening command indicating that the front frame 14 has been opened to the display control device 114. Further, the MPU 221 uses the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to notify the opening of the front frame 14.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off and the sound is heard. A front frame closing command is transmitted by the MPU 201 to the lamp control device 113. When this front frame closing command is detected by the MPU 221 via the input / output port 225, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned off. When the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned off, the MPU 221 transmits a front frame closing command informing the display control device 114 that the front frame 14 has been closed. Further, the MPU 221 stops the notification performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In this way, when the front frame 14 is opened and the front frame open command is detected by the MPU 221, the front frame open command reception flag 223b is turned on, while the front frame 14 is closed and the front frame close command is sent to the MPU 221. When detected, the front frame open command reception flag 223b is turned off.

The RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with an effect permission flag 233a, a fluctuation start flag 233b, a display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c, and a display front frame opening command reception flag 233d. The effect permission flag 233a is a flag for permitting the start of display of the third symbol display device 81, and an effect permission command transmitted after the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is transmitted via the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives (when the effect permission command is detected in the MPU 231 via the input port 237), it is turned on. In addition, once the effect permission flag 233a is turned on, the turned-on state is continued.

The fluctuation start flag 233b is a flag for permitting the start of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81, and the display control device 114 sends the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. It is turned on when it is received via the input port 237 (when the MPU 231 detects the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 via the input port 237). The fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off when the fluctuation display is started on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off because, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned on, the fluctuation display is started on the third symbol display device 81. This is because if the fluctuation start flag 233b is not turned off, the fluctuation start processing (process of S1010 in FIG. 31) described later is repeatedly executed, and the normal processing is not executed.

Next, the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c will be described. The display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is a flag indicating whether the command received by the display control device 114 is an inner frame opening command or an inner frame closing command. As described above, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the main control device 110 changes to the voice lamp control device. An inner frame opening command for notifying that the inner frame 12 has been opened is transmitted to the display control device 114 via 113. When this inner frame opening command is detected by the MPU 231 via the input port 237, the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is turned on. When the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is turned on, the MPU 231 displays a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the inner frame 12 is closed, the main control device 110 sets the voice lamp control device 113. An inner frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 to inform that the inner frame 12 has been closed. When this inner frame closing command is detected by the MPU 231 via the input port 237, the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is turned off. When the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c is turned off, the MPU 231 deletes the message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Finally, the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d will be described. The display front frame opening command reception flag 233d is a flag indicating whether the command received by the display control device 114 is a front frame opening command or a front frame closing command. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the front frame 14 is opened, the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113. , A front frame opening command for notifying that the front frame 14 has been opened is transmitted to the display control device 114. When this front frame open command is detected by the MPU 231 via the input port 237, the display front frame open command reception flag 233d is turned on. When the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d is turned on, the MPU 231 displays a message indicating the opening of the front frame 14 on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the front frame 14 is closed, the main control device 110 sets the voice lamp control device 113. A front frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 to inform that the front frame 14 has been closed. When this front frame closing command is detected by the MPU 231 via the input port 237, the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d is turned off. When the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d is turned off, the MPU 231 erases the message indicating the opening of the front frame 14 displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 used in the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. In the frame opening detection circuit 290 for the inner frame, the switch SW2 connected in parallel to the switch SW1 of the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment described above in FIG. 20 is removed, and the switch SW1 is changed to the switch SW3-1. It is composed of a modified inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a and an inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b having a switch SW3-2 that operates in conjunction with the switch SW3-1. The inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a has the same configuration as the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment described above in FIG. 20, except that the switch SW2 is removed and the switch SW1 is changed to the switch SW3-1. Is. Further, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame has the same configuration as the external output terminal plate 261 of the third embodiment described in FIG. 20. Therefore, for the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal board 291, the same parts as the frame opening detection circuit 280 and the external output terminal board 261 described above in FIG. 20 are assigned the same numbers. The explanation is omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

Further, the front frame opening detection circuit 292 includes a front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a (not shown) and a front frame input / output port output circuit 292b, similarly to the configuration of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290. It is composed of (not shown). The terminal plate output circuit 292a for the front frame differs from the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame only when the switch to be connected is changed from the switch SW3-1 to the switch SW4-1. It has the same configuration as the frame terminal board output circuit 290a. That is, the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a has the same function as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290, except that the switch to be connected is different from the inner frame opening detection circuit 290. Similarly, the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b differs from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b only in that the connected switch is changed from switch SW3-2 to switch SW4-2. Others have the same configuration as the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. That is, the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b has the same function as the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, except that the switch to be connected is different from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Further, the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame has the same configuration as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, that is, has the same configuration as the external output terminal plate 261 of the third embodiment described in FIG. is there. Therefore, the description of the front frame open detection circuit 292 (front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a and front frame input / output port output circuit 292b) and the front frame external output terminal plate 293 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the switch SW3-2 used in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, one end of the switch SW3-2 (one end of the terminal plate 3-2b) is the anode of the DC power supply DC1 and the diode D1. While connected to the terminal, the other end of the switch SW3-2 (the other end of the terminal plate 3-2b) is connected to one end of the resistor R11 having a resistance value of 140 kΩ.

The other end of the resistor R11 is connected to one end of the resistor R12 having a resistance value of 100 kΩ and the input / output port 205, and the other end of the resistor R12 is grounded. The resistor R11 and the resistor R12 form a voltage dividing circuit that divides the DC voltage of 12 volts supplied from the DC power supply DC1. Therefore, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive, the DC power supply DC1 sends power. The supplied 12 volt DC voltage is divided by the resistor R11 and the resistor R12. At this time, the DC voltage applied to the resistor R12 becomes about 5 volts. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive, a 5-volt signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205. When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened and provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. When the switch SW3-1 is conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a performs the same operation as that described in the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment of FIG. 20, and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. Outputs a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms to the hall computer 262.

On the other hand, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is closed and provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. When the switch SW3-2 is shut off, no DC voltage is applied to the resistors R11 and R12. Therefore, when the switch SW3 is cut off and the switch SW3-2 is cut off, no signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (input / output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b). The DC voltage input to port 205 will be zero volt). When power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is closed and provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. When the switch SW3-1 is shut off, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a performs the same operation as that described in the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment of FIG. 20, and the inner frame 12 is detected again. It is set to the possible state.

For example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, so that the switch SW3-2 is conducted. Even so, no signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (the DC voltage input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt).

However, power is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a from the capacitor CD1 as described in the frame opening detection circuit 280 of the third embodiment of FIG. 20. Therefore, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the inner frame 12 is opened and provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. When the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a outputs a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262.

As described above, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is used. When the provided switch SW3-2 becomes conductive, a 5-volt signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205. When a 5-volt signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 notifies the opening of the inner frame 12 by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the pachinko machine 500 displays a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is holed from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262.

On the other hand, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, so that the inner frame 12 is opened. Even if the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is conductive, no signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (inner frame input / output). The DC voltage input from the port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt). However, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the power is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a from the capacitor CD1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is connected to the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the hall computer 262.

The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, the hall computer 262 outputs the pulse signal from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, and the output time of the output pulse signal is stored to open the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine. The time can be detected.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened while the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is being performed, the function of outputting the pulse signal to the hall computer 262 and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 are cut off. When the inner frame 12 is opened while the inner frame 12 is being operated, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 can be exhibited by the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a, which is one circuit.

Further, one end of the switch SW3-2 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is connected to the anode terminal of the DC power supply DC1 and the diode D1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned on, the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive and power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Then, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is in the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off, power is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, so that the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 is opened. Even so, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is in a stopped state.

On the other hand, one end of the switch SW3-1 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 via the diode D2 and the resistor R10. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned on, the switch SW3-1 conducts and power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. , The terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame is in the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off, the power supply from the DC power supply DC1 to the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame is stopped, but the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 is conducted. Then, since power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is put into an operating state. Here, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off and power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame, the power is supplied to the input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame. It can be cut off by the diode D1 that exhibits the backflow prevention function. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off, the number of times the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be detected can be increased.

Further, the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame stands up when the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch SW3-1 is conducted, and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt. It functions as a monostable multivibrator that raises the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt for about 10 ms from the drop. Then, by providing the integrating circuit 281 in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 is applied regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12. The period from when the voltage drops to zero volt to when it returns to about 10.3 volt can be adjusted shorter than the period when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. In this way, the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator by setting the falling period of the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 by the integrating circuit 281. Can be operated normally, and the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt can be limited to about 10 ms. As a result, the period during which the current is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 can be limited to about 10 ms, and the output period of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be reduced to about 10 ms. Can be fastened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the terminal plate output for the inner frame changes according to the continuity cutoff state of the switch SW3-1 (open / closed state of the inner frame 12) regardless of the power on / off state of the pachinko machine 500. TRG terminal voltage of timer IC1 of circuit 290a, OUT terminal voltage of timer IC1 of inner frame output circuit 290a, output of external output terminal board 291 for inner frame (input of hall computer 262), pachinko machine 500 The relationship with the output of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, which changes according to the continuity cutoff state (open / closed state of the inner frame 12) of the switch SW3-2 when the power supply of the switch SW3-2 is turned on, will be described. FIG. 26 shows an on / off state of the power supply of the pachinko machine 500 (a state of the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1), a conduction cut state of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 (a state of opening and closing the inner frame 12). The TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a, and the output of the inner frame external output terminal board 291 (input of the hall computer 262). ) And the output of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, which is a timing chart showing the relationship.

As described above, the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a provided in the front frame open detection circuit 292 differs from the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a in that the connected switch is from the switch SW3-1. Only the switch SW4-1 has been changed, and the other parts have the same configuration as the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. Therefore, the operation of the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a is the same as the operation of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a. Further, the input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame differs from the input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame only in the place where the connected switch is changed from the switch SW3-2 to the switch SW4-2. Others have the same configuration as the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Therefore, the operation of the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b is the same as the operation of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Further, since the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame has the same configuration as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, the operation of the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame is the same as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame. Is. Therefore, the description of the operation of the front frame terminal board output circuit 292a, the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b, and the front frame external output terminal board 293 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the power supply of the pachinko machine 500 is on until t11 o'clock (the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is 12 volts until t11 o'clock), and after t11 o'clock, the pachinko machine is in a 12-volt state. The power supply of the machine 500 is turned off (the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 becomes zero volt). Therefore, until t11 o'clock, the power from the DC power supply DC1 is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. Then, after t11 o'clock, the supply of electric power by the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is stopped. However, since the capacitor CD1 is provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a, power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a after t11 o'clock. Therefore, even after t11 o'clock, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is in an operable state.

As shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t9, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the timer The TRG terminal voltage of IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (at 9 o'clock). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 26D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at 9 o'clock). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame are conductive, and the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is connected (see FIG. 25). The current supply is started (at 9 o'clock). Then, as shown in FIG. 26E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is high from the low state at t9. Switch to the state. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 to the hall computer 262 is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t9, DC is applied to the resistors R11 and R12 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. The power from the power supply DC1 is supplied, and the voltage applied to the resistor R12 becomes 5 volts (at 9 o'clock). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), a signal having a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (at t9).

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), when about 2 ms elapses from t9, charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt again. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t9 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t9, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 26 (d). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 26 (e) when about 10 ms elapses from t9 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t10, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a detects the inner frame 12 again. Is set to the possible state. Further, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-2 is in the cutoff state (the inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t10, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is connected to the resistors R11 and R12. The power supply from the DC power supply DC1 is stopped, and the voltage applied to the resistor R12 becomes zero volt (at t10). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the DC voltage 5 volt signal output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is stopped at t10 (inner frame input). Output port The output from the output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 becomes zero volt at t10).

As shown in FIG. 26A, when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is turned off after t11 (when the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 becomes zero volt), the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a and the inner frame The supply of power by the DC power supply DC1 to the input / output port output circuit 290b is stopped. However, even when the power of the pachinko machine 500 is off, the power from the capacitor CD1 is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) at t12, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 26 (c). , The TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts (at 12 o'clock). Then, following this, as shown in FIG. 26D, the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at 12 o'clock). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame are made conductive, and the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is connected (see FIG. 25). The current supply is started (at 12:00). Then, as shown in FIG. 26E, the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is high from the low state at t12. Switch to the state. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 to the hall computer 262 is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26B, even if the switch SW3-2 is in a conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in an open state) at t12, the resistors R11 and R12 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b Since the power from the DC power supply DC1 is not supplied to the resistor (since the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is zero volt), the voltage applied to the resistor R12 is zero volt (at t12). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the signal output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 maintains the stopped state (input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b). The output to output port 205 maintains zero volt).

The electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a between t9 and t10 is instantaneously completed to be discharged at t12 via the Zener diode D3 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a. .. The discharge period of the capacitor CD7 is a period much smaller than about 2 ms, when the voltage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 changes from about 10.3 volts to zero volts and becomes about 10.3 volts again, so that the TRG of the timer IC1 It does not significantly affect the voltage applied to the terminals. Further, in addition to this discharge, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 from t9 to t10 is also discharged by the self-discharge of the capacitor CD7.

Further, at t12, the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a stores a voltage of about 10.3 volts supplied from the capacitor CD1 and the capacitor CD7 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a. A voltage of about 10.3 volts associated with the applied charge can be superimposed to apply an overvoltage large enough to destroy the timer IC1. However, since the Zener diode D3 having a limiting voltage (Zener voltage) of about 10.5 volts is connected to the front stage of the TRG terminal of the timer IC1, the maximum value of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is An overvoltage of about 10.5 volts, which is large enough to destroy the timer IC1, is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), when about 2 ms elapses from t12 o'clock, the charging of the capacitor CD7 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame is completed, and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 starts from zero volt again. Return to about 10.3 volts. However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t12 o'clock), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t12, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 26 (d). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 26 (e) when about 10 ms elapses from t12 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-1 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t13, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a detects the inner frame 12 again. Is set to the possible state. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the switch SW3-2 is in the cutoff state (inner frame 12 is in the closed state) at t13, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is used to power the pachinko machine 500. Is set so that the inner frame 12 can be detected when is turned on.

As described above, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500 and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 (until t11 o'clock), the inner frame 12 is opened and the inner frame is opened. When the switch SW3-1 provided in the terminal plate output circuit 290a is conductive, the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame outputs a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame to the hall computer 262. To do. Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b becomes conductive, a 5-volt signal is transmitted from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205. Is entered.

Further, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off (even after t11 o'clock), the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a Since power is supplied from the capacitor CD1, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a is subjected to. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame to the hall computer 262. However, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off (in the case after t11 o'clock), the DC voltage of the DC power supply DC1 to 12 V is the inner frame. Since it is not supplied to the input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame, even if the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 provided in the input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame conducts, the input / output for the inner frame No signal is output from the port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 (the DC voltage output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt).

As described above, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 500, the function of outputting a signal to the input / output port 205 and the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262, In addition, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 is added to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290, which is one circuit. Can be demonstrated in.

When the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the conductive state (the inner frame 12 is in the open state), the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame is in the conductive period of the switch SW3-1 (inner frame 12). Regardless of the opening period), when the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive (the inner frame 12 is in the open state) and the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volt to zero volt, about 10 ms elapses, the timer IC1 The voltage of the OUT terminal of is switched from about 9.6 volts to zero volts. As a result, the supply period of the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is about 10 ms.

Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine is cut off, and the DC power supply DC1 to 12 volt DC voltage is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. Is not supplied, that is, when a DC voltage of about 10.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1. The supply period of the supplied current can be limited to about 10 ms per opening of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 can be suppressed to a small value.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 27 and 28, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, each control process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is the main process among the control processes executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment ( (See FIG. 12) and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) are changed, and the other control processes are the same as the control processes executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. Is. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the main process shown in FIG. 27 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 28 will be described, and the description of other control processes will be omitted. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 28) will be described first, and then the main process (FIG. 27) will be described.

The timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. The timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 28 is the timer interrupt process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. A process for setting the inner frame opening flag 203a and the front frame opening flag 203b to be turned on or off (processes S506 to S513) is added between the processes of S501 and S502 (see FIG. 15). Therefore, in FIG. 15, the same parts as the timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above are assigned the same number, the description thereof is omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the output reading process of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is executed (S506). That is, the voltage value of the signal output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b to the input / output port 205 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the output (signal) of the read inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is 5 volts (S507). If the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 290b for the inner frame is 5 volts (S507: Yes), the inner frame 12 is open, so the inner frame open flag 203a is turned on (S508). .. On the other hand, if the output (signal) of the read inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is zero volt (S507: No), the inner frame 12 is closed, so the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off (S509). ).

After the processing of S508 or S509, the output reading processing of the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b is executed (S510). That is, the voltage value of the signal output from the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b to the input / output port 205 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is 5 volts (S511). If the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is 5 volts (S511: Yes), the front frame 14 is open, so the front frame open flag 203b is turned on (S512). .. On the other hand, if the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is zero volt (S511: No), the front frame 14 is closed, so the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off (S513). ). After the processing of S512 or S513, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502).

In this way, if the output (signal) of the read inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is 5 volts, the main control device 110 turns on the inner frame open flag 203a because the inner frame 12 is open. To. On the other hand, if the output (signal) of the read inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is zero volt, the inner frame 12 is closed, so the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off. Further, if the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is 5 volts, the main control device 110 turns on the front frame open flag 203b because the front frame 14 is open. .. On the other hand, if the output (signal) of the read input / output port output circuit 292b for the front frame is zero volt, the front frame 14 is closed, so the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the main process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 and S215 to S220 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

The main process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 27 is the main process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 12). ), A process of transmitting either an inner frame opening command or an inner frame closing command, or a front frame opening command or a front frame closing command to the voice lamp control device 113 (S215 to S202) between the processes of S201 and S202. (Processing of S220) is added. Therefore, in FIG. 12, the same parts as the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above are assigned the same numbers, the description thereof is omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

In the main process executed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the output data such as the command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. After executing the process (S201), it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening flag 203a is on (S215). If the inner frame opening flag 203a is on (S215: Yes), that is, if the inner frame 12 is opened, the inner frame opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S216). On the other hand, if the inner frame opening flag 203a is off (S215: No), that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame closing command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S217). After the processing of S216 or S217, it is determined whether or not the front frame opening flag 203b is on (S218). If the front frame opening flag 203b is on (S218: Yes), that is, if the front frame 14 is open, a front frame opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S219). On the other hand, if the front frame opening flag 203b is off (S218: No), that is, if the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame closing command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 (S220). After the processing of S219 or S220, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202).

As described above, if the inner frame opening flag 203a is on, that is, the inner frame 12 is opened, the main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the inner frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the inner frame opening flag 203a is off, that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame closing command is repeatedly transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, if the front frame opening flag 203b is on, that is, the front frame 14 is opened, the main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the front frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the front frame opening flag 203b is off, that is, if the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame closing command is repeatedly transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

The command transmission of the main control device 110 may be as follows. For example, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned on, the main control device 110 transmits the inner frame opening command once to the voice lamp control device 113, and the inner frame 12 is closed. Then, when the inner frame opening flag 203a is turned off, the inner frame closing command may be transmitted once to the voice lamp control device 113. Similarly, when the front frame 14 is opened and the front frame opening flag 203b is turned on, the main control device 110 transmits the front frame opening command once to the voice lamp control device 113, and the front frame 14 is closed. Then, when the front frame opening flag 203b is turned off, the front frame closing command may be transmitted once to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the processing performed by the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and this start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S701). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S816 (see FIG. 30) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S812 in FIG. 30), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S816. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S815 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S702: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S816. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S703).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S706. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S703: Yes), the process proceeds to S704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S703: No), the process proceeds to S708.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S816 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S703: No), and the data shifts to S708.

If the power off processing flag is on (S702: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S816, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S704, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S704). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S705: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S706). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S705: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223.

In the process of S708, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S708). Since the power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S816 is executed (see S815 of FIG. 30), the power-off flag is turned on by the process of S815 as described later with reference to FIG. 30. That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S816 is executed, the process of S708 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power failure process of S816 is started without completing the execution after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (S708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S710), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S711) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S708 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S708 is performed via the processes of S704 to S706. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S708: No), S709, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S710, the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S710), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S711), the process shifts to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S709 is that when the processing of S708 is reached via the processing of S704 to S706, the processing of S704 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started (S801), and if 1 ms or more has not passed (S801: No), the processes of S802 to S809 are executed. The process proceeds to S810 without performing. In the process of S801, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S802 to S809 determines whether or not 1 ms has passed, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas each of S810 This is because it is preferable to execute the counter update process and the command reception process of S811 in a short cycle. As a result, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110.

If 1 ms or more has passed in the process of S801 (S801: Yes), the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the processing of S807 described later (S801: Yes). S802), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S803). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S804 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S804, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S805). In the customer waiting effect, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 500 is not played by the player, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 85 according to the operation hold ball N is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S806). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. It may be changed to a production that can be held, or may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S806 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S807), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S808). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After that, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S809), and the process proceeds to the process of S810. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main control device 110. The effect time of the lamp editing process of S807 and the sound editing / output process of S808 is set based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process.

In the process of S810, the variable display process of the third symbol display device 81 is executed. In this fluctuation display processing, a plurality of counters (counter for setting the stop symbol at the time of big hit, counter for selecting the stop symbol at the time of disconnection, etc.) mounted on the voice lamp control device 113 are updated, and the value and main of the counter are updated. Based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command transmitted from the control device 110, the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be set, and the fluctuation display pattern (reach other than front-back deviation, reach other than front-rear deviation, complete deviation). Etc. are set. The stop symbol and the fluctuation pattern are transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command.

In the process of S810, for example, when the command of the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main controller 110 is "complete deviation", the complete deviation A pattern is selected from the plurality of patterns corresponding to the complete deviation, and the third symbol display. A command is transmitted to the display control device 110 so that the device 81 completely disengages and produces the A pattern. Therefore, with respect to the fluctuation pattern of 1 determined by the main control device 110, the detailed fluctuation pattern displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the control of the main control device 110 The burden can be reduced. Further, since the pattern of each effect determined by the main control device 110 can be reduced, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

Then, the command from the main control device 110 is received (S811). When a command from the main control device 110 is received, if it is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113 in response to the command, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 233, and the command is used by the display control device 114. If it is a command, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the processing of S811 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S812). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S812 (S812: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S815), and the power-off process is executed (S816). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S817), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S812 (S812: No), either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be opened, or both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be opened. If there is, the door opening notification process (S813) for notifying is executed using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227.

Here, the door opening notification process will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a door opening notification process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This door opening notification process determines whether or not the voice lamp control device 113 has received four commands, an inner frame opening command, a front frame opening command, an inner frame closing command, or a front frame closing command, and responds to the determination. It is a process to execute the notification.

In the door opening notification process, first, in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening command indicating that the inner frame 12 is open is received (S901). When the inner frame opening command is received (S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is on (S902). If the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is not turned on (S902: No), the inner frame opening notification processing, which is the processing of S905 described later, has not been started yet. Therefore, in order to start this inner frame opening notification processing, S903 Move to the subsequent processing. First, the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned on to indicate that the inner frame opening command has been received (S903), and the inner frame opening command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S904). Then, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are used to start the inner frame opening notification process for notifying that the inner frame 12 is open (S905). In this inner frame opening notification process, for example, the voice output device 226 is used to notify by an electronic sound that "the inner frame is open", or the lamp display device 227 is used to open the inner frame 12. For example, blinking is executed four times per second to indicate. As a result, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of persons that the inner frame 12 has been opened.

The main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the inner frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113 during the period when the inner frame 12 is open. Therefore, if the inner frame open command has already been received and the inner frame open command has been received again when the processes of S903 to S905 have been executed (S901: Yes), the inner frame open command reception flag 223a Is determined to be on (S902: Yes), and the already started inner frame opening notification process (S905) is continuously executed (S906). As a result, the inner frame opening notification process (S905) is continuously executed during the period when the inner frame 12 is open. If the inner frame opening command is not received in the processing of S811 (S901: No), the processing of S903 to S906 is skipped.

Next, in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not a front frame opening command indicating that the front frame 14 is open has been received (S907). When the front frame opening command is received (S907: Yes), it is determined whether or not the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is on (S908). If the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is not turned on (S908: No), the front frame opening notification process, which is the process of S911 described later, has not been started yet. Therefore, in order to start this front frame opening notification process, S909 Move to the subsequent processing. First, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned on to indicate that the front frame opening command has been received (S909), and the front frame opening command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S910). Then, the front frame opening notification process for notifying that the front frame 14 is open is started by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 (S911). In this front frame opening notification process, for example, the voice output device 226 is used to notify by an electronic sound that "the front frame is open", or the lamp display device 227 is used to open the front frame 14. For example, blinking once per second is performed to indicate. As a result, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of persons that the front frame 14 has been opened.

The main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the front frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113 during the period when the front frame 14 is open. Therefore, if the front frame open command has already been received and the front frame open command has been received again when the processes of S909 to S911 have been executed (S907: Yes), the front frame open command reception flag 223b Is determined to be on (S908: Yes), and the front frame opening notification process (S911) that has already been started is continuously executed (S912). As a result, the front frame opening notification process (S911) is continuously executed during the period when the front frame 14 is open. If the front frame opening command is not received in the processing of S811 (S907: No), the processing of S909 to S912 is skipped.

Next, in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not the inner frame closing command indicating that the inner frame 12 is closed has been received (S913). When the inner frame closing command is received (S913: Yes), it is determined whether or not the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is on (S914). If the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is on (S914: Yes), the inner frame opening notification process (S905) is started, but the processing for ending the inner frame opening notification process (S917) described later is still executed. Since this has not been done, the process shifts to the process of S915 or later in order to execute the process of terminating the inner frame opening notification process. First, the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a is turned off to indicate that the inner frame closing command has been received (S915), and the inner frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S916). Then, the inner frame opening notification process executed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is terminated (S917). As a result, it is possible to end the notification indicating the opening of the inner frame 12, which has been performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227.

The main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the inner frame closing command to the voice lamp control device 113 during the period when the inner frame 12 is closed. Therefore, if the inner frame closing command has already been received and the inner frame closing command has been received again when the processes of S915 to S917 have been executed (S913: Yes), the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a Is determined to be off (S914: No), and the processing of S915 to S917 is skipped. Further, even when the inner frame closing command is not received in the processing of S811 (S913: No), the processing of S915 to S917 is skipped.

Next, in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), it is determined whether or not a front frame closing command indicating that the front frame 14 is closed has been received (S918). When the front frame closing command is received (S918: Yes), it is determined whether or not the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is on (S919). If the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is on (S919: Yes), the front frame opening notification process (S911) has been started, but the process of ending the front frame opening notification process (S922), which will be described later, is still executed. Since this has not been done, the process proceeds to S920 or later in order to execute the process of terminating the front frame opening notification process. First, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned off to indicate that the front frame closing command has been received (S920), and the front frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S921). Then, the front frame opening notification process executed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is terminated (S922). As a result, the notification indicating the opening of the front frame 14 that has been performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 can be terminated.

The main control device 110 repeatedly transmits the front frame closing command to the voice lamp control device 113 during the period when the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, if the front frame closing command has already been received and the front frame closing command has been received again when the processes of S920 to S922 have been executed (S918: Yes), the front frame opening command reception flag 223a Is determined to be off (S919: No), and the processing of S920 to S922 is skipped. Further, even when the front frame closing command is not received in the processing of S811 (S918: No), the processing of S920 to S922 is skipped.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the inner frame opening command in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), the inner frame opening command reception flag 223a indicates that the inner frame opening command has been received. It is turned on (S903), the inner frame opening command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S904), and the inner frame opening notification process is started (S905). Since this inner frame opening notification process (S905) is continuously performed until the inner frame 12 is closed, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the inner frame 12 is being opened. Similarly, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the front frame opening command in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30), the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is turned on to indicate that the front frame opening command has been received. (S909), the front frame opening command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S910), and the front frame opening notification process is started (S911). Since this front frame opening notification process (S911) is continuously performed until the front frame 14 is closed, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the front frame 14 is being opened.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the inner frame closing command in the processing of S811 (see FIG. 30) and the inner frame opening notification processing (S905) has already been performed, the inner frame opening command receiving flag The 223a is turned off to indicate that the inner frame closing command has been received (S915), the inner frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S916), and the inner frame opening notification process is terminated (S917). Similarly, when the front frame closing command is received in the process of S811 (see FIG. 30) and the front frame opening notification process (S911) has already been performed, the front frame opening command reception flag 223b is set to close the front frame. The command is turned off (S920) to indicate that the command has been received, the front frame closing command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S921), and the front frame opening notification process is terminated (S922).

Returning to the description of FIG. After executing the door opening notification process (S813), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S814) based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223, and if the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S814: No), S801 Return to the process and repeat the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S814: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall and ask for the repair of the pachinko machine 500. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the processing performed by the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. For convenience of explanation, the external interrupt process of FIG. 33 will be described first, and then the main process of FIG. 32 will be described.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the external interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the external interrupt processing is executed, the command received by the processing of S1101 to S1106 is determined. If the received command is an effect permission command (S1101: Yes), the effect permission flag 233a of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1108) to end the external interrupt processing. If the received command is a variation pattern command (S1101: No, S1102: Yes), the variation start flag 233b of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1109) to end the external interrupt processing.

Next, if the received command is an inner frame opening command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: Yes), the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c of the work RAM 233 and the inner frame opening command have been received. When the indicator is turned on (S1110), the display of "the inner frame is open" is started on the third symbol display device 81 (S1111). After that, the external interrupt processing is terminated. By starting the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the inner frame 12 is open. The characters "the inner frame is open" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed so as to overlap with the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the characters "inner frame is open" are described later because the inner frame 12 is closed, that is, the display inner frame open command reception flag 233c is turned off during the period when the inner frame 12 is open. It is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the processing of S1115 is performed.

Next, if the received command is a front frame open command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: No, S1104: Yes), the front frame open command reception flag 233d for displaying the work RAM 233 is set to the front frame open command. It is turned on to indicate that it has been received (S1112), and the display of "the front frame is open" is started on the third symbol display device 81 (S1113). After that, the external interrupt processing is terminated. By starting the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the front frame 14 is open. The characters "the front frame is open" displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed so as to overlap with the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the characters "the front frame is open" means that the front frame 14 is closed, that is, the display front frame open command reception flag 233d is turned off during the period when the front frame 14 is open, which will be described later. It is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the processing of S1117 is performed.

Next, if the received command is an inner frame closing command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: No, S1104: No, S1105: Yes), the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c of the work RAM 233 is set. It is turned off to indicate that the inner frame closing command has been received (S1114), and the display of "the inner frame is open" of the third symbol display device 81 is erased (S1115). After that, the external interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, if the received command is a front frame closing command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: No, S1104: No, S1105: No, S1106: Yes), the front frame opening command for display of the work RAM 233 is received. The flag 233d is turned off to indicate that the front frame closing command has been received (S1116), and the display of "the front frame is open" of the third symbol display device 81 is erased (S1117). After that, the external interrupt processing is terminated.

Finally, if the received command is neither a production permission command, a variation pattern command, an inner frame opening command, a front frame opening command, an inner frame closing command, or a front frame closing command (S1101: No, S1102: No, S1103: No, S1104: No, S1105: No, S1106: No), and other processes corresponding to the received commands are executed (S1107), and the external interrupt process is terminated. For example, if the received command is a stop command, the process of stopping the fluctuation performed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

As described above, when the display control device 114 receives the inner frame opening command, the display inner frame opening command reception flag 233c of the work RAM 233 is turned on (S1110) to indicate that the inner frame opening command has been received. 3 The symbol display device 81 starts displaying "the inner frame is open" (S1111). By starting the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the inner frame 12 is open. Similarly, when the display control device 114 receives the front frame opening command, the display front frame opening command reception flag 233d of the work RAM 233 is turned on to indicate that the front frame opening command has been received (S1112), and the third The symbol display device 81 starts displaying "The front frame is open" (S1113). By starting the display on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to notify an unspecified number of people that the front frame 14 is open.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the inner frame closing command when the display "inner frame is open" is started on the third symbol display device 81, the display inner frame opening command of the work RAM 233 is received. The reception flag 233c is turned off to indicate that the inner frame closing command has been received (S1114), and the display of "the inner frame is open" of the third symbol display device 81 is erased (S1115). Similarly, when the display control device 114 receives the front frame closing command when the display "front frame is open" is started on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 opens the display front frame of the work RAM 233. The command reception flag 233d is turned off to indicate that the front frame closing command has been received (S1116), and the display of "the front frame is open" of the third symbol display device 81 is erased (S1117).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the main process executed by the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114, and this main process is started when the power is turned on. First, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1001). Specifically, the process of initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. After that, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read (S1002), the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 (S1003). Further, in order to display the initial screen, the information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 storing the character information decompressed by the process of S1003. The extracted character information is written in the inner area (S1004).

Next, it is determined whether or not the effect permission flag 233a is turned on in order to determine whether or not the effect permission command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1005), and the effect permission flag 233a is not turned on. (S1005: No), the process after S1006 is waited until the effect permission command is transmitted from the main control device 110, that is, until the effect permission flag 233a is turned on.

As a result of the determination in S1005, if the effect permission flag 233a is turned on (S1005: Yes), the character information extracted in the process of S1004 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the process proceeds to the process after S1006.

In the process of S1006, it is determined whether or not the display executed by the third symbol display device 81 is a big hit (S1006), and if it is not a big hit (S1006: No), the third symbol display device 81 It is determined whether or not the variation start flag 233b for permitting the start of the variation display is turned on (S1007). As a result, if the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned on (S1007: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off (S1008), and the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (S1009). Here, in the process of S1008, the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off because in the pachinko machine 500 of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned on, the fluctuation display is started on the third symbol display device 81. (S1007: Yes to S1009), unless the fluctuation start flag 233b is turned off, the fluctuation start processing (S1009) is repeatedly executed, and the normal processing is not executed.

On the other hand, as a result of determination in the process of S1007, when the variation start flag 233b is off (S1007: No), or when the variation is started in the process of S1009, the variation effect processing is performed (S1010). In the variation effect processing, when the variation display is continuously performed, the character information and the effect pattern information are updated and set (new extraction of the character information from the video RAM 234 and the extracted character information to the video RAM 234). If the variable display is not performed, the process proceeds to the process of S1011 without performing any particular process. Here, in the process of S1011, in order to execute the process (S1006 to S1010) of performing the effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 ms, whether or not 20 ms or more has passed since the process of S1006 was started is determined. Confirmation (S1011), if not, wait until 20 ms or more elapses (S1011: No), and if 20 ms or more elapses (S1011: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S1006.

Further, as a result of the processing of S1006, if the jackpot is in progress (S1006: Yes), the jackpot effect processing is executed (S1012). In the jackpot production process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of prize balls is updated, and the background image, etc., which is different for each round, is updated (new extraction of character information from video RAM 234 and video RAM 234 of extracted character information). Write to). After the jackpot effect processing (S1012) is completed, the processing shifts to the processing of S1011.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b of the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 290 supplies power to the pachinko machine 500. When a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 and the switch SW3-2 conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, a signal with a DC voltage of 5 volts is output to the input / output port 205. When this signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 transmits an inner frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113, and uses the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to display the inner frame 12 of the inner frame 12. Notify the opening. Further, the pachinko machine 500 transmits an inner frame opening command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to clearly notify an unspecified number of persons that the inner frame 12 is open.

Similarly, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b of the front frame open detection circuit 292 is supplied with power to the pachinko machine 500 from the DC power supply DC1. When a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied and the switch SW4-2 conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14, a signal of a DC voltage of 5 volts is output to the input / output port 205. When this signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 500 transmits a front frame opening command to the voice lamp control device 113, and uses the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to display the front frame 14 of the front frame 14. Notify the opening. Further, the pachinko machine 500 transmits a front frame opening command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a message indicating the opening of the front frame 14 on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to clearly notify an unspecified number of persons that the front frame 14 is open.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 is in addition to the case where a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1. For example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 (the main control device 110 is stopped). When the switch SW3-1 conducts and detects the opening of the inner frame 12, a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262. The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the inner frame 12 Opening can be detected.

Similarly, according to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a of the front frame opening detection circuit 292 is supplied with a DC voltage of 12 volts from the DC power supply DC1. In addition, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off and the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 (the main control device 110 is stopped). When the switch SW4-1 conducts and detects the opening of the front frame 14, a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 to the hall computer 262. .. The pulse signal output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293 is stored in the hall computer 262. Therefore, by analyzing the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is cut off, the front frame 14 Opening can be detected.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened while the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is being performed, the function of outputting the pulse signal to the hall computer 262 and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 are cut off. When the inner frame 12 is opened while the inner frame 12 is being operated, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 can be exhibited by the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a, which is one circuit.

Further, when the front frame 14 is opened while the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 is being performed, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 and the power supply to the pachinko machine 500 are cut off. The function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 when the front frame 14 is opened can be exhibited by the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a, which is one circuit.

The hall computer 262 has been operated for 24 hours. Therefore, in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 290a, the pulse signal is output from the inner frame external output terminal board 291 and the time when the pulse signal is output, that is, the opening time of the inner frame 12 is also the hall computer. It can be stored in 262. Similarly, in the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a, the pulse signal is output from the front frame external output terminal plate 293, and the time when the pulse signal is output, that is, the opening time of the front frame 14 is also holed. It can be stored in the computer 262.

In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko machine 500 separately notifies the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the pachinko machine 500 uses the third symbol display device 81 to separately display the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14 may be performed in the same notification mode and display mode. Specifically, the notification performed by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 may be the same when the inner frame 12 is opened and when the front frame 14 is opened. Similarly, the display performed by using the third symbol display device 81 may be the same when the inner frame 12 is opened and when the front frame 14 is opened. In this case, when either one of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, or both of them are opened, "the door is open" may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is opened or the front frame 14 is opened, the pachinko machine 500 uses the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to notify the pachinko machine 500 and the third The display was performed using the symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and either notification using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 or display using the third symbol display device 81 may be performed.

Next, the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. The pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has three switches SW3, SW3-1, SW3-2, and SW3-3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment. The switch SW3A with a built-in switch is changed, and the switch SW4 connected to the front frame opening detection circuit 292 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the switch SW4-1, SW4-2, SW4-3-3. After changing to the switch SW4A with two built-in switches, the Zener diode D3 used in the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the front frame opening detection circuit 292 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is removed. (The Zener diode D3 may not be removed and may be connected as it is in the same manner as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the front frame opening detection circuit 292). In the future, the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment with the above-mentioned changes to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 will be referred to as the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment. The front frame opening detection circuit 292 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is modified as described above, and the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment is referred to as the front frame opening detection circuit 302. Therefore, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 290a of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment has been changed as described above, and the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a. The inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b of the pachinko machine 500 of the embodiment is modified as described above, and the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment is referred to as an inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. Similarly, the front frame terminal plate output circuit 292a of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment. The front frame input / output port output circuit 292b of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the front frame input / output port output circuit 302b of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment.

According to the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is opened, it is stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrating circuit 281 of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a). When the inner frame 12 is closed, the charged charge is instantaneously discharged to the ground via the switch SW3-3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a). can do. Similarly, when the front frame 14 is opened, the front frame 14 is closed with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrating circuit 281 of the front frame opening detection circuit 302 (front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a). In this case, the electric charge can be instantaneously discharged to the ground via the switch SW4-3 connected to the front frame opening detection circuit 302 (front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a).

In this way, by the time the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened again, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrator circuit 281 is always zero, so that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. Even if the integrator circuit 281 is opened a plurality of times in succession in a short period of time, the integrator circuit 281 operates normally, and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 is applied regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. The falling period of is set to a fixed period (about 2 ms).

Further, according to the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, as described above, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrating circuit 281 of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is charged. When the inner frame 12 is closed, it is discharged to the ground via the switch SW3-3 and stored in the capacitor CD7 of the integrating circuit 281 of the front frame open detection circuit 302 (front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a). The electric charge is discharged to the ground via the switch SW4-3 when the front frame 14 is closed. Therefore, unlike the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened again and the switch SW3-1 or the switch SW4-1 is conducted, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is charged. An overvoltage (for example, a voltage of 12.3 volts) that is superimposed on the voltage supplied from the capacitor CD1 and destroys the timer IC1 is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for the Zener diode D3 that prevents an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC 1 from being applied.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 When any of the above is opened, the pachinko machine 600 is used to separately notify whether the inner frame 12 has been opened, the front frame 14 has been opened, or both have been opened. be able to. Further, according to the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the case where the DC voltage of DC power supply DC1 to 12V is supplied, the DC power supply DC1 to 12V Even when the DC voltage of the above is not supplied, when either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the pulse signals can be output separately to the hall computer 262. Therefore, from the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262, it is possible to identify whether the inner frame 12 has been opened, the front frame 14 has been opened, or both have been opened.

In the description of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment, the same parts as the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment are designated by the same numbers, the description thereof is omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

With reference to FIG. 34, the structures of the switch SW3A connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 and the switch SW4A connected to the front frame opening detection circuit 302 will be described. The switch SW3A is a switch SW3 containing the switches SW3-1 and SW3-2 with the switch SW3-3 added, and has the same structure as the switch SW3. Similarly, the switch SW4A is a switch SW4 containing the switches SW4-1 and SW4-2 with the switch SW4-3 added, and has the same structure as the switch SW4. Therefore, in the switch SW3A and the switch SW4A, the same parts as the switch SW3 and the switch SW4 are assigned the same numbers and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described. Further, since the switch SW3A and the switch SW4A have the same structure, the structure of the switch SW3A will be described, and the description of the switch SW4A will be omitted.

FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the switch SW3A. FIG. 34A is a cross-sectional view showing a state (blocking state) of the switch SW3A in a state where the inner frame 12 is closed. Further, FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view showing a state of the switch SW3A in a state where the inner frame 12 is in the middle of opening or closing. Further, FIG. 34 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state (conduction state) of the switch SW3A in a state where the inner frame 12 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the switch SW3A connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 is provided with the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-3 which operates in the reverse manner to the switch SW3-2. There is. The switch SW3-3 faces a conductor plate SW3-3a made of metal, which is a conductive member arranged on the movable shaft SW3a that comes into contact with the inner frame 12 in a closed state, and the conductor plate SW3-3a. A pair of terminal plates SW3-3b made of metal arranged at positions, a support plate SW3-3c for arranging the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b on the housing SW3b, and a conductor plate SW3-3a. A pair of springs SW3ca are provided on a surface facing the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b and are provided with respect to the conductor plate SW3-3a to generate an urging force in the direction opposite to the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b. ing. As described above, the switch SW3 has three built-in switches, a switch SW3-1, a switch SW3-2, and a switch SW3-3.

As shown in FIG. 34A, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the movable shaft SW3a comes into contact with the inner frame 12, and the movable shaft SW3a is pushed into the housing SW3b. Therefore, the contact between the conductor plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b is hindered, and the contact between the conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b is hindered. On the other hand, the conductor plate SW3-3a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b come into contact with each other. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the continuity of both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 is cut off, while the switch SW3-3 is in a conductive state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the inner frame 12 is in the process of opening or closing, the movable shaft SW3a is released from contact with the inner frame 12, so that a pair of springs SW3ca are attached. By force, the conductor plate SW3-1a comes into contact with the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b, the conductor plate SW3-2a comes into contact with the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b, and the conductor plate SW3-3a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b. Any contact with is hindered. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the middle of opening or closing, the continuity of the switch SW3-1, the switch SW3-2, and the switch SW3-3 is cut off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), in the state where the inner frame 12 is opened, the conductor plate SW3-1a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-1b come into contact with each other due to the urging force of the pair of springs SW3ca. , The conductor plate SW3-2a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-2b come into contact with each other. On the other hand, contact between the conductor plate SW3-3a and the pair of terminal plates SW3-3b is hindered. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened, both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state, while the switch SW3-3 is in a state in which the conduction is cut off.

As described above, both the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 built in the housing SW3b are in a cutoff state when the inner frame 12 is closed, while are in a conductive state when the inner frame 12 is open. It becomes. On the other hand, the switch SW3-3 built in the housing SW3b operates in the opposite manner to the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2, and becomes conductive when the inner frame 12 is closed, while the inner frame becomes conductive. When 12 is opened, it is in a cutoff state. That is, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 have a structure in which the conduction state and the cutoff state operate in conjunction with each other, and the switch SW3-3 is in a state opposite to the state of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2. It has a structure that performs the above operation. However, the structure of the switch SW3A is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 34, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a cutoff state, and the switch SW3-3 is in a cutoff state. On the other hand, in the state where the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 may be in the conductive state, and the switch SW3-3 may be in the cutoff state. This also applies to the structure of the switch SW4A.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 300 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. The inner frame opening detection circuit 300 of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment switches the switch SW3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment to the switch SW3-1. , SW3-2, SW3-3 was changed to the switch SW3A with a built-in switch, and the Zener diode D3 used in the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment was removed. It is a thing. The inner frame opening detection circuit 300 has the same configuration as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 described above in FIG. 25, except for the above changes. Further, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same structure as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, regarding the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291, the same parts as the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 described above in FIG. 25 The same number will be assigned and the description will be omitted, and only the different parts will be described.

Further, the front frame opening detection circuit 302 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment is different from the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 300 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment in that it is connected. Only the switch to be switched is changed from the switch SW3A to the switch SW4A, and other than that, the configuration is the same as that of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300. Further, the front frame external output terminal plate 293 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 used in the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment. That is, it has the same structure as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment described in FIG. 25. Therefore, the description of the front frame open detection circuit 302 and the front frame external output terminal plate 293 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the switch SW3-3 provided on the switch SW3A (see FIG. 34), one end of the switch SW3-3 (one end of the terminal plate 3-3b) is the other end of the switch SW3-1 (see FIG. 34). The other end of the switch SW3-3 (the other end of the terminal plate 3-3b) is grounded while being connected to the other end of the terminal plate 3-2b) and the capacitor CD7. As described above, the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the switch SW3-3 added to the terminal plate output circuit 290a for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment. Become. The inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same configuration as the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment.

As described above, the switch SW3-3 used in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a operates in a state opposite to that of the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW3-3 is conducted and one end of the capacitor CD7 is grounded, while the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are cut off. Become.

Then, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, due to the structure of the switch SW3A, first, the switch SW3-3 is in the cutoff state, and then the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the conductive state (FIG. FIG. 34 (a) → FIG. 34 (b) → see FIG. 34 (c)). In this way, when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state, first, one end of the capacitor CD7 is cut off from the ground by the switch SW3-3, and then the power from the capacitor CD1 is transferred to the switch SW3-1. It is supplied to the capacitor CD7 via. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the capacitor CD1 that supplies power does not short-circuit to the ground. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the electric power from the capacitor CD1 flows into the ground, and the inner frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is short-circuited and broken. Absent. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch SW3-1 is conducted, and the power of the capacitor CD1 is supplied to the capacitor CD7, the electric charge is stored in the capacitor CD7 as described above, and the stored electric charge is increased. As a result, the voltage generated in the capacitor CD7 increases. Then, due to the change in the voltage generated in the capacitor CD7, the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 can be set to a fixed period (about 2 ms). In this way, by adjusting the fall period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 by the integrating circuit 281, that is, by adjusting by the capacitor CD7 and the resistor R10, it is easy without using a complicated circuit. With a configuration and low cost, the fall period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 can be set to a fixed period.

Next, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, due to the structure of the switch SW3A, first, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the cutoff state, and then the switch SW3-3 is in the conductive state ( 34 (c)-> FIG. 34 (b)-> FIG. 34 (a)). In this way, when the inner frame 12 changes from the open state to the closed state, first, the power supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the capacitor CD7 is stopped by the switch SW3-1, and then one end of the capacitor CD7 is stopped. Ground via switch SW3-3. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the capacitor CD1 that supplies power does not short-circuit to the ground. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the electric power from the capacitor CD1 flows into the ground, and the inner frame open detection circuit 300 is not short-circuited and broken.

When the inner frame 12 is closed, the switch SW3-1 is cut off and the power supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the capacitor CD7 is stopped, the switch SW3-3 grounds one end of the capacitor CD7. Can be done. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 when the inner frame 12 is in the open state can be instantaneously discharged via the switch SW3-3 to be zero. .. Therefore, since the charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is always zero by the time the inner frame 12 is opened again, even if the inner frame 12 is continuously opened a plurality of times in a short period of time. The integrating circuit 281 can be operated normally, and the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 can be set to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12.

Further, as described above, the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) stores the inner frame 12 in the capacitor CD7 when the inner frame 12 is in the open state. The charged charge can be instantaneously discharged to the ground via the switch SW3-3. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 is conducted, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is superimposed on the voltage supplied from the capacitor CD1, and an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC1 ( For example, a voltage of 12.3 volts) is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a Zener diode that prevents an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC 1 from being applied.

Further, as described above, in the inner frame opening detection circuit 300, the switch SW3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the switch SW3A, and the fourth implementation is performed. The Zener diode D3 used in the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 is removed, and the configuration is the same as that of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 except for the above changes. Further, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same structure as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment.

Therefore, similarly to the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 600 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1, the inner frame 12 is opened. When the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b becomes conductive, a 5-volt signal is output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205. When a 5-volt signal is input to the input / output port 205, the pachinko machine 600 notifies the opening of the inner frame 12 by using the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the pachinko machine 600 displays a message indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is holed from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the computer 262.

On the other hand, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off, the DC voltage of 12 volts is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1, so that the inner frame 12 is opened. Even if the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b conducts, no signal is input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 (inner frame input / output). The DC voltage input from the port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt). However, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off, the power is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a from the capacitor CD1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a becomes conductive, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is connected to the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the hall computer 262.

The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, the hall computer 262 outputs the pulse signal from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, and the output time of the output pulse signal is stored to open the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine. The time can be detected.

In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened while the power is being supplied to the pachinko machine 600, the function of outputting a signal to the input / output port 205 and the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262, Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened while the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 is provided as a function of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300, which is one circuit. Can be demonstrated in.

Further, one end of the switch SW3-2 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is connected to the anode terminal of the DC power supply DC1 and the diode D1. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned on, the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive and power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. Then, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is in the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off, power is not supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b, so that the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 is opened. Even so, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is in a stopped state.

On the other hand, one end of the switch SW3-1 of the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a is connected to one end of the capacitor CD1 via the diode D2 and the resistor R10. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned on, the switch SW3-1 conducts and power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a. , The terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame is in the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off, the power supply from the DC power supply DC1 to the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame is stopped, but the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 is conducted. Then, since power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is put into an operating state. Here, when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off and power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a, the power is supplied to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. It can be cut off by the diode D1 that exhibits the backflow prevention function. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off, the number of times the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be detected can be increased.

Further, the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame stands up when the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch SW3-1 is conducted, and the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1 drops to zero volt. It functions as a monostable multivibrator that raises the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 from zero volt to about 9.6 volt for about 10 ms from the drop. Then, by providing the integrating circuit 281 in front of the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 is applied regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12. The period from when the voltage drops to zero volt to when it returns to about 10.3 volt can be adjusted shorter than the period when the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt. In this way, the timer IC1 functions as a monostable multivibrator by setting the falling period of the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12 by the integrating circuit 281. Can be operated normally, and the period during which the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt can be limited to about 10 ms. As a result, the period during which the current is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the photocoupler PR1 can be limited to about 10 ms, and the output period of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be reduced to about 10 ms. Can be fastened.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 (the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7) that changes according to the open / closed state of the inner frame 12 regardless of the on / off state of the power supply of the pachinko machine 600. , TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame, OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame, and output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame (of the hall computer 262). The relationship between the input) and the output of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b, which changes according to the open / closed state of the inner frame 12 when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned on, will be described. FIG. 36 shows an on / off state of the power supply of the pachinko machine 600 (a state of the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1), an open cutoff state of the inner frame 12, a continuity cutoff state of the switch SW3-3, and the switch SW3-1 and. The continuity cutoff state of the switch SW3-2, the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 (charge stored in the capacitor CD7), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a, and the inner frame terminal plate output. A timing chart showing the relationship between the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 of the circuit 300a, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame (input of the hall computer 262), and the output of the input / output port output circuit 300b for the inner frame. is there.

As described above, the front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a provided in the front frame open detection circuit 302 differs from the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a in that the switch to be connected is the switch SW4-1. There is only a place where it is a switch SW3-1 and a place where it is a switch SW4-3 or a switch SW3-3. Therefore, since the operation of the front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a is the same as the operation of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a, the description of the operation of the front frame terminal plate output circuit 302a will be omitted. Further, the input / output port output circuit 302b for the front frame is different from the input / output port output circuit 300b for the inner frame only in that the switch to be connected is the switch SW4-2 or the switch SW3-2. is there. Therefore, since the operation of the front frame input / output port output circuit 302b is the same as the operation of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b, the description of the operation of the front frame input / output port output circuit 302b will be omitted. .. Further, as described above in FIG. 35, since the front frame external output terminal plate 293 has the same configuration as the inner frame external output terminal plate 291, the operation of the front frame external output terminal plate 293 is for the inner frame. It is the same as the external output terminal board 291. Therefore, the description of the operation of the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the power supply of the pachinko machine 600 is on until t18:00 (the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is 12 volts until t18:00), and after t18:00, the pachinko machine is in a 12-volt state. The power supply of the machine 600 is turned off (the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is zero volt). Therefore, until t18 o'clock, the power from the DC power supply DC1 is supplied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. Then, after t18 o'clock, the supply of electric power by the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a and the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is stopped. However, since the capacitor CD1 is provided in the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a, power is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a after t18 o'clock. Therefore, even after t18:00, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is in an operable state.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state between t14:00 and t15:00, the switch SW3-3 follows this change as shown in FIG. 36 (c). It changes from the conductive state to the cutoff state (at 14:00). After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 change from the cutoff state to the conductive state (at t15). It should be noted that the switch SW3-3 is cut off at t14 and the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state at t15 due to the structure of the switch SW3A (FIGS. 34 (a) → 34 (b) → See FIG. 34 (c)).

When the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive at t15, charging of the capacitor CD7 is started, and as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 starts to rise from zero volt (at t15). When the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive, the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 becomes the same as the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 10. . It falls from 3 volt to zero volt and starts to rise (at 15:00). Following this, as shown in FIG. 36 (g), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at 15:00). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame are made conductive, and the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is connected (see FIG. 35). The current supply is started (at 15:00). Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (h), the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is high from the low state at t15. Switch to the state. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 to the hall computer 262 is started. Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state between t14:00 and t15:00 and the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive (at t15), the inner frame is turned on. Power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the resistors R11 and R12 of the output port output circuit 300b, and the voltage applied to the resistors R12 becomes 5 volts (at t15). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (i), a signal having a DC voltage of 5 volts is output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 (at t15).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), when about 2 ms elapses from t15 o'clock, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 becomes about 10.3 volt. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt (about 2 ms has elapsed from t15:00). However, since about 10 ms has not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t15:00), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t15, the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts, as shown in FIG. 36 (g). Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the outer frame external output terminal plate 291 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 36 (h) when about 10 ms elapses from t15 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the inner frame 12 changes from the open state to the closed state between t16:00 and t17:00, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are shown in FIG. 36 (d). Goes from a conductive state to a cutoff state at t16. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the switch SW3-3 becomes conductive again (at 17:00). It should be noted that the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the cutoff state at t16 and the switch SW3-3 is in the conductive state at t17 due to the structure of the switch SW3A ((FIG. 34 (c) → FIG. 34 (b)). → See FIG. 34 (a))).

As shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-1 is in the cutoff state (at 16:00) and then the switch SW3-3 becomes conductive as shown in FIG. 36 (c) (at 17:00), the capacitor CD7 One end is grounded, and as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is instantaneously discharged between t15:00 and t16 (t17:00). As a result, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 becomes zero, and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 becomes zero volt (at 17:00). Therefore, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 can be detected again (at 17:00). Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-2 is in the cutoff state (at t16), power is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 to the resistors R11 and the resistors R12 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b. Is stopped, and the voltage applied to the resistor R12 becomes zero volt (at t16). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (i), the signal of DC voltage 5 volt output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 is stopped at t16 (inner frame input). Output port The output from the output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 becomes zero volt at t16).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned off (when the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 becomes zero volt) after t18 o'clock, the inner frame terminal board output circuit 300a The supply of electric power by the DC power supply DC1 to the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b is stopped. However, even when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is off, the power from the capacitor CD1 is supplied to the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state again from t17:00 when it was closed last time to, for example, from t19:00 to t20 o'clock after about 3 minutes have passed, FIG. 36 ( As shown in c), the switch SW3-3 changes from the conductive state to the cutoff state (at 19:00), and then, as shown in FIG. 36D, the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 change from the cutoff state to the conductive state. (T20 o'clock), charging of the capacitor CD7 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 starts to rise from zero volt (at 20 o'clock). It should be noted that the switch SW3-3 is cut off at t19 and the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state at t20 due to the structure of the switch SW3A (FIGS. 34 (a) → 34 (b) → See FIG. 34 (c)).

As shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-1 changes from the cutoff state to the conductive state (at 20 o'clock), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 becomes the same as the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7, so that FIG. 36 As shown in (f), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 once drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts, and then starts to rise (at 20 o'clock). Following this fall, as shown in FIG. 36 (g), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 rises from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (at 20 o'clock). As a result, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame are made conductive, and the light emitting diode on the primary side of the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is connected (see FIG. 35). The current supply is started (at 20:00). Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (h), the output of the light receiving element (phototransistor) on the secondary side of the photocoupler PR1, that is, the output of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is high from the low state at t20. Switch to the state. As a result, the output of the pulse signal indicating the opening of the inner frame 12 to the hall computer 262 is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), even if the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state again between t19:00 and t20:00 and the switch SW3-2 becomes conductive (at t20). Since the power from the DC power supply DC1 is not supplied to the resistors R11 and R12 of the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b (since the DC voltage supplied by the DC power supply DC1 is zero volt), the voltage applied to the resistor R12. Is zero volt (at 20:00). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36 (i), the signal output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 maintains the stopped state (input from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b). The output to output port 205 maintains zero volt).

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), about 2 ms after t20 o'clock, the charging of the capacitor CD7 is completed, and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 becomes about 10.3 volts. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 returns from zero volt to about 10.3 volt (about 2 ms has elapsed from t20:00). However, since about 10 ms have not passed since the voltage of the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 rose from zero volt to about 9.6 volt (from t20:00), the OUT terminal voltage of the timer IC1 is about 9.6 volt. Maintaining the state.

Then, about 10 ms after t20 o'clock, as shown in FIG. 36 (g), the timer IC1 switches the voltage of the OUT terminal from about 9.6 volts to zero volts. Then, the collector terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor TR1 of the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a are cut off, and the current supply to one end of the resistor R7a of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stopped. Therefore, the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 switches from the high state to the low state as shown in FIG. 36 (h) when about 10 ms elapses from t20 o'clock. As a result, the output of the pulse signal output to the hall computer 262 is stopped. By switching the output of the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 in this way, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262 can be limited to about 10 ms.

As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when the inner frame 12 changes from the open state to the closed state between t21:00 and t22:00, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3- 2 changes from the conductive state to the cutoff state at t21. After that, as shown in FIG. 36C, the switch SW3-3 becomes conductive again (at 22:00). The switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are cut off at t21, and the switch SW3-3 is in a conductive state at t22 due to the structure of the switch SW3A ((FIG. 34 (c) → FIG. 34 (b) → FIG. 34 (a))).

As shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-1 is in the cutoff state (at 21:00) and then the switch SW3-3 is in the conductive state (at 22:00) as shown in FIG. 36 (c), the capacitor One end of the CD7 is grounded, and as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is instantaneously discharged between t20:00 and t21:00 (t22:00). As a result, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 becomes zero, and the voltage applied to the capacitor CD7 becomes zero volt (at 22:00). Therefore, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is set to a state in which the inner frame 12 can be detected again (at t22). Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), when the switch SW3-2 is in the cutoff state (at 21:00), the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b has an inner frame when the power of the pachinko machine 600 is turned on. It is set to a state in which 12 can be detected (at 21:00).

As described above, the inner frame opening detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) shuts off the switch SW3-1 when the inner frame 12 is closed (at 17:00 and t22), and the capacitor CD1 After stopping the power supplied from the capacitor CD7 to the capacitor CD7, one end of the capacitor CD7 can be grounded by the switch SW3-3. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state (at 17:00 and t22:00), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 when the inner frame 12 is in the open state (from the electric charge stored at t15:00 to t16 and t20). The charge stored at t21 o'clock) can be instantaneously discharged via the switch SW3-3 to zero (t17 o'clock and t22 o'clock). As a result, by the time the inner frame 12 is opened again, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is always zero, so that the inner frame 12 is continuously opened a plurality of times in a short period of time. However, the integrating circuit 281 operates normally, and the falling period of the voltage applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC 1 can be set to a fixed period (about 2 ms) regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12.

Further, in the inner frame frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a), when the inner frame 12 changes from the closed state to the open state (t14:00 to t15 o'clock and t19:00 to t20:00), the switch SW3A Structurally, first, after the switch SW3-3 is in the cutoff state (t14 o'clock and t19 o'clock), the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in the conductive state (t15 o'clock and t20 o'clock). In this way, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, one end of the capacitor CD7 is first cut off from the ground by the switch SW3-3 (at 14:00 and t19:00), and then from the capacitor CD1. Power is supplied to the capacitor CD7 via the switch SW3-1 (at 15:00 and t20). Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the capacitor CD1 that supplies power does not short-circuit to the ground. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the electric power from the capacitor CD1 flows into the ground, and the inner frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is short-circuited and broken. Absent.

Similarly, in the inner frame frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a), when the inner frame 12 changes from the open state to the closed state (t16:00 to t17:00 and t21:00 to t22:00), the switch SW3A First, after the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are cut off (t16 o'clock and t21 o'clock), the switch SW3-3 becomes conductive (t17 o'clock and t22 o'clock, see FIG. 34). .. In this way, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the power supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the capacitor CD7 is first stopped by the switch SW3-1 (at 16:00 and t21:00), and then. One end of the capacitor CD7 is grounded via the switch SW3-3 (at 17:00 and t22:00). Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the capacitor CD1 that supplies power does not short-circuit to the ground. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is changed from the open state to the closed state, the electric power from the capacitor CD1 flows into the ground, and the inner frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is short-circuited and broken. Absent.

Further, the inner frame frame open detection circuit 300 (inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a) is a capacitor when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state (at 17:00 and t22) and when the inner frame 12 is in the open state. The charge stored in the CD7 (the charge stored from t15 to t16 and the charge stored from t20 to t21) can be instantaneously discharged to the ground via the switch SW3-3 (at 17:00 and t21). (t22:00). Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 is conducted (at t15 and t20), the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD7 is superimposed on the voltage supplied from the capacitor CD1, and the timer IC1 is pressed. A destructive overvoltage (eg, a voltage of 12.3 volts) is not applied to the TRG terminal of the timer IC1. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a Zener diode that prevents an overvoltage of a magnitude that destroys the timer IC 1 from being applied.

Further, as described above, in the inner frame opening detection circuit 300, the switch SW3 connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment is changed to the switch SW3A, and the fourth implementation is performed. The Zener diode D3 used in the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 of the pachinko machine 500 is removed, and the configuration is the same as that of the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 except for the above changes. Further, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 600 of the fifth embodiment has the same structure as the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment.

Therefore, as in the case of the pachinko machine 500 of the fourth embodiment, when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 600 and the DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC1 (until t18:00), the inside When the frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a conducts, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a moves from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 to the hall computer 262. , Outputs a pulse signal with a pulse width of 10 ms. Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 provided in the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b conducts, a 5-volt signal is transmitted from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205. Is output.

Further, for example, even when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off (even after t18:00), the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame may be used. Since power is supplied from the capacitor CD1, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 provided in the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is electrically connected, the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a is subjected to. A pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame to the hall computer 262. However, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over and the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off (in the case of after 18:00), the DC voltage of DC power supply DC1 to 12V is the inner frame. Since it is not supplied to the input / output port output circuit 300b for the inner frame, even if the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-2 provided in the input / output port output circuit 300b for the inner frame conducts, the input / output for the inner frame No signal is output from the port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 (the DC voltage output from the inner frame input / output port output circuit 300b to the input / output port 205 is zero volt).

In this way, when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 600, the function of outputting a signal to the input / output port 205 and the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262, In addition, the function of outputting a pulse signal to the hall computer 262 when the inner frame 12 is opened when the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off is a circuit of the inner frame opening detection circuit 300. Can be demonstrated in.

The pulse signal output from the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 is stored in the hall computer 262 that continues to operate for 24 hours. Therefore, the pachinko machine in which the inner frame 12 is opened can be identified by the pulse signal stored in the hall computer 262. Further, the hall computer 262 outputs the pulse signal from the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame, and the output time of the output pulse signal is stored to open the inner frame 12 of the specified pachinko machine. The time can be detected.

Further, when the inner frame 12 is opened and the switch SW3-1 and the switch SW3-2 are in a conductive state, the timer IC1 of the terminal plate output circuit 300a for the inner frame is not limited to the conduction period of the switch SW3-1, that is, , Regardless of the opening period of the inner frame 12, when the switch SW3-1 becomes conductive and about 10 ms elapses after the TRG terminal voltage of the timer IC1 drops from about 10.3 volts to zero volts, the OUT terminal of the timer IC1 Switch the voltage from about 9.6 volt to zero volt. As a result, the supply period of the current supplied to the photocoupler PR1 of the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is about 10 ms.

Therefore, for example, when the business hours of the amusement park are over, the power supply to the pachinko machine 600 is cut off, and the DC power supply DC1 to 12 volt DC is applied to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291. When no voltage is supplied, that is, when a DC voltage of about 10.3 volts is supplied from the capacitor CD1 to the inner frame terminal plate output circuit 300a and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291, the photocoupler PR1 is supplied from the capacitor CD1. The supply period of the current supplied to the inner frame 12 can be limited to about 10 ms per opening of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the power consumption due to the opening of the inner frame 12 can be suppressed to a small value.

In each embodiment, the pulse signals output from the external output terminal board 261 and the external output terminal board 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal board 293 for the front frame are installed in a hall computer 262 whose installation location is different from that of the pachinko machine. Output to, but not limited to this. A dedicated storage device having the function of the hall computer 262 may be provided for each pachinko machine, and the dedicated storage device may be arranged on the back side of each pachinko machine provided with the main control device 110 or the like. In this case, better, a dedicated storage device such as the main control device 110, the payout control device 111, and the launch control device 112 is housed in the board box, and the box base and the box cover provided in the board box. And are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connection by caulking structure). Then, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box cover and the box base.

Further, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame are provided on separate substrates, but the present invention is not limited to this. The external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame may be provided on the same substrate. Even when the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame are provided on the same board, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame is the frame open detection circuit 290 for the inner frame. The front frame external output terminal board 293 is connected to the front frame open detection circuit 292. Then, the external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame separately output a pulse signal to the hall computer 262.

Further, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 and the front frame opening detection circuit 292 that detects the opening of the front frame 14 are separately separated. However, it is not limited to this. When outputting to the hall computer 262 without distinguishing between the opening of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14, the configuration may be as follows. First, the front frame opening detection circuit 292 and the front frame external output terminal plate 293 are removed, and the inner frame frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 are left in the main control device 110. Then, the switch SW3 and the switch SW4 may be connected in parallel and connected to the inner frame opening detection circuit 290. With this configuration, it is possible to output to the hall computer 262 without distinguishing between the opening of the inner frame 12 and the opening of the front frame 14. It should be noted that what is left in the main control device 110 is not the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 and the inner frame external output terminal plate 291 but the front frame opening detection circuit 292 and the front frame external output terminal plate 293. ..

Further, in the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is opened, a 5-volt signal is output to the input / output port 205 by using the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b. It is not limited. When the inner frame 12 is opened and a 5-volt signal is output to the input / output port 205 without using the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b, the configuration may be as follows. First, the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is removed from the inner frame opening detection circuit 290 (the DC power supply DC1 remains). Next, a resistor is connected in series between the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 and the ground, and the input / output port 205 is connected to the connection point between the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 and the resistor connected in series. Then, when the collector terminal c and the emitter terminal e of the transistor TR1 are electrically connected, that is, when the inner frame 12 is opened, a resistor connected in series so that a signal of 5 volts is output to the input / output port 205. Just adjust the value. As a result, when the inner frame 12 is opened while eliminating the need for the switch SW3-2, the resistor R11 and the resistor R12, a 5-volt signal is output to the input / output port 205 and a pulse signal having a pulse width of 10 ms is output to the hall computer. It can be output to 262. In the above description, the case where the inner frame input / output port output circuit 290b is unnecessary has been described, but even when the front frame input / output port output circuit 292b is unnecessary, the front frame frame open detection circuit A similar procedure may be applied to 292.

Further, in the first to fifth embodiments, the external output terminal board 261 and the external output terminal board 291 for the inner frame, the external output terminal board 293 for the front frame, and the hall computer 262 are connected to connect the external output terminal board 261. , The external output terminal plate 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal plate 293 for the front frame output a pulse signal to the hall computer 262, and the hall computer 262 stores the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. It is not limited to. For example, EEPROM (Electronically Erasable and) for pachinko machines
Programmable Read Only Memory) and backup RAM are provided. Then, the external output terminal board 261 and the external output terminal board 291 for the inner frame and the external output terminal board 293 for the front frame are connected to the EEPROM and the backup RAM. With this configuration, the EEPROM or backup RAM can store the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, the MPU 201 confirms the storage of the EEPROM and the backup RAM. Thereby, the opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 can be detected by using a pachinko machine. That is, the role of the hall computer 262 can be assigned to the EEPROM or the backup RAM (the role of the "specific device" described in the claim can be assigned to the EEPROM or the backup RAM). As the backup RAM, RAM 203 may be used.

Although the present invention has been described above based on one embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred from.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. However, the command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of holdings is 4 times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is different by the number of times the variable display is held, even in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is changed by the number of times of holding. It may be displayed in an aspect (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of hold times. You may.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, it may be carried out on a so-called second-class pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as another game machine such as an arepachi or a sparrow ball.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above will be shown. In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. When the door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body and the door opening detecting means detect the opening of the door body, if it is in the initial state, the door body is operated from the initial state to the specified time. Based on the period adjusting means for outputting a signal having a predetermined output period regardless of the opening period of the door and the signal output by the period adjusting means, the detection result by the door opening detecting means is output to the specific device. The door opening detecting means initially includes the output means, the output means, and the power supply means for supplying power to the period adjusting means to operate the door opening detecting means when the closing of the door body is detected. The power supply means includes an initialization means for bringing the state to a state, and the power supply means includes an off-time operating means for supplying power to the output means and the period adjusting means to operate when the power of the game machine is turned off. A game machine A1 characterized by being a door.

According to the game machine A1, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is predetermined by the operation from the initial state to the specified time regardless of the opening time of the door body. Outputs a signal for the output period. Then, the output means outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the signal output from the period adjusting means. Here, the output period of the signal output by the period adjusting means is determined by the operation of the period adjusting means from the initial state to the specified time. In order to have the period adjusting means output a signal having a predetermined output period regardless of the opening time of the door body, the initialization means is a period adjusting means when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. To the initial state. Therefore, the period adjusting means can always operate from the initial state when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. Therefore, each time the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is normally and stably operated from the initial state to the specified time, so that the output period predetermined for the period adjusting means is obtained. The signal can be output normally and stably, and the detection result can be output normally and stably from the output means to the specific device.

Further, according to the game machine A1, in addition to the state where the power of the game machine is turned on, even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, the door opening detecting means of the door body. When the opening is detected, the power is supplied to the output means and the period adjusting means by the operating means during the off. Therefore, even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, a signal having a predetermined output period by the period adjusting means is obtained. Is output, and the output means outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the output signal. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

The space formed by the door body and the main body indicates the back surface or the back side (including the back side of the main body) of the door body that cannot be touched when the door body is closed. Further, the detection result output from the output means provided for each of the plurality of game machines may be received by one specific device, or the specific device may be provided for each game machine and the specific device may be distributed to each game machine. You may set it. When the specific device is arranged in each game machine, the box base and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected to each other and specified in the space formed by the box cover and the box base. Store the device. Then, the box cover and the box base are connected by the sealing unit so as not to be opened. Further, a sealing sticker is attached to the connecting portion between the box cover and the box base over the box cover and the box base. On top of that, the specific device may be arranged on the back surface or the back surface side of the door body.

In the game machine A1, the door opening detecting means includes a stopping means for stopping the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means when the closing of the door body is detected. A2.

According to the game machine A2, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the stopping means stops the power supply by the power supply means to the period adjusting means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be put into the initial state by the initialization means while the operation of the period adjusting means is stopped by the stopping means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be normally and stably set to the initial state.

In the game machine A1 or A2, the period adjusting means is configured by using the electric charge storage means, and the electric charge stored in the electric charge by the electric power supplied by the power supply means from the initial state to the specified time. The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the voltage generated in connection with the above is output as a signal having a predetermined output period.

According to the game machine A3, when the electric power from the power source means is supplied to the electricity storage means constituting the period adjusting means from the initial state to the specified time, the electric charge is stored in the electricity storage means. The period adjusting means outputs the voltage generated by the electric charge stored in the storage means as a signal having a predetermined output period. By configuring the period adjusting means by the power storage means in this way, it is possible to output a signal having a predetermined output period with a simple configuration without making the period adjusting means a complicated circuit.

In the game machine A3, when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body, the initializing means discharges the electric charge stored in the electric storage means constituting the period adjusting means to store the electric charge. The gaming machine A4, characterized in that it includes a discharging means for initializing the means.

According to the game machine A4, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the discharging means discharges the electric charge stored in the electric charge means constituting the period adjusting means. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the electric charge stored in the power storage means is discharged by the discharging means to zero when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. can do. As a result, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means configured by the power storage means can always operate from the initial state. Therefore, each time the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is normally and stably operated from the initial state to the specified time, so that the output period predetermined for the period adjusting means is obtained. The signal can be output normally and stably, and the detection result can be output normally and stably from the output means to the specific device. As a method of discharging the power storage means, short-circuiting the power storage means to the ground is exemplified.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, the stopping means is a releasing means for releasing the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. A game machine A5 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the game machine A5, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means is released by the releasing means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be brought to the initial state by the initializing means or the discharging means while the power supply to the period adjusting means is stopped by the releasing means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be normally and stably set to the initial state.

In the game machine A5, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the initialization means releases the short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the ground by the discharging means. The stopping means includes the discharge releasing means, and when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the stopping means stops the disconnection of the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means by the releasing means. Further, the power supply restarting means for restarting the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means is provided, and when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the power supply restarting means After the short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the ground by the discharging means is released by the discharging releasing means, the disconnection of the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means is stopped. When the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means is restarted and the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the discharging means is the electricity of the power supply means and the period adjusting means. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, after the target connection is released by the release means, the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means is short-circuited to the ground to discharge the charge stored in the power storage means.

According to the game machine A6, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the power supply restarting means first uses the short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the grant as the discharge releasing means. After the release, the power supply from the power supply means to the period adjusting means is restarted. On the other hand, when the door opening detecting means detects that the door body is closed, the discharging means first causes the disconnecting means to disconnect the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means, and then constitutes the period adjusting means. The power storage means is short-circuited to the ground to discharge the electric charge stored in the power storage means. Therefore, the power supply means and the ground are not short-circuited in both the case where the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body and the case where the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. .. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent damage to the power supply means and the like due to a short circuit between the power supply means and the ground.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, an output period limiting means for keeping one output period by the output means within a predetermined period is provided, and the off operating means is in addition to the output means and the period adjusting means. The gaming machine A7 is configured to supply electric power to the output period limiting means for operation.

According to the game machine A7, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means and the period adjusting means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door body once. Can be kept within a predetermined period to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

In any of the game machines A1 to A7, the off-time operating means is configured to be rechargeable by electric power supplied from the power source of the game machine.

According to the game machine A8, the operating means during off is charged by the electric power supplied to the game machine while the power of the game machine is turned on, so that the power of the game machine is turned on according to the business hours of the game hall. Only the operating means can be charged while off. Therefore, if the door is opened while the power of the game machine is turned off after the game hall is closed, the output means and the period adjusting means (further, the output period limiting means) are used by the operating means during the off period. Can be operated to notify the specific device of the detection result by the door opening detection means.

In the game machine A7 or A8, the output means outputs a detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means, and the output period limiting means of the door body by the door opening detecting means. The gaming machine A9, characterized in that when an opening is detected, an output is performed to the output means during the predetermined period.

According to the game machine A9, to the output means that outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means, during the predetermined period when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, Output is performed by the output period limiting means. Therefore, the output operation to the output means by the output period limiting means can be stopped within a predetermined period for each opening of the door body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In the game machine A9, the output period limiting means stops the output to the output means when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body.

According to the game machine A10, the output of the output period limiting means to the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device is stopped when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body, the power consumed by the output operation of the output period limiting means can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In any of the game machines A7 to A10, the output period limiting means is configured by using a monostable multivibrator, and the output period of the signal output to the monostable multivibrator by the period adjusting means is the door body. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that it is set to a period shorter than the predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the above.

According to the game machine A11, the signal input to the output period limiting means using the monostable multivibrator is a predetermined output period by the output means regardless of the opening period of the door body by the period adjusting means. Adjusted shorter than the period. Here, the monostable multivibrator continues to output the signal unless the input period of the input signal is shorter than the output period of the output signal. Therefore, when the monostable multivibrator is used as the output period limiting means, it is input to the output period limiting means more than the output period of the output signal, that is, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means. The input period of the signal, that is, the opening period of the door body must be short. However, since it is completely unpredictable how long the opening period of the door body will be, in order to make the opening period of the door body always shorter than the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means, the predetermined period is required. It is necessary to set the setting to a sufficient period. For example, if the opening period of the door body is predicted to be from several tens of seconds to several minutes, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means is set from several minutes to several tens of minutes with sufficient margin. Must. Then, during this predetermined period, power is continuously supplied to the output period limiting means and the output means from the off operating means, so that the off operating means is significantly consumed. Therefore, in order to suppress the consumption of the operating means during off after using the monostable multivibrator as the output period limiting means, a special circuit configuration is required. However, according to the game machine A11, the period adjusting means can adjust the signal input to the output period limiting means to be shorter than the predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the door body. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the door body, the output period limiting means can be operated normally, so that one output period by the output means can be kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. As described above, according to the game machine A11, by providing the period adjusting means, the consumption of the operating means during off is suppressed, and the output period is used by using the monostable multivibrator without adopting a special circuit configuration. The limiting means can be realized.

In any of the game machines A1 to A11, the game machine A12 is characterized in that the output means is mounted on a substrate different from the control means.

In any of the game machines A1 to A12, the output means includes a photocoupler, and the detection result by the door open detection means is output to the specific device by the output of the photocoupler. Machine A13.

In any of the game machines A1 to A13, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) are configured to be operable even if the voltage is lower than the operating voltage of the control means. Characteristic gaming machine A14.

According to the game machine A14, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) are configured to be able to operate even if the voltage is lower than the operating voltage of the control means. Even if the amount of charge decreases and the output voltage of the operating means during off becomes lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) are operated to open the door body. Can be reported to a specific device. That is, it is possible to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

In any of the game machines A1 to A14, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) have an operable range voltage configured in a wider range than the operable range voltage of the control means. A game machine A15 characterized by.

According to the game machine A15, the operable range voltage of the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) is configured to be wider than the operable range voltage of the control means. Therefore, when the power of the gaming machine is turned off, the output means and the period adjusting means (furthermore, the output period limiting means) can be operated for a long time by the operating means during the off, so that the door body when the power of the gaming machine is turned off It is possible to detect the opening of the door for a long time.

In any of the game machines A7 to A15, the game machine A16 is characterized in that the output period limiting means is configured to include a C-MOS semiconductor.

According to the game machine A16, the output period limiting means includes a C-MOS semiconductor. Here, the C-MOS semiconductor generally consumes less power during operation. Therefore, according to the game machine A16, it is possible to reduce the consumption of the operating means during the off and to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

A17, wherein in any of the game machines A1 to A16, the period adjusting means is configured by using an integrator circuit.

According to the game machine A17, since the period adjusting means is configured by using the integrating circuit, the signal input to the output period limiting means is adjusted shorter than the predetermined period without using a complicated circuit or signal processing. be able to. Further, by adjusting the resistance value of the resistor used in the integrating circuit and the capacitance value of the capacitor, the output period of the signal output by the period limiting means can be freely adjusted within a predetermined period.

A18, which is one of the gaming machines A1 to A17, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A17, the game machine A19 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A20 of the gaming machines A1 to A17, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. The door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body and the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means are provided. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that when the power of the gaming machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, the detection result by the door opening detecting means can be output to the specific device.

According to the game machine B1, even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is specified by the output means. Output to the device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. A door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body, an output means for outputting the detection result to a specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and one time by the output means. A game characterized by comprising an output period limiting means for keeping an output period within a predetermined period, and an off-time operating means for operating the output period limiting means and the output means while the power of the gaming machine is off. Machine B2.

According to the game machine B2, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Since the output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off, if the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body even when the power of the game machine is off. , The detection result can be output to a specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door once is within a predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. A door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body, an output means for outputting the detection result to a specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and one time by the output means. The output means includes an output period limiting means for keeping the output period within a predetermined period, and an off-time operating means for operating the output period limiting means and the output means while the power of the gaming machine is off. The detection result is output to the specific device based on the output from the period limiting means, and the output period limiting means is said to be said during the predetermined period when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. A game machine B3 characterized by outputting to an output means.

According to the game machine B3, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Since the output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off, if the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body even when the power of the game machine is off. , The detection result can be output to a specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door once is within a predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

Further, the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means is provided by the output period limiting means during a predetermined period when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. Output is done. Therefore, the output operation to the output means by the output period limiting means can be stopped within a predetermined period for each opening of the door body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. A door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body, an output means for outputting the detection result to a specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and one time by the output means. The output means includes an output period limiting means for keeping the output period within a predetermined period, and an off-time operating means for operating the output period limiting means and the output means while the power of the gaming machine is off. The detection result is output to the specific device based on the output from the period limiting means, and the output period limiting means outputs to the output means when the opening of the door body is not detected by the door opening detecting means. A game machine B4 characterized by stopping the door.

According to the game machine B4, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Since the output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off, if the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body even when the power of the game machine is off. , The detection result can be output to a specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door once is within a predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

Further, the output of the output period limiting means to the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device is stopped when the opening of the door body is not detected by the door opening detecting means. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body, the power consumed by the output operation of the output period limiting means can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. A door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body, an output means for outputting the detection result to a specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, and one time by the output means. The output when the output period limiting means using a monostable multi-vibrator that keeps the output period within a predetermined period and the output period limiting means are connected and the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body. The power of the game machine is turned off by the input period adjusting means for adjusting the signal input to the period limiting means to a period shorter than the predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the door body, and the output period limiting means and the output means. The gaming machine B5, which is provided with an off-middle operation means for operating the inside.

According to the game machine B5, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Since the output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off, if the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body even when the power of the game machine is off. , The detection result can be output to a specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Like the output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, so that the operating period of the output means by opening the door once is within a predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

Further, the signal input to the output period limiting means using the monostable multivibrator is shorter than the predetermined period, which is one output period by the output means, regardless of the opening period of the door body by the input period adjusting means. Be adjusted. Here, the monostable multivibrator continues to output the signal unless the input period of the input signal is shorter than the output period of the output signal. Therefore, when the monostable multivibrator is used as the output period limiting means, it is input to the output period limiting means more than the output period of the output signal, that is, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means. The input period of the signal, that is, the opening period of the door body must be short. However, since it is completely unpredictable how long the opening period of the door body will be, in order to make the opening period of the door body always shorter than the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means, the predetermined period is required. It is necessary to set the setting to a sufficient period. For example, if the opening period of the door body is predicted to be from several tens of seconds to several minutes, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means is set from several minutes to several tens of minutes with sufficient margin. Must. Then, during this predetermined period, power is continuously supplied to the output period limiting means and the output means from the off operating means, so that the off operating means is significantly consumed. Therefore, in order to suppress the consumption of the operating means during off after using the monostable multivibrator as the output period limiting means, a special circuit configuration is required. However, according to the game machine B5, the input period adjusting means can adjust the signal input to the output period limiting means to be shorter than a predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the door body. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the door body, the output period limiting means can be operated normally, so that one output period by the output means can be kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. As described above, according to the game machine B5, by providing the input period adjusting means, the consumption of the operating means during off is suppressed, and the output is performed by using the monostable multivibrator without adopting a special circuit configuration. A time limiting means can be realized.

The game machine B6 is characterized in that the input period adjusting means is configured by using an integrator circuit in the game machine B5.

According to the game machine B6, since the input period adjusting means is configured by using the integrating circuit, the signal input to the output period limiting means is adjusted shorter than the predetermined period without using a complicated circuit or signal processing. can do. Further, by adjusting the resistance value of the resistor used in the integrating circuit and the capacitance value of the capacitor, the input period of the signal input to the output period limiting means can be freely adjusted within a predetermined period.

In the game machine B5 or B6, the game machine B7 is characterized in that the input period adjusting means includes a constant voltage means for making the maximum voltage of a signal input to the output period limiting means constant.

According to the game machine B7, since the constant voltage means is provided, the maximum voltage of the signal input to the output period limiting means is made constant, the signal input to the output period limiting means is stabilized, and the output means is used. One output period can be stably maintained within a predetermined period.

When the input period adjusting means is configured by using the integrator circuit, an electric charge is stored in the capacitor used in the integrator circuit, and the voltage due to this electric charge is superimposed on the signal input to the output period limiting means. , There is a risk that an overvoltage that can destroy the output period limiting means will be applied to the output period limiting means. However, according to the gaming machine 7, since the maximum voltage of the signal input to the output period limiting means is made constant by the constant voltage means, the overvoltage that can destroy the output period limiting means is not applied to the output period limiting means. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output period limiting means from being destroyed.

In the game machine B7, the game machine B8 is characterized in that the constant voltage means is composed of a Zener diode.

According to the game machine B8, since the constant voltage means is composed of the Zener diode, the input to the output period limiting means is simpler and cheaper than the constant voltage circuit composed of a complicated circuit or the like. The maximum voltage of the signal can be kept constant. Therefore, by using a simple configuration and inexpensive Zener diode, the signal input to the output period limiting means is stabilized, and one output period by the output means is stably kept within a predetermined period while the output period is limited. It is possible to prevent an overvoltage that can destroy the means from being applied to the output period limiting means.

In the game machines B1 to B8, the door body is configured to have an inner frame that is opened and closed with respect to the main body and a transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame, and the door opening detecting means. Are provided on the inner frame and the transparent plate support door, respectively, and are connected in parallel to the output means, and the output means is connected to at least one of the inner frame or the transparent plate support door by the door opening detecting means. A gaming machine B9, characterized in that, when an opening is detected, the detection result is output to the specific device.

According to the game machine B9, the door opening detecting means is provided in the inner frame and the transparent plate support door, respectively, and is connected in parallel to the output means. Therefore, the door opening detecting means of the inner frame or the transparent plate supporting door can be used. When at least one of the open doors is detected, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Therefore, even if either the inner frame or the transparent plate support door constituting the door body is opened, the opening can be notified to the specific device by the output means of 1.

In any of the game machines B1 to B9, the door opening detecting means is configured to conduct conduction when the door body is open, but to shut off when the door body is closed. A game machine B10 characterized by being played. According to the game machine B10, the door opening detecting means is conducted when the door body is open, and is shut off when the door body is closed, so that it is a time when a fraudulent act is executed. The power consumption can be kept small by operating the output means only while the door body is open.

In any of the game machines B1 to B10, the off-time operating means that is charged while the power of the game machine is on is provided, and the output means operates by the electric charge or electric power charged in the off-time operating means. A game machine B11 characterized by this. According to the game machine B11, the operating means during off is charged by the electric power supplied to the game machine while the power of the game machine is turned on, so that the power of the game machine is turned on according to the business hours of the game hall. Only the operating means can be charged while off. Therefore, if the door is opened while the power of the game machine is turned off after the game hall is closed, the output means (and the output period limiting means) are operated by the operating means during the off, and the door is opened. The detection result by the open detection means can be notified to the specific device.

In any of the game machines B1 to B11, the control means includes a main control means for performing main control of the game, and the output means is mounted on the main control means. ..

In any of the game machines B1 to B11, the game machine B13 is characterized in that the output means is mounted on a substrate different from the control means.

In any of the game machines B1 to B13, the output means includes a photocoupler, and the detection result by the door open detection means is output to the specific device by the output of the photocoupler. Machine B14.

In any of the game machines B2 to B14, the output period limiting means and the output means are configured to be operable even if the voltage is lower than the operating voltage of the control means. .. According to the game machine B15, since the output period limiting means and the output means are configured to be able to operate even at a voltage lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the charge amount of the operating means during off is reduced. Even if the output voltage of the operating means during off becomes lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the output period limiting means and the output means can be operated to notify the specific device of the opening of the door body. That is, it is possible to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

In any of the game machines B2 to B15, the output period limiting means and the output means are characterized in that the operable range voltage thereof is configured to be wider than the operable range voltage of the control means. B16. According to the game machine B16, the output period limiting means and the output means are configured such that the operable range voltage thereof is wider than the operating range voltage of the control means. Therefore, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the output period limiting means and the output means can be operated for a long time by the operating means during the off, so that the opening detection of the door body when the power of the game machine is turned off is performed for a long time. Can be done.

In any of the game machines B2 to B16, the game machine B17 is characterized in that the output period limiting means is configured to include a C-MOS semiconductor. According to the game machine B17, the output period limiting means includes a C-MOS semiconductor. Here, the C-MOS semiconductor generally consumes less power during operation. Therefore, according to the game machine B17, it is possible to reduce the consumption of the operating means during the off and to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

A gaming machine B18, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any of the gaming machines B1 to B17.

In any of the game machines B1 to B17, the game machine B19 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine.

A gaming machine B20 in any of the gaming machines B1 to B17, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

A main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, a control means that is provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body and controls a game, and a notification means that performs notification by controlling the control means. In a gaming machine equipped with the above, when the door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the door body with respect to the main body and the door opening detecting means detect the opening of the door body, the detection result is obtained by the control means. The output means is provided with an output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device and outputting the notification to the specific device, and the output means is controlled by the control means when the power of the game machine is turned on. In this case, the detection result by the door opening detection means is output to the specific device, and even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control by the control means is not performed, the door opening detection means is used. A game machine C1 characterized in that it is configured to output a detection result to the specific device.

According to the game machine C1, when the power of the game machine is turned on and the control means is controlled, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is controlled by the output means. It is output to the means and the notification by the notification means is executed, and the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means. Therefore, for example, if the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone while the power of the game machine is turned on, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the notification by the notification means. At the same time, it is possible to identify the game machine whose door body is open by the specific device. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the control of the control means is stopped, but even in this case, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output. It is output to a specific device by means. Therefore, even if the door body is opened by somebody's fraudulent act after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the specific device. Therefore, regardless of the power on / off state of the game machine, when the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means of 1, and the game in which the door body is opened. The machine can be identified by a specific device.

In the game machine C1, a power supply means for supplying electric power to the output means to operate when the power of the game machine is turned on and a power supply means thereof are provided separately, and the power of the game machine is turned off. The control means includes an off-time operating means for supplying electric power to the output means to operate the output means, and the output means operates with the electric power supplied by the power supply means to obtain a detection result by the door open detection means. It is provided with a control output means for outputting to the specific device and a specific output means for operating by the electric power supplied by the power supply means or the operating means during off and outputting the detection result by the door open detection means to the specific device. A game machine C2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C2, when the power of the game machine is turned on, electric power is supplied to the control output means and the specific output means by the power supply means. As a result, when the door opening detection means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the control means by the control output means, the notification by the notification means is executed, and the detection result is output for identification. It is output to a specific device by means. Therefore, for example, if the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone while the power of the game machine is turned on, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the notification by the notification means. At the same time, it is possible to identify the game machine whose door body is open by the specific device. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, power is supplied to the specific output means by the operating means during the off. As a result, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the specifying output means. Therefore, even if the door body is opened by somebody's fraudulent act after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the specific device. Therefore, regardless of the power on / off state of the game machine, when the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone, the detection result is output to the specific device by the specific output means, and the game in which the door body is opened. The machine can be identified by a specific device.

In the game machine C2, the output period limiting means for keeping one output period by the specific output means within a predetermined period is provided, and the off-operating operating means is the output period limiting means in addition to the specific output means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is configured to supply electric power to operate the device.

According to the game machine C3, one output period by the specific output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Similar to the specific output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the operation period of the specific output means by opening the door once. Can be kept within a predetermined period to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the specific output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

In the game machine C2 or C3, the off-time operating means is configured to be rechargeable by electric power supplied from the power source of the game machine.

According to the game machine C4, the operating means during off is charged by the electric power supplied to the game machine while the power of the game machine is turned on, so that the power of the game machine is turned on according to the business hours of the game hall. Only the operating means can be charged while off. Therefore, if the door is opened while the power of the game machine is turned off after the game hall is closed, the specific output means and the output period limiting means are operated by the operating means during the off, and the door is opened. The detection result by the open detection means can be notified to the specific device.

In any of the game machines C2 to C4, a diode for passing a current supplied from the power supply means in one direction is provided, and the operating means during off is configured by using a capacitor or a secondary battery, and the door open detection means. Is configured to be conducted when the door body is open, while being cut off when the door body is closed, and the power supply means is connected to the anode terminal of the diode. It is connected, the cathode terminal of the diode is connected to one end of the off operating means, the other end of the off operating means is grounded, and the control output means is the power supply means. And the anode terminal of the diode are connected via the door opening detecting means, and the specifying output means is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode and one end of the operating means during off via the door opening detecting means. A game machine C5 characterized by being a diode.

According to the game machine C5, the control output means is connected to the power supply means and the anode terminal of the diode. Therefore, when the door body is opened when the power of the game machine is turned on, the door open detection means Is conducted and power is supplied from the power supply means to the control output means to enter the operating state. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the power supply by the power supply means is stopped, so even if the door body is opened and the door open detection means conducts, the control output means is sent. Power is not supplied from the power supply means and the unit is stopped. On the other hand, since the specific output means is connected to the operating means during off and the cathode terminal of the diode, when the door body is opened when the power of the game machine is turned on, the door open detection means is used. It becomes conductive and power is supplied from the power supply means to the specific output means to enter the operating state. When the power of the game machine is turned off, the power supply to the specific output means by the power supply means is stopped, but when the door body is opened and the door open detection means is electrically connected, the identification is performed by the operating means during the off. Since the power is supplied to the output means, the specific output means is in the operating state. Here, when the power of the game machine is turned off and power is supplied from the operating means to the specific output means during the off, the power supply to the control output means can be cut off by the diode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the specific output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, the door body includes an inner frame that is opened and closed with respect to the main body, and a transparent plate support door that is opened and closed with respect to the inner frame. The inner frame door opening detecting means provided on the inner frame and the transparent plate door opening detecting means provided on the transparent plate support door are provided, and the output means is said by the inner frame door opening detecting means. When the opening of the inner frame is detected, the detection result is output to the control means to execute the notification by the notification means, and the detection result is output to the specific device. The first output means and the transparent plate. When the opening of the transparent plate support door is detected by the door opening detecting means, the detection result is output to the control means to execute the notification by the notification means, and the detection result is output to the specific device. A game machine C6 including a second output means.

According to the game machine C6, when the power of the game machine is turned on and the control means is controlled, when the opening of the inner frame is detected by the door opening detecting means for the inner frame, the detection result is the first. 1 The output means outputs to the control means to execute the notification by the notification means, and the detection result is output to the specific device by the first output means. Similarly, when the power of the game machine is turned on and the opening of the transparent plate support door is detected by the transparent plate door opening detecting means, the detection result is output to the control means by the second output means. The notification by the notification means is executed, and the detection result is output to the specific device by the second output means. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the control of the control means is stopped, but even in this case, when the opening of the inner frame is detected by the inner frame door opening detecting means, the detection is detected. The result is output to the specific device by the first output means. Similarly, when the power of the game machine is turned off and the opening of the transparent plate support door is detected by the transparent plate door opening detecting means, the detection result is output to the specific device by the second output means. .. As described above, the first output means for outputting the detection result when the inner frame is opened and the second output means for outputting the detection result when the transparent plate support door is opened are separately provided. Therefore, when either one or both of the inner frame and the transparent plate support door are opened, it is possible to determine which one was opened by the notification by the notification means and the specific device.

In any of the game machines C3 to C6, the specific output means outputs a detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means, and the output period limiting means is the door opening detecting means. The gaming machine C7 is characterized in that when the opening of the door body is detected by the above, an output is performed to the specific output means during the predetermined period.

According to the game machine C7, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output to the specific device by the specifying output means. Since the specific output means operates by receiving power supply from the operating means while the game machine is turned off, the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body even when the game machine is turned off. Then, the detection result can be output to the specific device. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, the game machine with the door body opened can be determined by the specific device.

Moreover, one output period by the specific output means is kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. Similar to the specific output means, the output period limiting means also operates by receiving power supply from the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the operation period of the specific output means by opening the door once. Can be kept within a predetermined period to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is off. Therefore, the number of times that the specific output means can be operated can be increased, and the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected can be increased.

Further, for the specific output means that outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the output from the output period limiting means, the output period is limited during the predetermined period when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body. Output is done by means. Therefore, the output operation to the specific output means by the output period limiting means can be stopped within a predetermined period for each opening of the door body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the specific output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In the game machine C7, the output period limiting means stops the output to the specific output means when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body.

According to the game machine C8, the output of the output period limiting means to the specifying output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device is stopped when the opening of the door body is not detected by the door opening detecting means. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means does not detect the opening of the door body, the power consumed by the output operation of the output period limiting means can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the consumption of the operating means during the off while the power of the game machine is turned off, and to increase the number of times the specific output means can be operated to increase the number of times that the opening of the door body can be detected.

In any of the game machines C3 to C8, the output period limiting means is configured by using a monostable multivibrator, is connected to the monostable multivibrator, and opens the door body by the door opening detecting means. When is detected, the game is provided with an input period adjusting means for adjusting a signal to be input to the monostable multivibrator to a period shorter than the predetermined period regardless of the opening time of the door body. Machine C9.

According to the game machine C9, the signal input to the output period limiting means using the monostable multivibrator has one output period by the specific output means by the input period adjusting means regardless of the opening period of the door body. It is adjusted to be shorter than the predetermined period. Here, the monostable multivibrator continues to output the signal unless the input period of the input signal is shorter than the output period of the output signal. Therefore, when the monostable multivibrator is used as the output period limiting means, it is input to the output period limiting means more than the output period of the output signal, that is, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means. The input period of the signal, that is, the opening period of the door body must be short. However, since it is completely unpredictable how long the opening period of the door body will be, in order to make the opening period of the door body always shorter than the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means, the predetermined period is required. It is necessary to set the setting to a sufficient period. For example, if the opening period of the door body is predicted to be from several tens of seconds to several minutes, the predetermined period limited by the output period limiting means is set from several minutes to several tens of minutes with sufficient margin. Must. Then, during this predetermined period, power is continuously supplied from the off operating means to the output period limiting means and the specific output means, so that the off operating means is significantly consumed. Therefore, in order to suppress the consumption of the operating means during off after using the monostable multivibrator as the output period limiting means, a special circuit configuration is required. However, according to the game machine C9, the input period adjusting means can adjust the signal input to the output period limiting means to be shorter than a predetermined period regardless of the opening period of the door body. Therefore, regardless of the opening period of the door body, the output period limiting means can be operated normally, so that one output period by the specific output means can be kept within a predetermined period by the output period limiting means. As described above, according to the game machine C9, by providing the input period adjusting means, the consumption of the operating means during off is suppressed, and the output is performed by using the monostable multivibrator without adopting a special circuit configuration. A time limiting means can be realized.

In any of the game machines C1 to C9, the control means includes a main control means for performing a main control of the game, and the output means is mounted on the main control means of the game machine C10. ..

In any of the game machines C1 to C10, the game machine C11 is characterized in that the output means is mounted on a substrate different from the control means.

In any of the game machines C1 to C11, the output means includes a photocoupler, and the detection result by the door open detection means is output to the control means and the specific device by the output of the photocoupler. The game machine C12.

In any of the game machines C3 to C12, the output period limiting means and the specifying output means are configured to be operable even at a voltage lower than the operating voltage of the control means. Machine C13.

According to the game machine C13, since the output period limiting means and the specifying output means are configured to be able to operate even at a voltage lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the charge amount of the operating means during off is reduced. Therefore, even if the output voltage of the operating means during off becomes lower than the operating voltage of the control means, the output period limiting means and the specifying output means can be operated to notify the specific device of the opening of the door body. That is, it is possible to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

In any of the game machines C3 to C13, the output period limiting means and the specifying output means are characterized in that the operable range voltage thereof is configured to be wider than the operable range voltage of the control means. Game machine C14.

According to the game machine C14, the output period limiting means and the specifying output means are configured such that the operable range voltage thereof is wider than the operating range voltage of the control means. Therefore, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the output period limiting means and the specific output means can be operated for a long time by the operating means during the off, so that the opening detection of the door body when the power of the game machine is turned off can be detected for a long time. It can be carried out.

In any of the game machines C3 to C14, the game machine C15 is characterized in that the output period limiting means is configured to include a C-MOS semiconductor.

According to the game machine C15, the output period limiting means includes a C-MOS semiconductor. Here, the C-MOS semiconductor generally consumes less power during operation. Therefore, according to the game machine C15, it is possible to reduce the consumption of the operating means during the off and to detect the opening of the door body for a long time when the power of the game machine is turned off.

In any of the game machines C9 to C15, the game machine C16 is characterized in that the input period adjusting means is configured by using an integrator circuit.

According to the game machine C16, since the input period adjusting means is configured by using the integrating circuit, the signal input to the output period limiting means is adjusted shorter than the predetermined period without using a complicated circuit or signal processing. can do. Further, by adjusting the resistance value of the resistor used in the integrating circuit and the capacitance value of the capacitor, the input period of the signal input to the output period limiting means can be freely adjusted within a predetermined period.

In any of the game machines C9 to C16, the input period adjusting means includes a constant voltage means for stabilizing the maximum voltage of a signal input to the monostable multivibrator which is the output period limiting means. Game machine C17.

According to the game machine C17, since the constant voltage means is provided, the maximum voltage of the signal input to the output period limiting means is made constant, the signal input to the output period limiting means is stabilized, and the specific output is output. It is possible to stably keep one output period by means within a predetermined period.

When the input period adjusting means is configured by using the integrator circuit, an electric charge is stored in the capacitor used in the integrator circuit, and the voltage due to this electric charge is superimposed on the signal input to the output period limiting means. , There is a risk that an overvoltage that can destroy the output period limiting means will be applied to the output period limiting means. However, according to the game machine C17, since the maximum voltage of the signal input to the output period limiting means is made constant by the constant voltage means, the overvoltage that can destroy the output period limiting means is not applied to the output period limiting means. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output period limiting means from being destroyed.

In the game machine C17, the constant voltage means is the game machine C18, which is composed of a Zener diode.

According to the game machine C18, since the constant voltage means is composed of the Zener diode, the input to the output period limiting means is simpler and cheaper than the constant voltage circuit composed of a complicated circuit or the like. The maximum voltage of the signal can be kept constant. Therefore, by using a simple configuration and inexpensive Zener diode, the signal input to the output period limiting means is stabilized, and one output period by the specific output means is stably maintained within a predetermined period while the output is performed. It is possible to prevent an overvoltage that can destroy the period limiting means from being applied to the output period limiting means.

A gaming machine C19 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C18, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

In any of the game machines C1 to C18, the game machine C20 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine.

In any of the game machines C1 to C18, the game machine C21 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine.

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game, the door to the main body is provided. The door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the body and the output means for outputting the detection result to the specific device when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means are provided. When the power of the game machine is turned on and the control is performed by the control means, the detection result by the door opening detection means is output to the specific device, the power of the game machine is turned off, and the control means is used. The gaming machine C22 is configured to output the detection result by the door opening detecting means to the specific device even when the control is not performed.

According to the game machine C22, when the power of the game machine is turned on and the control means is controlled, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is specified by the output means. Output to the device. Therefore, for example, if the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone while the power of the game machine is turned on, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the specific device. On the other hand, when the power of the game machine is turned off, the control of the control means is stopped, but even in this case, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the detection result is output. It is output to a specific device by means. Therefore, even if the door body is opened by somebody's fraudulent act after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, it is possible to determine the game machine whose door body is opened by the specific device. Therefore, regardless of the power on / off state of the game machine, when the door body is opened by an illegal act by someone, the detection result is output to the specific device by the output means of 1, and the game in which the door body is opened. The machine can be identified by a specific device.

In any of the game machines C1, C6, C10 to C12 or C19 to C22, the generation means for generating the signal output as the detection result from the output means, and the generation means of the game machine via a specific location. The game machine C23 is characterized by comprising an on-time supply means for supplying electric power while the power is on, and an off-time supply means for supplying electric power to the specific location while the game machine is off.

According to the game machine C23, while the power of the game machine is on, power is supplied from the power supply means while the power of the game machine is on, while power is supplied to the specific place of the generation means while the power of the game machine is off. Power is supplied from the means. That is, power is supplied to the generation means regardless of whether the power of the game machine is on or off. Therefore, the generation means can generate a signal output as a detection result from the output means regardless of the on / off state of the power supply of the game machine.
<Others>
In the pachinko machine, when a ball driven into the game area enters the symbol operating port, a lottery is performed at the timing of the entry (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-1983332). Further, in a slot machine or a rotating game machine using a game ball, when the start lever is operated, a lottery is performed at the timing of the operation. As a result of the lottery, for example, when a big hit occurs, a large number of prize balls and coins can be paid out. Since the control for determining the lottery and the jackpot is performed by the main control device, the main control device is likely to be the target of fraudulent activity.
As a specific fraudulent act, for example, the main control device is replaced with a fraudulent one in which a jackpot occurs frequently, or a fraudulent board (for example, a "hanging board") is connected to the main control device to make a jackpot. There are things that illegally generate. Further, in the case of a pachinko machine, there is also a fraudulent act of illegally bending a nail driven on the surface of the game board to make it easier for the ball to enter the winning opening or the symbol operating opening.
In the case of pachinko machines, the main control device is mounted on the back of the game board. On the other hand, a glass frame is provided on the front surface of the game board, and the glass frame can be opened and closed individually with respect to the inner frame body on which the game board is mounted. Therefore, when a fraudster commits a fraudulent act against the game board surface or the main control device, the inner frame or the glass frame must be opened, but when the inner frame or the glass frame is opened, the inner frame or the glass frame must be opened. Since the opening is detected by the sensor and notified to the hall computer that manages the amusement park, it is possible to easily grasp which pachinko machine the fraudulent act was committed against.
However, if an intruder invades, for example, at midnight after the amusement park is closed and the intruder opens the inner frame or the glass frame and commits an illegal act, the power of the pachinko machine is turned off at that time. Since the pachinko machine is stopped, there is a problem that the opening of the inner frame or the glass frame cannot be detected and the opening cannot be notified to the hall computer.
This technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, etc., and when the door body is opened while the power of the game machine is turned off, the opening can be grasped. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be used.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the game machine of the technical idea 1 is provided in the space formed by the main body, the door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and the door body and the main body to control the game. It is provided with a control means for performing the operation, and when the door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the door body with respect to the main body and the door opening detecting means detect the opening of the door body, the initial state is set. For example, based on the period adjusting means for outputting a signal having a predetermined output period regardless of the opening period of the door body by the operation from the initial state to the specified time, and the signal output by the period adjusting means. The door opening detecting means includes an output means for outputting the detection result by the door opening detecting means to a specific device, and a power supply means for supplying power to the output means and the period adjusting means to operate the door opening detecting means. The power supply means includes an initialization means for initializing the period adjustment means when the closing of the door body is detected, and the power supply means includes the output means and the period adjustment means when the power of the game machine is turned off. It is equipped with a means of operating during off to operate by supplying power to the door.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1. When the door opening detecting means detects the closure of the door body, the power supply means stops the power supply to the period adjusting means. It is equipped with a means of stopping.
The game machine according to the technical idea 3 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the period adjusting means is configured by using a storage means for storing electric charges, and the power source means sets a specified time from the initial state. The voltage generated by the electric charge stored in the power storage means by the electric power supplied up to the above is output as a signal having the predetermined output period.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, and the initialization means constitutes the period adjusting means when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. It is provided with a discharge means for initializing the power storage means by discharging the electric charge stored in the power storage means.
The game machine of the technical idea 5 is the game machine according to any one of the technical ideas 2 to 4, and the stopping means is the power source when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. It is provided with a releasing means for disconnecting the electrical connection between the means and the period adjusting means.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 6 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 5, wherein the initialization means constitutes the period adjusting means when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. A discharge releasing means for releasing a short circuit between the power storage means and the ground by the discharging means is provided, and the stopping means includes the power supply means and the period adjusting means when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. It is provided with a power supply restarting means for stopping the disconnection of the electrical connection by the releasing means and restarting the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means, and opening the door body by the door opening detecting means. When is detected, the power supply resuming means is the power supply means and the period adjusting means after the short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the ground by the discharging means is released by the discharging releasing means. When the disconnection of the electrical connection by the release means is stopped, the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means is restarted, and the closing of the door body is detected by the door open detection means, the above The discharge means short-circuits the power storage means constituting the period adjustment means to the ground after the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjustment means is released by the release means, and the charge stored in the power storage means. To discharge.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the period adjusting means is concerned with the opening time of the door body by the operation from the initial state to the specified time. Instead, it outputs a signal that has a predetermined output period. Then, the output means outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the signal output from the period adjusting means. Here, the output period of the signal output by the period adjusting means is determined by the operation of the period adjusting means from the initial state to the specified time. In order to have the period adjusting means output a signal having a predetermined output period regardless of the opening time of the door body, the initialization means is a period adjusting means when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. To the initial state. Therefore, the period adjusting means can always operate from the initial state when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. Therefore, each time the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is normally and stably operated from the initial state to the specified time, so that the output period predetermined for the period adjusting means is obtained. There is an effect that the signal can be output normally and stably, and the detection result can be output normally and stably from the output means to the specific device.
Further, according to the game machine described in the technical idea 1, the door open detection is detected even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped in addition to the state where the power of the game machine is turned on. When the opening of the door body is detected by the means, power is supplied to the output means and the period adjusting means by the operating means during off. Therefore, even when the power of the game machine is turned off and the control means is stopped, when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, a signal having a predetermined output period by the period adjusting means is obtained. Is output, and the output means outputs the detection result to the specific device based on the output signal. Therefore, for example, even if the door body is opened due to an illegal act by someone after the store is closed with all the game machines turned off, there is an effect that the game machine with the door body opened can be identified by a specific device. is there.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the stopping means is the period adjusting means. Stop the power supply by the power supply means to. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be put into the initial state by the initialization means while the operation of the period adjusting means is stopped by the stopping means. Therefore, there is an effect that the period adjusting means can be normally and stably set to the initial state.
According to the game machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the game machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the electric power from the power source means to the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means from the initial state to the specified time. Is supplied, the electric charge is stored in the electricity storage means. The period adjusting means outputs the voltage generated by the electric charge stored in the storage means as a signal having a predetermined output period. In this way, by configuring the period adjusting means with the power storage means, it is possible to output a signal having a predetermined output period with a simple configuration without making the period adjusting means a complicated circuit. There is.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the discharging means is a period adjusting means. Discharges the electric charge stored in the storage means constituting the door. Therefore, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the electric charge stored in the power storage means is discharged by the discharging means to zero when the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. can do. As a result, when the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means configured by the power storage means can always operate from the initial state. Therefore, each time the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the period adjusting means is normally and stably operated from the initial state to the specified time, so that the output period predetermined for the period adjusting means is obtained. There is an effect that the signal can be output normally and stably, and the detection result can be output normally and stably from the output means to the specific device. As a method of discharging the power storage means, short-circuiting the power storage means to the ground is exemplified.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in any of Technical Thoughts 2 to 4, when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the power supply is supplied. The electrical connection between the means and the period adjusting means is released by the release means. Therefore, the period adjusting means can be brought to the initial state by the initializing means or the discharging means while the power supply to the period adjusting means is stopped by the releasing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the period adjusting means can be normally and stably set to the initial state.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the power supply restarting means is first used. After the discharge releasing means releases the short circuit between the power storage means and the grant constituting the period adjusting means, the power supply from the power supply means to the period adjusting means is restarted. On the other hand, when the door opening detecting means detects that the door body is closed, the discharging means first causes the disconnecting means to disconnect the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means, and then constitutes the period adjusting means. The power storage means is short-circuited to the ground to discharge the electric charge stored in the power storage means. Therefore, the power supply means and the ground are not short-circuited in both the case where the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body and the case where the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body. .. Therefore, there is an effect that damage to the power supply means or the like due to a short circuit between the power supply means and the ground can be reliably prevented.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
11 Outer frame (main body)
12 Inner frame (part of door body)
14 Front frame (part of door body)
110 Main controller (part of control means)
281 Integrator circuit (period adjustment means)
300 Inner frame open detection circuit (part of output means)
300a Inner frame terminal board output circuit (part of output means)
291 External output terminal board for inner frame (part of output means)
302 Front frame open detection circuit (part of output means)
302a Front frame terminal board output circuit (part of output means)
293 External output terminal board for front frame (part of output means)
CD1 capacitor (part of power supply means, operating means while off)
D1 diode DC1 DC power supply (part of power supply means)
IC1 timer (output period limiting means)
PR1 photocoupler (part of output means)
SW3A switch (part of door open detection means, part of stop means, part of release means, part of power supply restart means, part of initialization means, part of discharge means, part of discharge release means )
SW3-1 switch (part of stop means, part of release means, part of power supply restart means)
SW3-3 switch (part of initialization means, part of discharge means, part of discharge release means)
SW4A switch (part of door open detection means, part of stop means, part of release means, part of power supply restart means, part of initialization means, part of discharge means, part of discharge release means )
SW4-1 switch (part of stop means, part of release means, part of power supply restart means)
SW4-3 switch (part of initialization means, part of discharge means, part of discharge release means)

Claims (6)

In a gaming machine provided with a main body, a door body that opens and closes the front surface of the main body, and a control means provided in a space formed by the door body and the main body to control a game.
A door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the door body with respect to the main body,
When the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, if it is in the initial state, the operation from the initial state to the specified time causes a predetermined output period regardless of the opening period of the door body. And the period adjustment means to output the signal
Based on the signal output by the period adjusting means, the output means for outputting the detection result by the door opening detecting means to the specific device, and
The output means and the power supply means for supplying electric power to the period adjusting means to operate the means are provided.
The door opening detecting means includes an initialization means for initializing the period adjusting means when the closing of the door body is detected.
The game machine is characterized in that the power supply means includes an off-time operating means for supplying electric power to the output means and the period adjusting means to operate the game machine when the power of the game machine is turned off. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the door opening detecting means includes a stopping means for stopping the power supply to the period adjusting means by the power supply means when the closing of the door body is detected. .. The period adjusting means is configured by using the electric charge storing means, and the voltage generated by the electric power supplied by the power supply means from the initial state to the specified time is generated by the electric charge stored in the electric charge. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the signal is output as a signal having a predetermined output period. When the door opening detecting means detects the closing of the door body, the initialization means puts the storing means into an initial state by discharging the electric charge stored in the storing means constituting the period adjusting means. The gaming machine according to claim 3, further comprising a discharging means. The claim is characterized in that the stopping means includes a releasing means for releasing the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means when the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. Item 4. The gaming machine according to any one of Items 2 to 4. The initialization means includes a discharge releasing means for releasing a short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the ground by the discharging means when the opening of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means. ,
When the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the stopping means stops the disconnection of the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means by the releasing means, and the power supply means causes the stopping means. It is equipped with a power supply restarting means for restarting the power supply to the period adjustment means.
When the door opening detecting means detects the opening of the door body, the power supply restarting means cancels the short circuit between the power storage means constituting the period adjusting means and the ground by the discharging means by the discharging releasing means. After that, the disconnection of the electrical connection by the power supply means and the period adjustment means is stopped, and the power supply to the period adjustment means by the power supply means is restarted.
When the closing of the door body is detected by the door opening detecting means, the discharging means causes the period adjusting means after the electrical connection between the power supply means and the period adjusting means is released by the releasing means. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the power storage means constituting the above is short-circuited to the ground, and the electric charge stored in the power storage means is discharged.

Images